CIMON-Xpanel User Manual

1 Xpanel Installation..............................................................................................................
1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION..................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 UNINSTALL......................................................................................................................... 1-8
2 Starting Xpanel .................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 XPANEL DESIGNER STARTUP ................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 XPANEL DESIGNER TERMINATION......................................................................................... 2-12
2.3 XPANEL DESIGNER STARTUP SCREEN .................................................................................... 2-14
2.4 EDIT MENU...................................................................................................................... 2-26
2.5 VIEW MENU .................................................................................................................... 2-36
2.6 ARRANGE MENU.............................................................................................................. 2-44
2.7 ONLINE MENU ................................................................................................................. 2-56
2.8 HELP MENU..................................................................................................................... 2-78
3 Creating a Project............................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 PROJECT............................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 SAVE PROJECT.................................................................................................................. 3-10
3.3 PROJECT PROPERTIES ......................................................................................................... 3-13
3.4 PAGE.............................................................................................................................. 3-24
3.5 PAGE PROPERTIES ............................................................................................................. 3-33
3.6 XPANEL CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................... 3-41
3.7 FRAME EDITOR ................................................................................................................. 3-48
4 Database ........................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 DATABASE MANAGEMENT................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 CROSS REFERENCE ............................................................................................................ 4-18
5 Graphic Tools .................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 STANDARD TOOL ................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 STATUS TOOL..................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3 DRAWING TOOL ................................................................................................................. 5-4
5.4 FONT TOOL........................................................................................................................ 5-6
5.5 COLOR TOOL ................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.6 ARRANGE TOOL ............................................................................................................... 5-14
5.7 TAG VIEW TOOL ............................................................................................................... 5-20
6 Graphic UtilizationⅠ .......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 OBJECT CONFIGURATION...................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 BASIC OBJECT .................................................................................................................. 6-29
6.3 DYNAMIC TAG ................................................................................................................. 6-34
6.4 DATE/TIME...................................................................................................................... 6-41
6.5 KEY INPUT WINDOW ......................................................................................................... 6-45
6.6 PAGE LINK ....................................................................................................................... 6-52
6.7 SWITCH/LAMP ................................................................................................................. 6-61
6.8 STRING EDITOR ................................................................................................................. 6-77
6.9 STRING VALUE.................................................................................................................. 6-86
6.10 MULTI-LANGUAGE SETUP................................................................................................. 6-91
6.11 MULTI STRING .............................................................................................................. 6-102
7 Graphic UtilizationⅡ .......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 LIBRARY ............................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.2 LIBRARY EDITOR.................................................................................................................. 7-6
7.3 ANIMATION BITMAP .......................................................................................................... 7-11
7.4 ANIMATION EDITOR........................................................................................................... 7-19
7.5 IMAGE EMBEDDING........................................................................................................... 7-24
8 Security ............................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1 FEATURES .......................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 SETTINGS........................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.3 RELATED FEATURES ............................................................................................................. 8-4
8.4 EXERCISE ........................................................................................................................... 8-7
9 Data Logging..................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 FEATURES .......................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 MODEL CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................................... 9-2
9.3 OBJECT CONFIGURATION...................................................................................................... 9-7
9.4 RELATED FEATURES ............................................................................................................. 9-9
9.5 ADVANCED FEATURES ....................................................................................................... 9-12
9.6 EXERCISE ......................................................................................................................... 9-13
10 Trend Utilization............................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1 FEATURES...................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 SETTINGS....................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.3 RELATED FEATURES ....................................................................................................... 10-57
10.4 EXERCISE..................................................................................................................... 10-61
11 Alarm Utilization ............................................................................................................ 11-1
11.1 ALARM CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................. 11-1
11.2 ALARM SUMMARY ....................................................................................................... 11-12
12 Writing a Script ............................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1 SCRIPT .......................................................................................................................... 12-1
13 I/O Device ...................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1 SETTINGS....................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 RELATED FEATURES ....................................................................................................... 13-10
13.3 EXERCISE..................................................................................................................... 13-16
14 Data Server .................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1 XPANEL DATA SERVER..................................................................................................... 14-1
14.2 MODBUS SLAVE......................................................................................................... 14-10
15 Data Bridge ................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.1 SETTINGS....................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.2 EXAMPLE ...................................................................................................................... 15-7
16 Recipe ........................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1 SETTINGS....................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.2 RELATED FEATURES ......................................................................................................... 16-5
16.3 EXERCISE..................................................................................................................... 16-12
17 Schedule ....................................................................................................................... 17-1
17.1 SETTINGS....................................................................................................................... 17-1
17.3 EXERCISE....................................................................................................................... 17-7
18 Utilizing Other Functions ................................................................................................ 18-1
18.1 BITMAP EDIT .................................................................................................................. 18-1
18.2 SYSTEM DATA AREA ....................................................................................................... 18-5
18.3 LOADING CICON VARIABLE TABLE INFO. .......................................................................... 18-14
19 Xpanel Runtime ............................................................................................................. 19-1
19.1 SIMULATOR ................................................................................................................... 19-1
19.2 VNC ............................................................................................................................ 19-4
19.3 PC RUNTIME................................................................................................................ 19-15
19.4 XPANEL TOUCH CALIBRATION ......................................................................................... 19-25
19.5 REPAIR MODE.............................................................................................................. 19-32
20 Print .............................................................................................................................. 20-1
20.1 PRINT SETUP .................................................................................................................. 20-1
20.2 PREVIEW ....................................................................................................................... 20-3
20.3 PRINT............................................................................................................................ 20-5
20.5 PRINT IN XPANEL............................................................................................................. 20-7
Appendix 1 Functions for Script ................................................................................................ 1
FUNCTION LIST..............................................................................................................................1
TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION ............................................................................................................8
MATHEMATIC FUNCTION ............................................................................................................ 11
FUNCTIONS FOR PAGES AND PROJECT............................................................................................ 13
FUNCTIONS FOR XPANEL DEVICE ................................................................................................... 21
FUNCTIONS FOR ALARM .............................................................................................................. 26
FUNCTIONS FOR RECIPE ............................................................................................................... 29
FUNCTIONS FOR SCHEDULE .......................................................................................................... 36
FUNCTION FOR TREND................................................................................................................. 39
FUNCTIONS FOR SECURITY ........................................................................................................... 40
FUNCTIONS FOR SYSTEM MEMORY ............................................................................................... 42
FUNCTIONS FOR DATA LOGGING .................................................................................................. 43
FUNCTION FOR STRING EDITOR ..................................................................................................... 45
FUNCTIONS FOR COMMUNICATION ............................................................................................... 46
FUNCTION FOR PRINT .................................................................................................................. 51
Appendix 2 How to Use Ethernet Loader .................................................................................. 1
XPANEL IP SETTING .......................................................................................................................1
PROJECT UPDATE..........................................................................................................................2
PROJECT UPLOAD .........................................................................................................................4
OTHER FEATURES .........................................................................................................................6
Appendix 3 Xpanel Troubleshooting......................................................................................... 1
BOOTING PROBLEM.......................................................................................................................1
TOUCH PROBLEM .........................................................................................................................4
COMMUNICATION PROBLEM...........................................................................................................9
│Xpanel User Manual│
1 Xpanel Installation
1.1 Installation
Xpanel Designer is a software that allows users to create projects. You can download any
version of the software on Cimon website (www.cimon.com).
 When you install Xpanel Designer, check for the software version
compatible with product.
 A project created in the higher version cannot be executed in the
lower version.
 To establish connection between PC and product, you must
download a separate program according to the following OS
versions:
If the OS version is Windows XP, ‘ActiveSync’ is required.
If the OS version is Windows 7 and above, ‘Mobile device center’ is
required.
You can download each program on Microsoft website
(www.microsoft.com).
In order to use the project properly, please check if a model is compatible with the
software version. The products which do not supported in the Xpanel Designer version
are listed in tables below.
Products not supported between Xpanel Designer 2.11 and 2.35 versions
CM-XT05 CM-XT06
CM-XT10CA CM-XT12CA
Products not supported for Xpanel Designer 2.40 / 2.50 / 2.52 version
CM-XT04CB CM-XT05MB
CM-XT05SA CM-XT05SB
CM-XT06CB CM-XT07CB
CM-XT10CC CM-XT10CB
CM-XT12CB CM-XT12CA
1-1
Installation
Installation of Xpanel Designer
Follow the steps below to download the Xpanel Designer.
a) Go to Cimon website (www.cimon.com).
b) Go to [Customer Service] – [Download Center] on the top menu of the website.
1-2
c) Set the filter as shown below, then you can easily find the list of software. Find the
Xpanel Designer version you wish to download.
d) Click the download file at the bottom of the page.
1-3
Installation
e) Execute the installer file on the directory.
f) Wait until the Installshield program is executed. It may take a while depending
upon the system environment.
g) Read the End User License Agreement. You must accept the agreement to
continue the installation. Select a button labeled ‘Accept’ and press [Next].
1-4
h) Specify the location of Xpanel Designer and press [Next] button. If you have not
changed the path, software will be installed in ‘C:\CIMON\XpanelDesigner
“Version”’ as default. The default path may differ depending on the version of
Xpanel Designer.
 Xpanel Designer 2.50 and below versions are installed in ‘C:\CIMON\Xpanel’ by

default. If you install the higher version upon the lower version, the program will
automatically upgrade the software version.
 From Xpanel Designer 2.52 version, the software is installed in the separated path.
i) Now it is ready to install the software. Press [Install] button to begin the installation.
1-5
Installation
j) A ‘Font Select’ window will appear as the installation starts. Fonts in the PC are listed
in the left side of window. You may add or except the selected fonts for using in
the project.
The use of illegally downloaded fonts can be subject to legal action, and
Cimon will not be held liable in such cases. Please make sure to look up the
license of any font you wish to use in the Xpanel project.
1-6
k) Press [Finish] button to end the Xpanel Designer installation.
l) Launch the Xpanel Designer to check if the installation is successfully done.
1-7
Uninstall
1.2 Uninstall
This section describes the procedure of uninstalling Xpanel Designer.
Uninstalling Xpanel Designer
Follow the steps below for the removal of the Xpanel Designer.
a) Open the control panel and go to ‘Uninstall or change a program’. Select the
Xpanel Designer from the list.
b) Double-click the item or right-click and press [Delete] to begin the uninstallation
process.
1-8
c) Wait until the program is uninstalled. It may take a while depending upon the
system environment.
d) When the uninstall program is closed, you can check the application is successfully
removed from the path.
1-9
Xpanel Designer Startup
2 Starting Xpanel
2.1 Xpanel Designer Startup
Xpanel Designer is a project editing tool to build a system. With various features available
in Xpanel Designer, the users can create projects that suits their needs through various
configurations.
2.1.1 Xpanel Designer Startup
The users can launch Xpanel Designer manually by clicking the application icon or
automatically by configuring the application to run upon Windows boot up.
2.1.2 Xpanel Designer Shortcut
Shortcut for executing Xpanel Designer as administrator
By creating a shortcut icon of Xpanel Designer, the user can start up the program easily.
a) Go to Xpanel Designer installed path. The default path is

C:\CIMON\“XpanelDesigner Version_Eng” and it may differ according to the
user’s system environment.
2-1
b) Right-click the “XpanelDesigner.exe” icon and click [Send to] – [Desktop (create
shortcut)]. The shortcut icon of Xpanel Designer will appear on the desktop.
c) Double-click the icon to check if Xpanel Designer opens properly. If there are any
saved projects from the previous editing sessions, select the project to continue
editing.
2-2
2.1.3 Xpanel Designer Autorun
Registering Xpanel Designer as a starting program
The user can configure Xpanel Designer to run automatically when booting up the
Windows. Setup methods may differ depending on the versions of Windows.
For the OS versions below Windows 8, Xpanel Designer needs to be added in the
[Startup] folder. For Windows 8 and above, Xpanel Designer needs to be added in the
[Task Scheduler].
(1) OS version below Windows 8 (Windows XP, Windows 7, etc.)
a) Right-click on the “XpanelDesigner.exe” icon. Click [Send to] – [Desktop (Create

Shortcut)] on the pop-up menu.
2-3
b) Open the [Startup] window.
 Press [Windows] + [R] keys to open the [Run] window. Enter “shell:startup” in the
input box and press [OK].
 Open the [File Explorer] and enter “Startup” in the path field as shown below.
c) Move shortcut icon of Xpanel Designer into the [Startup] folder.
2-4
(2) Windows 8 and above (Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10)
a) Right-click on the “XpanelDesigner.exe” icon. Click {Send to] – [Desktop (create

shortcut)] on the pop-up menu.
b) Open the [Control Panel] and go to [Administrative Tools] – [Task Scheduler].
2-5
c) Click [Create Basic Task…] on the top right side of the [Task Scheduler] to open the
[Create Basic Task Wizard].
d) In the [Create a Basic Task] window, enter “Xpanel Designer” in the name field, then
press [Next].
2-6
e) In the [Trigger] window, select [When the computer starts] option and press [Next].
f) In the [Action] window, select [Start a program] option and press [Next].
2-7
g) Press the [Browse…] button on the right side of the [Program/Script] field and
select the shortcut icon of Xpanel Designer.
h) Finish the configuration by pressing the [Finish] button on the window.
2-8
2.1.4 Xpanel Designer Project Execution
Opening project in Xpanel Designer

a) Go to [File][ - [Open Project] in Xpanel Designer and select a project to open. Only
project files with “*.prj” or “*.xprj” file formats can be opened. The default path of
the project files is “C:\CIMON\XpanelDesigner Version_Eng\Project Folder”.
Please be noted that the default project file extension may differ
according to the Xpanel Designer version.
 Below Xpanel Designer V2.40: “*.prj”
 Xpanel Designer V2.40 and above: “*.xprj”
In the Xpanel Designer V2.40 and above, you may open both “*.prj” and
“*.xprj” file format. In the Xpanel Designer below V2.40, you can only
open “*.prj” file format.
2-9
b) In the startup page of Xpanel Designer or at [File] menu, the recently edited projects
can be found. The user can also browse or create new projects on the startup page.
The user can view up to the 4 most recent projects on the startup page or the [File]
menu.
2-10
c) The desired project will be opened in Xpanel Designer.
2-11
2.2 Xpanel Designer Termination
This section will discuss various methods of terminating Xpanel Designer.
Xpanel Designer Termination
a) Go to [File] – [Exit] or click [X] button on the top right corner of Xpanel Designer.
b) Right-click Xpanel Designer on the taskbar and select [Close window]. Xpanel
Designer can also be closed by pressing [Alt] + [F4].
2-12
Xpanel Designer Termination
c) If the changes are not saved, the following dialog box will appear.
Item Description
Yes Saves the changes and closes Xpanel Designer.
No Does not save the changes and closes Xpanel Designer.
Cancel Cancels the termination of Xpanel Designer.
2-13
2.3 Xpanel Designer Startup Screen
The figure shows the startup page upon the execution of Xpanel Designer.
Projects can be created or opened by going through the top menu bar. Once created or
opened, additional menus become enabled to interact with the project. The project
workspace allows easy management and modifications of the projects. The status
toolbar which is positioned at the bottom of the window shows additional information
of a selected resource.
2-14
Xpanel Designer Startup Screen
2.3.1 Xpanel Designer Startup Page Interface
The position of toolbars can be modified according to the users’ preference. The toolbars
can be dragged to be docked on the selected locations or float at a desired region.
To increase the working space, the project workspace and toolboxes can be minimized.
Clicking the [Downpin] button will minimize the side panel. Clicking the [Pinned]
button will fix the panel to the screen.
2-15
The figure below shows various regions where the side panel can be docked.
By dragging the panel over a selected region, the corresponding region will be
highlighted to indicate where the panel will be docked.
2-16
2.3.2 Xpanel Designer Menu
This section describes the initial state of the top menu and the additional menus
according to the executed module. You can check the version information of modules
only in the Xpanel Designer V2.40 and above.
※ Refer to each item’s manual for more information.
Name Description
File Opens or closes files in Xpanel Designer.

Edit This menu is disabled in this state of Xpanel Designer.
Toggles to hide or show a toolbar of Xpanel Designer. Various options include the
View
standard tool, status tool, and project workspace.
Tools This menu is disabled in this state of Xpanel Designer.
Help Displays the information and help of Xpanel Designer.
(1) Page Edit Menu
Once a project is opened in Xpanel Designer, the additional menus will be added to the
top menu and items will be added to the initial menus.
Name Description
File [Close], [Close All Page], [Recent Page] are added.

[Undo], [Redo], [Clone], [Select All], [Object Config], [Insert Graphic File], [Insert
Edit
Animation Bitmap] are added.
[Redraw], [Current Page Position To Runtime], [Tag Window], [Object Window],
View
[Switch/Lamp Tool], [Tag View Tool], [Zoom in/Out] are added.
Tools [Page Setup], [User Library Edit], [Bitmap Edit] are added.
Help [About Graphic Designer] is added.
2-17
(2) Project Management Menu
When selecting [Tools] – [Project], following item will be added to the [Help] menu.
Name Description
Help [About Project Manager] is added.
(3) Database Menu
When opening the [Database] window, following items will be added to [Edit] and
[Help] menu.
Name Description
Edit [New Tag], [Edit Tag] are added.

Help [About Database Manager] is added.
(4) Script Menu
When opening the [Scripts] editor window, following items will be added to [Edit] and
[Help] menu.
Name Description
Edit [Add New Script], [Edit Script], [Compile Script], [Compile All Scripts] are added.
Help [About Script Editor] is added.
2-18
(5) Data Logging Menu
When selecting [Tools] – [Data Logging], following item will be added to [Help] menu.
Name Description
Help [About Data Logging] is added.
(6) String Editor Menu
When selecting [Tools] – [String Editor], following items will be added to the [Edit] and
[Help] menu.
Name Description
[Add String Group], [Delete String Group], [Add String], [Edit String], [Delete
Edit
String], [Column Property] area added.
Help [About String Editor] is added.
(7) Data Server (Modbus Slave) Menu
When selecting [Tools] – [Data Server], following items will be added to the [Edit] and
[Help] menu.
Name Description
Edit [Slave Tag registration], [Slave Tag Edit], [Slave Tag Cancels] are added.
Help [About MODBUS SLAVE] is added.
2-19
(8) Recipe Menu
When selecting [Tools] – [Recipe], following items will be added to the [Edit] and [Help]
menu.
Name Description
[Add Recipe Model], [Edit Recipe Model], [Delete Recipe Model], [Edit Group
Edit
Name], [Edit Data Name], [Upload Recipe Data From XPANEL] are added..
Help [About Recipe Editor] is added.
(9) Data Bridge Menu
When selecting [Tools] – [Data Bridge], following items will be added to the [Edit] and
[Help] menu.
Name Description
[Add Data Bridge Model], [Edit Data Bridge Model], [Delete Data Bridge
Edit Model], [Add Data Bridge Tag], [Edit Data Bridge Tag], [Delete Data Bridge Tag]
are added.
Help [About Data Bridge Editor] is added.
2-20
2.3.3 Standard Tool
The standard toolbar contains frequently-used commands in Xpanel Designer. Go to

[View] – [Standard Tool] to show or hide the toolbar on the top menu. When you
execute the Xpanel Designer application, this toolbar shows up on the top menu as
default. This toolbar consists of ‘Edit tools’ and ‘Execution tools’.
Edit Tools
These tools are used to edit the graphic page: [New Page], [Open], [Save], [Copy], etc.
Refer to the table below for features and their descriptions.
Item Description
New Page Creates a new graphic page for the project.
Open Opens an existing graphic page.
Save Saves the currently designing graphic page.
Save All Saves all pages.
Print Shows the [Print] dialog box.
Preview Shows the [Print Setup] dialog box.
Cut Cuts the selected object.
Copy Copies the selected object
Paste Pastes the cut or copied object.
Find Shows a dialog box to find a string.
Replace Shows a dialog box to find a string and replace it.
Enlarges the magnification of the selected page. (V2.50 or above)

Zoom In
Reduces the magnification of the selected page. (V2.50 or above)

Zoom Out
※ For more information about each feature, please refer to the corresponding manual.
2-21
Execution Tools
Execution tools consist of commands for executing the project. Refer to the table below
for features and their descriptions.
Item Description
Shows the dialog box about information or configuration of
Project the current project.
Shows the [Database] configuration dialog box.

Database
Shows the [XPANEL Setup] configuration dialog box.

XPANEL Setup
Shows the [I/O Devices] configuration dialog box.

I/O Devices
Shows the [Alarm] configuration dialog box.
Alarms
Shows the [Security] configuration dialog box.
Security
Shows the [Data Logging] configuration dialog box.
Data Logging
Shows the [Script] configuration dialog box.
Script
Shows the [String Editor] dialog box.
String Editor
Shows the [Data Server] configuration dialog box.
Data Server
Shows the [Recipe Editor] dialog box.
Recipe Editor
Shows the [Data Bridge] configuration dialog box.
Data Bridge
Shows the [Download to XPANEL] dialog box.
Download to XPANEL
Shows the [CIMON-Xpanel Help] window.
Help
Executes the PC runtime with the connected TOUCH PC.

PC Runtime
2-22
2.3.4 Project Workspace (Project)
Project Workspace is an area where the windows and features of Xpanel are listed. It is
convenient for project management and modification.
You can show or hide the project workspace at [View] – [Project Workspace]. The
project workplace is located on the left side of the screen as default.
2-23
Various Xpanel Designer windows such as pages and modules can be quickly executed
from this tab. Double-click the item to open the page or module.
To delete a page, right-click on the page to be deleted and select [Delete Page]. A
window will appear asking the user to confirm the page deletion. The page can also be
deleted by selecting the page and pressing the [Delete] key.
2-24
2.3.5 Status Tool
[Status Tool] show the current state of Xpanel Designer. The status toolbar will contain a
short status message of Xpanel Designer, location of the cursor, and the lock status of
the keyboard.
The status toolbar can be hidden or shown through [View] – [Status Tool]. The Status
tool is shown at the bottom of the application as the default setting.
(1) (2) (3)
No. Description
(1) Displays the status message of Xpanel Designer.
Shows the cursor’s coordinate on the current graphic page. The coordinate is expressed
in x and y, in pixel units.
(2)
If there are objects on the graphic page, the exact coordinates of the object can be
acquired by selecting it.
Shows the lock status of your keyboard. Depending on the keyboard locks such as Caps
(3)
Lock, Num Lock, and Scroll Lock, corresponding string lights up.
2-25
2.4 Edit Menu
[Edit] menu is located on top menu bar of Xpanel Designer. With this menu, you can edit
your own graphic page. [Edit] menu includes basic features such as cut, copy, paste and
delete. You can also insert certain objects such as an Animation Bitmap or images on the
graphic page.
Contents of the [Edit] menu may differ according to the object or module you have
selected.
2.4.1 Undo
‘Undo’ reverses the last action or command applied to an object. You can execute ‘Undo’
up to 32 times.
Hotkey: Ctrl + Z, Alt + E + U
2-26
Edit Menu
2.4.2 Redo
‘Redo’ reverses the last undo action or command applied to an object.
Hotkey: Ctrl + Y, Alt + E + R
2.4.3 Cut
‘Cut’ command cuts the currently selected object(s) from the graphic page and copies
them to the clipboard. You can use ‘Paste’ command to paste an object(s) that has been
cut to the clipboard.
Hotkey: Ctrl + X, Alt + E + T
2-27
2.4.4 Copy
‘Copy’ command copies the currently selected object(s) and copies them to the clipboard.
Unlike the ‘Cut’ command, copied objects are not erased from the graphic page.
Hotkey: Ctrl + C, Alt + E + C
2.4.5 Clone
‘Clone’ command copies and pastes an object multiple times at once. Cloned objects are
of identical configuration as the original object. If a tag is cloned, there is an option to
differentiate the name of tag and addresses and register them as new tags automatically.
Select the object to be cloned. Go to [Edit]-[Clone] then following dialog box appears.
Hotkey: Ctrl + Shift + C, Alt + E + S
2-28
Edit Menu
(1) Settings
Item Description
Configures the range of object cloning.

Shape User can configure the space between the cloned objects by
Interval pixes.
User can check the location of object(s) to be cloned through
preview. When the location is decided, click on the graphic
page.
Mouse
Drag
Area Setting
X / Y Axis Clones the object vertically or horizontally.
Assigns the number of copy. From 0 to 1024 can be
assigned. The maximum number of copy is assigned as
Numbers of
default. The default value is decided on the basis of the
Copy1
original location and the size of object. An object can be
cloned up to 1024.
Assigns the space between cloned objects by pixels. You can
Pixels of clone the objects within spaces from the location of original
Space object. If you have selected ‘Space (By mouse)’ option, ‘Pixels
of Space’ option is disabled.
Clone Pattern User can decide the direction of object cloning.
Address Auto-
Clones the assigned tag addresses according to user’s configuration.
Increment
1
Total number of copies = (X axis ‘Numbers of copy’) x (Y Axis ‘Numbers of copy’)
2-29
(2) Auto tag generation
The table below is the list of devices that supports the ‘Auto tag generation’ feature.
Please check if that your device is compatible with the feature.
Manufacturer Driver Name I/O Device Type
CIMON-PLC Ethernet
CIMON-PLC HMI Serial
CIMON
CIMON-PLC Loader Serial
CIMON XPANEL Ethernet
MITSUBISHI MELSEC 3C (QCPU) Serial
MITSUBISHI MELSEC 3C (High Speed) Serial
MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI MELSEC 3E Ethernet
MITSUBISHI MELSEC-Q Loader (Q00/01) Serial
MITSUBISHI MELSEC-Q Loader (Q02/06/12/25) Serial
LSIS GLOFA PLC Cnet Serial
LSIS GLOFA PLC Ethernet
LSIS XGI Series PLC Cnet Serial
LSIS XGI FEnet Ethernet
LSIS
LSIS XGI Series PLC Loader Serial
LSIS XGT/XGB Series PLC Cnet Serial
LSIS XGT Series FEnet Ethernet
LSIS XGT/XGB Series PLC Loader Serial
Allen Bradley Control Logix EthernetIP Ethernet
Allen Bradley MicroLogix EthernetIP Ethernet
Allen Bradley
Allen Bradley DF1 Serial
Allen Bradley SLC500 Enet Ethernet
MODBUS ASCII Protocol Serial
MODICON MODBUS RTU Protocol Serial
MODBUS TCP Ethernet
OMRON CS/CJ Series Enet Ethernet
OMRON PLC (HostLink) Serial
OMRON
OMRON RFID Reader Enet Ethernet
OMRON RFID Reader Serial
2-30
Edit Menu
Item Description
If a tag is registered to the original object, you can generate the tag according to
Use Auto- your own configuration; registering the original tag or cloned tags. Tags can be
Increment cloned up to 1024. If an address has assigned to the tag, you can clone it with the
tag at the same option. Cloning will be stop if address is no more incremented.
Use You can decide whether to automatically increase or decrease the tag.
Tag Name Indicates the current tag name. You cannot edit this section.
Address Indicates the current address assigned to the tag. You cannot edit this section.
Position Indicates the object’s name where the original tag is registered.
Increase / User can decide whether to increase or decrease the target address. When you
Decrease select ‘Decrease’, the address only decreases except tag name.
User can assign the amount of increment/decrement value of address. The tag
Value
name value is fixed at 1 for increment.
2.4.6 Paste
‘Paste’ command pastes any object that has been cut or copied to the clipboard.
Hotkey: Ctrl + V, Alt + E + P
2.4.7 Delete
‘Delete’ command deletes selected object from the graphic page.
Hotkey: Delete, Alt + E + D
2.4.8 Select All
‘Select All’ command selects all of the objects of current graphic page.
Hotkey: Ctrl + A, Alt + E + A
2-31
2.4.9 Find
This feature lets you to find certain strings. You may choose: all objects, selected object,
or entire project page.
Hotkey: Ctrl + F, Alt + E + F
Item Description
Find String Input a string to find. This feature is case sensitive.

Select the search area to find the string.
Active Page Finds the string on the current graphic page.
Find Range This option is enabled when you have selected
Selected Object
object(s). Finds the string among the selected objects.
All Project Page Finds the string in the entire project.
Next Finds the same string continuously within the selected range.
Close Stops [Find] and return to the graphic page.
2-32
Edit Menu
2.4.10 Replace
After searching for a specific string, you can change it into another string. This feature is
used when there are multiple strings to be replaced.
Hotkey: Ctrl + H, Alt + E + E
Item Description
Find String Input a string to find. This feature is case sensitive.

Replace String Input a string to replace.
Select the search area to find the string.
All Object Finds the string on the current graphic page.
Find Range This option is enabled when you have selected
Selected Object
object(s). Finds the string among the selected objects.
All Project Page Finds the string in the entire project.
Next Finds the same string continuously within the selected range.
Replace Replaces the found string into the string entered at ‘Replace String’.
All Replace Replaces all found strings into the string entered at ‘Replace String’.
Close Stops [Replace] and return to the graphic page.
2-33
2.4.11 Object Configuration
You can configure an object with basic control features such as ‘Visible’, ‘Blink’, ‘Touch’. In
addition to the basic control features, you can configure the project with various objects’
features.
※ Please refer to ‘Object Configuration’ for more information.
Hotkey: Alt + E + W
The following table shows the basic features you can configure when you open the
[Object Config.] window. Objects such as trend, alarm summary, key input window,
page link, switch/lamp objects have their own configuration windows.
Item Description
Name Designate a name to the object. You cannot use space as object’s name.
Type Indicates the type of object.
Item Description
Style Composed of [Position/Size], [Line/Fill] tabs.

Visible Shows or hides the object according to the tag value.
Blink Blinks in certain cycle according to the tag value.
V/H-Size Changes the size of object vertically/horizontally according to the tag value.
V/H-Move Moves the object vertically/horizontally according to the tag value.
Color Changes the color of object according to the tag value.
Rotate Rotates the object with assigned angle according to the tag value.
Touch Executes a defined operation when the object is pressed or released.
EntryData Inputs data with data entry window when the object is clicked.
2-34
Edit Menu
2.4.12 Insert Graphic File
You can insert images created in an external program or downloaded from web to the
project. These images can be operated as objects. File formats such as bmp and jpg are
supported.
※ Please refer to ‘Image Embedding’ manual for more information.

Hotkey: Alt + E + B
2.4.13 Insert Animation Bitmap
Animation bitmap is a feature to express an animation according to the registered tag

value. You can describe the field’s situations in detail with animation bitmaps. You can
also see the example of object by its preview. The animation bitmap object(*.cmani file
format) and its group can be edited in this window.
※ Please refer to ‘Animation Bitmap’ manual for more information.
2-35
2.5 View Menu
The [View] menu is grouped with tools used for composing the project. You can show or
hide toolboxes in the toolbar by toggling the menu, such as a standard tool or a project
workspace. A checkmark indicates that toolbox is displayed in the toolbar. Users can
conveniently design a project by setting simple interfaces.
2.5.1 Redraw
An object selection is initialized when you click the [Redraw] at graphic page the object
has been drawn. This functionality can be useful to see objects’ placement by refreshing
the graphic page. You can check the composition of graphic pages that you are
designing.
2-36
View Menu
2.5.2 Current Page Position to Runtime
This feature has a same functionality with [Page Position] in [Page Properties]. Click
[View] – [Current Page Position to Runtime] while in the page you are currently
designing. The size and position of graphic page in Xpanel Designer will be reflected in
Xpanel runtime.
2-37
2.5.3 Tag Screen
Tags registered in current page are listed at the bottom of page window when you select
[View] – [Tag Screen]. The window will be hidden if you click the function again. You can
minimizes or open the window as a toolbar by toggling button.
The tag screen shows tag information (e.g. Tag name, tag kind, tag address and tag
type).
Item Description
Tag names registered in the objects are listed in the window. On the left
Tag Name
of tag name, an icon which indicates the tag kind is displayed.
Indicates the kind of tag for each item. Digital, analog and string tags are
Tag Kind
displayed.
If the tag is used as a real tag, an address will be shown. This item does
Tag Address
not show the device.
Indicates the function type of tag from the object. Function is shown as a
Tag Type
string such as ‘Visible’, ‘Blink’, ‘H/V size’, ‘H/V move’, etc.
2-38
View Menu
The position of tag screen can be changed according to the users’ preference. The screen
can be dragged to be docked on the left/right side or top of the page window.
The object will be highlighted when you click the tag name which is registered in the
corresponding object. Object configuration dialog box will pop up when you double-
click on the item.
2-39
2.5.4 Object Window
Objects are organized into a tree structure in the right side of each graphic page when
you select [View] – [Object Window]. The window will be hidden if you click the function
again. You can minimizes or open the window as a toolbar by toggling button. You
can check objects which are drawn in each graphic page. They are listed in ‘Object
name’, ‘Object number’ and ‘Type’.
The object tree structure is expanded by buttons or folded by buttons located in

each item. The index shows status information (e.g. object functions, registered tags.)
2-40
View Menu
Object configuration dialog box will pop up when you double-click on the item.
2-41
2.5.5 Zoom In / Out
[Zoom In/Out] allows you to enlarge or reduce the magnification in the graphic page.
You can select a zoom level in sub menu, or configure directly from [User Definition].
Alternatively, you can hold ‘Ctrl’ key and scroll the mouse wheel to zoom in or out.
The magnification level is set to 100% by default. There are 7 levels to select from:
400%, 200%, 150%, 100%, 75%, 50% and 25%.
2-42
View Menu
When you select the [User Definition], ‘Page Zoom In/Out’ dialog box will appear.
You may select a zoom level by clicking the radio button next to it or by inputting a level
in the “Scale(%)” box manually. When inputting manually, the range is from 25% to
800%, integers, no decimal points.
Press [OK] to apply the zoom level. Press [Cancel] to cancel the configuration.
If you zoom the page with ‘Ctrl’ key and scrolling mouse wheel, the magnification level
will be adjusted from 25% to 800% in 25 percent.
2-43
2.6 Arrange Menu
The [Arrange] menu is grouped with tools that execute the object arrangements in the
graphic page. Using this menu, multiple units of objects can be grouped into a single
unit. You can change an objects placement conveniently by arranging or flipping them.
You may also set a background image.
2.6.1 Group
The feature is enabled when you select multiple objects. It executes to combine two or
more objects into a single one called ‘group object’. Group objects can be grouped again,
and operated as an object.
Please note that ‘Group’ does not apply to the switch/lamp and page link objects.
To select a group of objects, click your first selection and then hold down Shift key as you
click another. You may also click the blank area of the page and drag the mouse until all
of the objects you want to select are surrounded by selection area. In this way, you can
group the objects by clicking [Arrange] – [Group], or right-click the objects and select
[Group] in pop-up menu.
2-44
Arrange Menu
2.6.2 Ungroup
The feature is enabled when you select a group object. It is used to break a selected
group object into its individual components.
To ungroup a group object, select the object and click [Arrange] – [Ungroup], or right-
click the object and select [Ungroup] in pop-up menu. All objects from the group object
will automatically be selected.
2.6.3 Regroup
[Regroup] may be used when you want to modify an individual objects’ properties and
then return it to the group. Ungroup the group object and modify the single unit you
wish to change, then combine them again by selecting [Regroup]. In this way, the object
configuration of the group can be maintained.
However, [Regroup] does not apply to a group object in which you removed existing
objects from. If there is any additional objects upon the existing objects, the added
objects are ignored.
2-45
2.6.4 Bring to Front
This feature operates to place the selected object in front of all other objects. If the object
is layered upon other objects, objects which had been previously drawn will be totally or
partially hidden by it.
Select the object that you wish to set and click [Arrange] – [Bring to Front], or right-click
the object and select [Bring to Front] in pop-up menu. This will place the object to the
forefront of the graphic page.
2.6.5 Sent to Back
This feature operates to place the selected object behind all other objects. If the object is
layered under other objects, the object will be totally or partially hidden by them.
Select the object that you wish to set and click [Arrange] – [Send to Back], or right-click
the object and select [Send to Back] in pop-up menu. This will move the object to the
back of the graphic page.
2-46
Arrange Menu
2.6.6 One Step Forward
The previously created object is placed behind of the one recently created. This
command is used to move the object just one layer forward.
Select the object that you wish to set and click [Arrange] – [One step forward], or right-
click the object and select [one step forward] in pop-up menu. This will move the object
to a single layer forward of the graphic page.
2.6.7 One Step Backward
This command is used to move the object just one layer backward.
Select the object that you wish to set and click [Arrange] – [One step backward], or right-
click the object and select [one step backward] in pop-up menu. This will move the
object to a single layer back of the graphic page.
2-47
2.6.8 Arrange
This feature is enabled when you select two or more objects. Objects can be aligned at
top and bottom, left and right side, or middle in horizontal or vertical direction. When
you select three or more objects, you can distribute spaces between selected objects
horizontally or vertically.
To select a group of objects, click your first selection and then hold down Shift key as you
click another. You may also click on a blank area of the page and drag the mouse over all
the objects you wish to select. You may then align the objects by clicking [Arrange] –
[Arrange], or right-click the objects and select [Arrange] in sub menu.
Item Description Example
Aligns the left edge of selected objects with the

Left
left edge of the object in left side.
Aligns the middle of selected objects in horizontal
Horizontal direction with the centered object. The recently
Center created object will be placed in front of the ↓
one previously created.
Aligns the right edge of selected objects with the

Right
right edge of the object in right side.
2-48
Arrange Menu
Aligns the top edge of selected objects with the

Top
top edge of the object at the top. ↓
Aligns the middle of selected objects in vertical
Vertical direction with the centered object. The
Center previously created object will be placed

behind of the one recently created. →
Aligns the bottom edge of selected objects with

Bottom ↓
the bottom edge of the object at the bottom.
Evenly spaces all selected objects horizontally

Horizontal
between the left most and right most selected ↓
Space
objects.
Evenly spaces all selected objects vertically

Vertical
between the top most and bottom most selected
Space
objects.
2-49
2.6.9 Rotate
Objects can be rotated in a clockwise or a counter-clockwise direction. You can rotate

multiple objects at once by selecting them together.
However, [Rotate] does not apply to following objects; text object, dynamic tag,
date/time, trend, string value, switch/lamp, alarm summary, key input and pagelink.
To execute the rotation, select the object and click [Arrange] – [Rotate] or right-click the
objects and select [Rotate] in pop-up menu. You can rotate them in following directions.
Direction Description Example
Enabled when a single or more objects

90˚ Clockwise are selected. Rotate selected objects
clockwise in 90 degrees.
→
Enabled when a single or more objects

90˚
are selected. Rotate selected objects
CounterClockwise
counter clockwise in 90 degrees.
→
When you rotate a group object, individual objects linked together are also
being rotated. If you wish to rotate only a single object, ungroup them first
and apply the rotation.
2-50
Arrange Menu
2.6.10 Flip
Objects can be flipped horizontally or vertically. Combined objects are flipped together.
[Flip] does not apply to following objects; text object, dynamic tag, date/time, trend,
string value, switch/lamp, alarm summary, key input and pagelink.
To apply the flip, select the object and click [Arrange] – [Flip] or right-click the objects and
select [Flip] in pop-up menu. You can transform the object into its horizontal or vertical
mirror image.
Direction Description Example

Enabled when a single or more objects are
selected. Flips selected objects horizontally
Horizontal
based on coordinates in the middle of X-
axis. →
Enabled when a single or more objects are

selected. Flips selected objects vertically
Vertical
based on coordinates in the middle of Y-
axis.
→
2-51
2.6.11 Point Change
This feature is enabled when you select a simple graphic object. You can change the
shape of simple graphic objects: Line, rectangle, arc, sector, chord, polyline and polygon.
Select a simple graphic object to reshape and click [Arrange] – [Point Change]. Each
handle on the object’s line is turned to black. You can change the shape of object by
dragging its handles.
2.6.12 Enable Snap
When you are arranging objects on the page, turning on the feature will lead your image
to snap on the grid. Objects may be drawn or positioned on the grid. It can be useful
when making fine arrangement of an object to disable [Enable Snap]. This will allow
control without grid snap.
You can enable or disable this feature by toggling its icon:

indicates the functionality is enabled, and means it is disabled.
2-52
Arrange Menu
2.6.13 Grid Configuration
When you use [Enable Snap], you can utilize the grid setup. Click [Arrange] – [Grid
Config] and a dialog box is appeared as shown below.
Item Description
Enable Executes the [Enable Snap] on the [Arrange] menu. Sets objects to be positioned
Snap according to grids.
Selects the shape of grids. Grids are hidden in the page when you choose [No].
Line Dot
Grid Shape
Color Selects the color of grids.

Grid Adjusts width and height between grids. Grid intervals become wider while values
Interval at width and height increase. The value can be assigned from 0 to 100.
Assigns the interval values for viewing grids. Grid display intervals become wider
Display Grid
while values at width and height increase. The value can be assigned from 0 to
Interval2
100.
2
The grids’ width and height currently displayed
= ‘Width’ and ‘Height’ values at [Grid Interval] X ‘Width’ and ‘Height’ values at [Display Grid Interval]
Ex) When you set ‘Width/Height’ values as each 10 in [Grid Interval] and each 2 in [Display Grid Interval], the grids’ width
and height values displayed on the page are both 20.
2-53
2.6.14 Make Symbol
Selected objects can be set as a background image by selecting [Arrange] – [Make Symbol].
The background image is always at the back of the graphic page and may not be selected as
an object.
To select the background object, click the item listed in [Object Window].
2-54
Arrange Menu
2.6.15 Break Symbol
When you select [Arrange] –[Break Symbol], the background object can be editable. If
several objects are set as background images, you can make them all editable
simultaneously.
2-55
2.7 Online Menu
[Online] menu is located on top menu bar of Xpanel Designer. [Online] menu contains
basic options for connection between PC and Xpanel. Based on the connection method,
you can establish device access by USB or Ethernet. The project can be downloaded to
the Xpanel or uploaded to the Xpanel Designer according to the connection method.
Project may also launched or terminated directly by selection from PC during the online
status. You can upgrade application version of the Xpanel to solve the malfunction
situation.
2.7.1 Setup Link
You can choose a connection method according to the supported interfaces of Xpanel,
USB or Ethernet.
2-56
Online Menu
USB
Entire Xpanel model provides USB port allowing users to connect with PC using mini USB
cable. To set the connection method as USB, select ‘USB’ in the [Setup Link] dialog box
and press ‘OK’.
Ethernet
The Ethernet port is used in communication between Xpanel and other external device.
It meets standards 10BaseT and 100BaseT. The table below lists supported Xpanel
models for Ethernet communication.
Model Supported Model Supported
XT04CD-DN □ Not supported XT12CD-A ■ Supported

XT07CD-AE ■ Supported XT15CD-A ■ Supported
XT07CD-DE ■ Supported HP07CD-AER/DER ■ Supported
XT07CD-AN □ Not supported HP07CD-ANR/DNR □ Not supported
XT07CD-DN □ Not supported HP07CD-AES/DES ■ Supported
XT10CD ■ Supported HP07CD-ANS/DNS □ Not supported
To set the connection method as Ethernet, select ‘Ethernet’ in the [Setup Link] dialog box
and press [Search Xpanel or NP/iNP] to browse the target Xpanel.
2-57
Item Description
Updates the Xpanel in the network. This is used to refresh the IP address and
Refresh project name of Xpanel in the different network. If Xpanel is searched from
the user’s network, project name will be listed automatically.
Tests the connection configuration for selected Xpanel. If the connection is
Test
successful, a project name will be displayed.
Insert
Inserts the IP address of Xpanel manually. You may check the connection
status by pressing ‘Connect’ button and add the IP address with ‘OK’ button.
Delete Removes the selected Xpanel from the list.
OK Connect the Xpanel Designer with selected Xpanel.
2.7.2 Download to Xpanel
Projects can be downloaded and transferred via mini USB and Ethernet. Each method is
described below.
Download by USB
 Install ActiveSync (Windows XP OS)
ActiveSync allows the transfer of data between PC and various mobile devices running
on Windows CE. You can download it on Microsoft website (www.microsoft.com/en-
us).
2-58
Online Menu
 Install Windows Mobile Device Center (Windows 7, 8, 10 OS)
Download Windows Mobile Device Center in Microsoft website. Sometimes the

program does not operate correctly in Windows 10 OS. In this case, perform the
following procedure.
a) Start application [Services] from the start menu of Windows.
b) Select [Windows Mobile – 2003 – based devices] within [Services].
2-59
c) Select [Log on as: Local system account] in [Log On] tab.
d) Click [OK] and reboot the system. After restarting the PC, the program will operate
properly.
2-60
Online Menu
 Setup for Xpanel Designer
a) Run Xpanel Designer and retrieve a project to download.
b) Go to [Online] – [Setup Link] and choose [USB].
c) Go to [Online] – [Download to Xpanel] to download the project. You need to

convert the project in to the runtime project if there are no files in the project
directory.
d) After converting into the Xpanel runtime project, you may download the whole
project or only modified items.
2-61
Item Description
Full Download Downloads the project with full configurations.

Modification Download Downloads only modified configurations of project.
Send the Data Size Displays the size of runtime project.
Font Data Size Displays the size of font data in runtime project.
Target Folder Specify the directory in Xpanel to save the project file.
Download the Editing
Select the option to convert the runtime project into editable project.
Project
Download the Font File Select the option to download the font file with the project.
Connected Xpanel Info Displays the IP address of target Xpanel.
 Please note that only one Xpanel can be connected to a PC at a time,

even if the PC has two or more unused USB ports.
 The project will not operate correctly if the version of the Xpanel
Designer that was used to create the project is different from the
version of the Xpanel that is running the project. Update or
downgrade the software until both versions are identical.
2-62
Online Menu
Download by Ethernet
(1) Checking IP address of PC
a) Go to [Window] – [Run] and enter ‘cmd’ on the input screen.
b) Enter ‘ipconfig’ on the command screen to check the PC’s Ethernet setup.
(2) Checking IP address of Xpanel
a) Click as numbered sequence. Xpanel Config dialog box appears.
2-63
b) Select [Exit].
c) Configure IP address of Xpanel.
 Subnet mask and gateway should be configured to match those of

PC.
 Duplicate IP addresses are not allowed.
d) Select [Apply this new setting] to save changes. A system reboot is required for
changes to be applied.
e) Select [X] button if you want to modify the setting. Select [OK] if you want to go
back to configuration. In this case, Xpanel should restart.
2-64
Online Menu
(3) Setting for Xpanel Designer
a) Run Xpanel Designer and open a project to be downloaded.
b) Go to [Online] – [Setup Link] and choose ‘Ethernet’ for connection method.
c) Click [Select Xpanel or NP/iNP]. Xpanel will appear on the list as shown below.
Select Xpanel to which you wish to download a project. You can see information of
the selected Xpanel on a pop-up box.
d) Go to [Online] – [Download to Xpanel] to download the project.
2-65
e) After converting into the Xpanel runtime project, you may download the whole
project or only modified items.
The project will not operate correctly if the version of the Xpanel Designer
that was used to create the project is different from the version of the
Xpanel that is running the project. Update or downgrade the software
until both versions are identical.
f) Or, if Xpanel runtime project file has already saved in the project folder, you may
select [Online] – [Download to Xpane(Existing Project)] to download a project
excepting modifications.
2-66
Online Menu
2.7.3 Make Executing Removable Memory
The project is downloaded to USB or SD memory. This feature is useful when the size of
project is too large to download to Xpanel. After installing the removable memory into
Xpanel, the operator can run the project without downloading it to Xpanel.
Install the USB or SD memory into the PC and select [Online] – [Make Executing
Removable Memory]. The project will be converted into runtime project and saved in the
removable memory device.
Press ‘Yes’ to convert the project if runtime project file does not exist in the removable
memory. You can skip the conversion by pressing ‘No’ if runtime project already exists.
You can specify the directory for runtime project to the removable disk. The size of
runtime project and font data will be displayed. To convert the runtime project into the
editable project, select the ‘Download editing project’ option. To download the font file
together, select ‘Download font file’ option.
2-67
A complete message will appear when the conversion is finished.
2.7.4 Copy Project to Removable Memory
You can download the project from the PC to USB memory or SD memory. After
inserting the memory device into Xpanel, the project can be transmitted to Xpanel
through the Ethernet loader. This allows you to update a project in the field using
portable memory, rather than a PC.
Download by Removable Disks

(1) Prerequisite
 Make sure to format the USB in FAT32 so that Hybrid Xpanel can
recognize the driver. If you are unsure, right click on the USB icon and
click ‘properties’ to check if the USB type is FAT32.
 If the file system is not in FAT32 format, please follow the steps below
to format the USB drive. Make sure to back up the contents of the
USB before proceeding as all data will be deleted.
2-68
Online Menu
Follow the direction to configure the USB format as FAT32.
a) Connect the USB to PC. Right-click on USB drive and select [Format].
b) Configure the File system as FAT32 (Default) and start formatting the USB.
2-69
(2) Download the project from Xpanel to removable disk
a) Connect a removable disk on the PC and run Xpanel Designer.
b) Go to [Online] – [Copy project to removable memory], and input or select the path
where you want to save the project. If you wish to download the editable project
from the device, select [Download the Editing project].
Make sure to specify the disk’s root directory when you save the project.
(3) Upload the project from removable disk to Xpanel
a) Connect the removable disk that has the updated project to Xpanel. Select
[Removable Storage → Xpanel] in the Ethernet Loader dialog box.
2-70
Online Menu
b) Select [Refresh] and you will see projects in removable disk that can be uploaded.
c) Click a project to update on the list and select [Project Update].
 When you select [Project Update], the project and application program
in the Hybrid Xpanel will be deleted first.
 [Project Update] button will be deactivated when the procedure starts
and reactivated when update is complete. “All file update: OK”
message will appear when update is completed.
 Do not touch the panel during update as it could cause incorrect
operation.
2-71
2.7.5 Upload from Xpanel
You can open projects from Xpanel Designer by USB or Ethernet.
Open with Xpanel Designer
a) Go to [Online] – [Upload from Xpanel] located in the upper right side of the menu
bar.
b) Choose a connection method.
c) Select the project directory from your Hybrid Xpanel. If you want to upload logged
data together, check [Upload A Logged Data].
d) Specify where you want to save the project file.
2-72
Online Menu
e) Below message will appear when the conversion is completed. Select [OK] and the
project file will be opened.
2-73
2.7.6 Upload from Storage
You can transfer the downloaded project from USB memory or SD card to the Xpanel
Designer.
Opening with USB memory or SD card
a) Connect USB or SD card to the Xpanel and Select [Removable Storage ← Xpanel]
in Ethernet Loader dialog box.
b) A check mark inside the box will indicate the media type that is connected. A
Success message will appear when you select [Project Upload] and upload is
completed.
c) Hybrid Xpanel project file is copied to Upload folder located in USB or SD card.
2-74
Online Menu
d) Connect USB or SD card to the PC. Go to [Online] – [Upload from Storage] in

Xpanel Designer.
e) Specify the project path of copied project file. Project file located in Xpanel will
appear on the list.
f) Specify the path and select [OK] to convert, save, and open editable project.
g) A message will appear when conversion is completed. Click [OK] to open the
converted project file.
2-75
2.7.7 Stop Xpanel Application Program
When the PC is connected to Xpanel, you can terminate the current project and exit to
the Xpanel background screen. This command is equivalent to press [Exit] button in the
‘Xpanel Config’ dialog box.
2.7.8 Run Xpanel Application Program
When the PC is connected to Xpanel, you can launch the closed project again. This
command is equivalent to double-click the ‘Xpanel’ icon in the Xpanel background
screen.
2.7.9 Upgrade Xpanel Application Program
If the application versions used by Xpanel and Xpanel Designer are different each other,
you must download the project again to run properly.
You can solve the problem by upgrading application version when the Xpanel’s
application program file is damaged or lost.
Upgrading application program
a) If you know the version of application program or project, download the same
version of Xpanel Designer in the CIMON website (www.cimon.com). If you don’t
know the version of application program or project, install recent version of Xpanel
Designer.
b) Go to [Online] – [Upgrade Xpanel Application Program] and specify the connection

method.
c) Confirm the upgrade version and press ‘Yes’.
2-76
Online Menu
When there is no project backup file, upgrade the application program

after uploading the project in the removable disk.
d) A complete message will appear when application program upgrade is finished.
e) Upload the project or backup file from Xpanel Designer and download it to Xpanel.
f) Check if the project screen appears properly by double-clicking ‘Xpanel’ icon.
2-77
2.8 Help Menu
In this section, you can check the application’s Help file, Xpanel Designer information and
each module’s information.
When you click [Help] on the top menu bar, a dropdown menu will appear as shown
below.
2.8.1 Xpanel Designer Help
Go to [Help] – [CimonD Help] then the application’s Help file will appear as shown below.
You can search information with a keyword in [Search] tab or lists in [Contents] tab.
2-78
Help Menu
2.8.2 About Xpanel Designer
Go to [Help] – [About XpanelDesigner] then a pop-up will appear on the screen as

shown below. On the pop-up, you can see the information such as version of Xpanel
Designer and release number.
2.8.3 About Designer
When a module is executed and its window is selected, you can check the information of
modules through [Help]. The information includes the version of module and related
information.
Following is the list of modules which you can check the information.
Module Description
Graphic Designer Displays information of current graphic designer.
Displays information of project manager.

Project
Displays information of database manager.

Database
Displays information of script editor.

Script
2-79
Displays information of data logging manager.

Data Logging
Displays information of string editor.

String Editor
Displays information of MODBUS SLAVE editor.

Data Server
Displays information of recipe editor.

Recipe Editor
Displays information of data bridge editor.

Data Bridge
2-80
Help Menu
2.8.4 About Database Manager
You can utilize the database manager to check the number of tags which are used in the
current project.
Open [Database] in Xpanel Designer. Here you can find [About Database Manager]
menu on [Help] dropdown menu. In the pop-up window, you can check the version of
the database manager and the information of registered tags in the project.
 Total tags consist of group tags, digital tags, analog tags and string tags.
E.g.) Total tags (90) = Group tags (1) + Digital tags (55) + Analog tags (32) + String
tags (2)
 Total tags consist of real tags and virtual tags.
E.g.) Total tags (90) = Real tags (50) + Virtual tags (40)
 Group tag is considered as a virtual tag.
2-81
3 Creating a Project
3.1 Project
A project file contains series of data files, and these files can be configured in the Xpanel
Designer. To construct a system, creating a project and constructing the database with
various features is needed. The data files are stored in the user-defined directory and
managed conveniently.
3.1.1 New Project
You can create a new project at [File] – [New Project]. You can set properties of the
project in [Project Configuration Wizard] window.
Item Description
Enter the name of the project. The project name will be saved as
‘Prj_MMDDhhmmss’ format by default. The duplicated name is not allowed.
Project Name
The name can be changed in the [File]-[Copy Project] menu.
※ Refer to the ‘Copy project’ section.
Project Desc. Enter the description of the project. It is not compulsory.
Specify the path where the project will be saved. The default path is
Work In “C:\CIMON\XpanelDesigner’Version’ Eng”. A folder with project name will
be created, and the project file is saved as “*.xprj” format in the folder.
3-1
Project
The type of project file can be decided according to the dimension of each
Xpanel model. ‘Hybrid Xpanel’ model is only compatible with ‘XT07C’ option,
and you must check a ‘Hybrid’ checkbox. ‘XT07C –R’ indicates 7” Xpanel for
lengthwise rotation.
You can choose a model shown below.
Type XT05S (5.6”) XT04C (4.3”)

XT06C (6.4”) XT07C (7.0”)
XT08C (8.0”) XT15C (15.0”)
XT10C (10.4”) XT10CC (10.4”)
XT12C (12.1”) XT07C –R (7.0”)
XT05M (5.6”) Mono CM-NP/iNP (1024 x 768)
Assign the background color of the project. White color is set by default. The
Project BGColor
background color will be applied to the additional pages.
Enter a password for Xpanel project.
Sets up the password for the project. The password has to be

entered with following criteria.
Password 1. You can use Alphanumeric. The password is case sensitive.

Password
2. You cannot use special characters and spaces.
3. You can enter the password up to 8 characters.
4. The password is displayed as ‘****’.
Confirm
Enter the same password to confirm.
Password
OK Saves the password setting.

Does not set up the password and goes back to the [New
Cancel
Project] window.
OK Creates a project with the entered information.
Cancel Does not create a project and goes back to the start-up screen.
3-2
A page setup window will appear as the project is created. You can create a page based
on the properties in this window.
※ Please refer to the ‘Page Properties’ manual for setting page options.
The configured settings in the [Project Configuration Wizard] window can be modified
at [Tools] – [Project] menu. You can change the description, background color, and
password. You may also change the project type by pressing ‘Convert…’ button.
※ Refer to the ‘Project Conversion’ manual for converting the project.
3-3
Project
3.1.2 Open Project
You can browse the project file from the desired directory with [File] - [Open Project].
When you select a project file and press [Open] button, the last-edited project will be
launched in the Xpanel Designer. If a project has been already opened, the project will be
automatically closed.
Please be noted that the default project file extension may differ
according to the Xpanel Designer version.
 Below Xpanel Designer V2.40: “*.prj”
 Xpanel Designer V2.40 and above: “*.xprj”
In the Xpanel Designer V2.40 and above, you may open both “*.prj” and
“*.xprj” file format. In the Xpanel Designer below V2.40, you can only
open “*.prj” file format.
The project file in version 2.52 cannot be executed in the older version of Xpanel
Designer.
3-4
When you try to open a lower version of project with the higher version of Xpanel
Designer, the following message will appear asking if you wish to continue the project
execution.
By clicking [Yes], a message will appear asking you whether to back up the lower version
of project file.
You can back up the project file by clicking [Yes]. A backup path is assigned to the
‘backup_YYYYMMDD’ folder by default, which location is inside of the original project
directory. The project once executed in the higher version cannot be opened in the lower
version of software.
Please remind that if you press [No], the project will be directly executed without backup
process.
3-5
Project
3.1.3 Close Project
You can close the current project in [File]-[Close Project]. If there have been any
modifications made in the project, a message box will appear asking if you wish to save
changes.
When you close the project, it may take a while according to the system environment or
the size of the project. Then the Xpanel Designer goes back to the startup screen, and
you can execute another project.
3-6
3.1.4 Copy Project
You can change the name of current project and the directory in [File]-[Copy Project]. All
configurations in the original project are also moved to the target directory.
Item Description
Current Project Name Indicates the name of current project.

Enter the new name of the project you wish to change in the input
field.
New Project Name
Special characters are not allowed which cannot be used in the file
name.
Specify the path where the project will be saved as new name. The
default path is “C:\CIMON\XpanelDesigner’Version’ Eng\’New
New Project
project name’”. A folder with project name will be created, and the
project file is saved as “*.xprj” format in the folder.
OK Saves the current project as new name in the target directory.
Cancel Goes back to edit screen without copying project.
A message shown below will appear when you press ‘OK’ button.
The original project maintains the execution after copying project.
3-7
Project
3.1.5 Convert to Runtime Project
You can convert current project to the runtime project file in [File] – [Convert to Runtime
Project], without download procedure. This command compiles the project
configuration during the conversion.
If the conversion is completed without any error, a message appears showing the
conversion result. The conversion time and capacity of runtime project file depend on the
capacity of current project files.
If there are any errors in the compiling phase, the conversion will be stopped and a
message will appear informing the wrong configuration. You must properly set the
function again to act the ‘Convert to Runtime Project’.
The runtime project files are saved in the ‘XpanelFiles’ folder of project path. These files
can be downloaded to the Xpanel by [Online]-[Download to Xpanel].
3-8
3.1.6 Recent Project
At the bottom side of the [File] menu, you will find the list of recent projects. The projects
are listed up to 4, and the latest project tops the list of recent projects.
Note that the project which is built in the higher version or the project path has been
changed, you cannot execute the project file.
3-9
Save Project
3.2 Save Project
Xpanel Designer stores the edited project in the user’s system. The data is stored in page
by page. Newly added monitoring page and the control featuers can be added. The user
can save the page with different name, in a different path, and continue the editing. The
user can also save the all changed before writing the project to Xpanel.
3.2.1 Save
Select [File] – [Save] or click icon to save the current page. If the page to be saved is
to be newly saved, it will be saved as “*.pgx” format in the project folder.
When you save the page, it may take a while according to the system’s performance or
the project’s size.
Hotkey: Ctrl + S, Alt + F + S
3-10
3.2.2 Save As
Select [File] – [Save As] and save the page with the different name. The page can also be
saved in the different path, and you will be able to continue the work. The file can only
be saved as “*.pgx” format, and the name cannot be duplicated with the other page files
in the same path.
When you save the page in a different name, you will be asked to add the new page to
the project. Press [Yes] to save the file and add it to the project. Press [No] to save the file
only.
Hotkey: Alt + F + A
If you are using the Xpanel with English OS version, please do not name
the pages with languages other than English and numbers. If the page
name contains different characters from alphanumerics, it may cause the
malfunction of the project.
3-11
Save Project
3.2.3 Save All
Select [File] – [Save All] or click icon to save the all changes made in the current
project. When you save the pages, it may take a while according to the system’s
performance or the project’s size.
Hotkey: Alt + F + L
3-12
3.3 Project Properties
In this section, you set and check the information of the project. By accepting the
password setting, you may enforce the project’s security. You can also assign the size of
system memory, set up the multi language and convert the project. The options for
changing pages’ color and font auto-resizing are provided. You can also configure the
modules provided in this section.
This manual is written based on the Xpanel Designer V2.52. Some

features may operate differently or, not be supported according to the
Xpanel Designer version.
3.3.1 Features
 You can set up the password to the project for the enhanced security.
 You can assign the size of system memory.
 You can set up the multi language and convert the project in the [Project
Properties] window.
 You can configure the page colors and font auto-resizing.
 You can check the date when the project is created and edited recently. It is also
possible to check the project folder path.
 You can configure the moduels provided in the [Project Properties] window.
3-13
Project Properties
3.3.2 Settings
Select [Tools] – [Project] or icon to bring up the [Project Properties] window.
Item Description
This is a function similart to the Project Workspace ([View] – [Project

Project Workspace]). You can double click each module to bring up the
Workspace configuration window. However, you cannot double-click the item to open
the page or right-click to delete the page.
Description Enter the short description of the current project.
Type Displays the Xpanel type of the current project.
Assigns the size of virtual system memory size when you need the storage
System Memory
space with consecutive addresses. You may assign from 100 to 10000
Size
addresses.
Language Configures the multi languages to display them on a single page.
Sets up the password to the current project, which will be applied when you
Password
open the project next time.
Changes the Xpanel type of the current project. You can select the
following models: XT05S, XT06C, XT08C, XT10C, XT12C, XT15M mono,
Convert
XT04C, XT07C, XT15C, XT10CC, XT07C-R, CM-NP/iNP. You cannot select
Hybrid Xpanel option.
3-14
You can select the background color of the pages. When you press the [Ok]
button after selecting the ‘All Page Color’ option, background color of the
entire pages in the current project will be changed to the selected color.
All Page Color
When you press the [Ok] without selecting the ‘All Page Color’ option, only
the new pages created after the configuration will have the assigned
background color. 98 colors are provided.
You can activate or deactivate the ‘Font Auto-Resizing’ option in

[Switch/Lamp] – [Label] tab.
Font Auto-
Resizing Option
Enable Enable ‘Font Auto-Resizing’ option.

Disable Disable ‘Font Auto-Resizing’ option.
Starting Date Displays the date when the current project is created.
Last Edited Date Displays the date when the current project is edited recently.
Project Folder Displays the project folder path of the current project.
3-15
Project Properties
Multi Language
Select [Tools] – [Project] – [Language] or [Tools] – [Multi Language Setup] to bring up the
[Language Configuration] window as shown below.
Using the multi language option, you can display a single word in different languages.
The language setups (Language name, Font) will be utilized in the [String Table] –
[Column Property].
※ Please refer to the ‘Multi Language’ manual for more information.
Item Description
Select this option to use the [Multiple Column] in the [String Table]. If the
Use Multiple
option is deselected, you can only use the contents of ‘Column 0’,
Language Table
regardless of the String Table configuration.
Configure this option when the ‘Use Multiple Language Table’ option is
Initial Value selected. The assigned value will display the corresponding column. You
can assign the value from 0 to 15.
Control Addr / Tag
selected. Assign the device address or tag to control the column number.
3-16
Controls the column with the address of the device

registered in [I/O Device]. You can decide the unit of the
Addr
data: BIT or WORD. The detailed configuration can be
done by pressing the button.
Controls the column with the tag registered in the
Tag [Database]. You can manually enter the tag name or press
button to browse the tag.
Name Enter the name to distinguish the language.
Language Option Select the font type to display the corresponding language.
(Lang. 0~9) Font You can use the fonts which you downloaded with the
Xpanel Designer.
(1) Control Address
You can configure the details of the assigned device address for the column control by
pressing the button.
Item Description
Select the data type to be used for the column control. This option is different
from the BIT, WORD selection in the [Language Configuration] window.
When you select ‘Digital’, you will control the column with 0 or 1. All values
exceeding 1 will be recognized as 1.
Data Type
When you select ‘Analog’, you will control the column with the value assigned
to the device address. The values from 0 to 15 will only be recognized. The
values exceeding 15 will be recognized as 15 or will follow the configuration in
the [Option] wiondow.
I/O Device Displays the list of I/O devices registered in the current project.
3-17
Project Properties
Assign the device and address for the column control.

Displays the list of devices according to the selected I/O
Device Type
device and the data type.
Device Address Enter the starting address of the device. The value you can
input may differ according to the data type (BIT/WORD)
Address
selection from the [Language Configuration] window, the
selected I/O device and the device type.
You can use this keypad when you have to input the address without a
keyboard.
Device Address Enter the address in decimal or hexadecimal according to the device type.
Input Keypad For example, if you assign an address in device X of CIMON-PLC, the address
must be assigned in hexadecimal. In case of the device D, the address must be
assigned in decimal.
The [Option] is activated when the ‘Analog’ option is selected.
Press the button to bring up the [Analog Tag Option] window as shown
below.
You can select the analog data type from the following list
Option
types: UINT8, UINT16, UINT32, INT8, INT16, INT32, UBCD8,
Type
UBCD16, UBCD32, BCD8, BCD16, BCD32, Float . UINT16 is
the default type.
Enter the value range to be displayed on the Xpanel. The
default range is from 0 to 65535.
Internal Data When you select ‘Clipping’ option, a warning message will
appear when the value exceeds the assigned range, and the
exceeded value will not be used.
Enter the value range which will be actually input to the PLC.
For example, if the raw data range is from 0 to 16000 and
Raw Data
the internal data range is from 0 to 100, the Xpanel will
display 100 when the PLC gets the value 16000.
3-18
This option calculates the PLC data and displays the result to
the Xpanel.
Scale
The Scale calculation is as shown below.

Scale = Raw Data x Scale + Offset
Password Setup
Sets the password to the project which will be asked from the next execution of the
project in Xpanel Designer.
Item Description
This is used to setup the password for the project. The password has to be
entered with following criteria.
1. You can use Alphanumeric. The password is case sensitive.
New Password
2. You cannot use special characters and spaces.
3. You can enter the password up to 8 characters.
4. The password is displayed as ‘****’.
Reenter New
Enter the password again.
Password
When the password is previously configured in the project, a following

[Change Password] dialog box appears. You can change the password by
entering the current password in the text field.
Change
Password
OK Saves the password setting.
Cancel Does not set up the password and goes back to the [Project Properties] window.
3-19
Project Properties
Project Conversion
You can convert the Xpanel type of the current project. When you press the [Convert]
button, following window will appear.
Item Description
Select the target Xpanel model. You can select the following models: XT05S,
Select the
XT06C, XT08C, XT10C, XT12C, XT15M mono, XT04C, XT07C, XT15C, XT10CC,
Model
XT07C-R, CM-NP/iNP. You cannot select Hybrid Xpanel.
Select the option to back up the current project before the conversion. When you
Back Up
select the option, the ‘Back Up Prj. Name’ and ‘Back Up Prj. Path’ fields are enabled.
Enter the name of back up project. You must enter the project name after
selecting the back up project path. You cannot use the special characters
mentioned in the following message.
Back Up Prj.
Name
Back Up Prj.
Select the path where the back up project will be saved.
Path
The project will be backed up and converted. Any other operation during the
conversion may cause the system overload. If you did not select the ‘Back Up’
option, a message will appear.
Convert
3-20
3.3.3 Exercise
This section explains the basics of the feature. Please utilize the feature
according to your site environment.
Exercise : Setting Project Properties

Following is an example of setting project properties after creating a new project.
(1) Setting the Project Password
a) Select [Tools] – [Project] or icon to bring up the [Project Properties] window.

Enter the description of the project if needed.
b) Press [Password] button and enter the password which will be used to open the
project.
3-21
Project Properties
c) If you wish to change the password, press [Password] button again and enter the
password you have set in the previous step. Then you can assign the new
password.
(2) Project Conversion and Back Up
You can back up the current project file while you convert the project’s Xpanel type.
a) Press [Convert] button and select ‘Back Up’ option in the following window. You
can find that the current project is using the XT12C model.
b) Change the model to “XT07C” and assign the back up project path and the name.
In this example, the project will be saved in the desktop.
3-22
c) Press [Convert] button to start the project conversion and back up.
d) After the conversion, you can find that the Xpanel type in the [Project Properties]
window and the page size have been changed.
e) When you open the backup project, you can find that the original project is saved.
3-23
Page
3.4 Page
After creating a new project and pages, you can construct monitoring windows by
adding various functions. These pages can be saved in the desired path to be simply
managed.
3.4.1 Creating a Page
Go to [File]-[New Page] or click icon in the top menu. When you create a project,
‘Page Properties’ dialog box will appear. You can choose the type of page in the combo
box. You can select the normal, popup, or the keypad page.
3-24
As soon as the page is created, a page file instantly saved as “*.pgx” in the project
directory. The page name is made of each page type (Normal page: Base, Popup page:
Popup, Keypad page: Keypad) and page number by default.
The page name is added on the page tree according to its page type (Normal page: B,
Popup page: P, Keypad page: K) and page number.
When the page is created, ‘Tag screen’ and ‘Object window’ are visible by default. Tags
and object names shown in the page are listed in the each window. You can disable tag
screen and object window in the [View] menu.
3-25
Page
To save changes made on the page, click [File]-[Save] or icon. You can also save
multiple pages at once by selecting [File]-[Save All] or icon.
To change the size or position of the page, you can set values under the [Page Position]
of ‘Page Properties’.
Please note that you can only use pages which sizes are not exceed the
model size of project. The table below shows each size of model. See the
table as a reference when configuring the position and size of page.
Model Size
XT04 480 x 272
XT07 800 x 480
XT08 800 x 600
XT10 800 x 600
XT12 800 x 600
XT15 1024 x 768
3-26
Normal Page
You can add a standard window by selecting ‘Normal page’ in the [Page Properties]. The
default size of page is set the same as size of project model. Page name is specified as
‘Base 1’.
Popup Page
You can add a popup page window by selecting ‘Popup page’ in the [Page Properties].
The popup page is used to float another window upon the normal page. The default size
of page is set the same as size of project model. Page name is specified as ‘Popup 1’.
3-27
Page
When ‘Top Most’ is selected for the popup page, you can decide whether or not to
display the popup page on the specified screen.
Item Description
None Always shows popup page without any display conditions.

Shows popup page only on the specified screen. You can specify the
Visible in Screen screen by a single page like 1, 2. You can specify the first and last numbers
such as 3-5 for continuous pages.
Hides popup page on the specified screen. You can specify the screen by a
Hide in Screen single page like 1, 2. You can specify the first and last numbers such as 3-5
for continuous pages.
 If you use a data logging object along with trend graph, alarm summary
and key input window objects on a popup page, the shortcut keys of
data logging may not work properly.
 The ‘Popup display condition’ is a feature that shows or hides a popup
page according to the user’s need. Just because you do not see a popup
page due to the ‘Hide in Screen’ setting, this does not mean the invisible
popup page is closed in the project. In the examples described below,
you must choose to close the popup page.
1. Open the popup page for the alarm operation
2. Hide the popup page on the currently displayed screen in the ‘Display
condition.
3. All cleared alarm by the alarm disabling operation
4. Move to another page
→ If you do not close the popup page when the alarm is all cleared in
step 3, the popup page which opened in step 1 will be displayed again
when you go another page in the step 4. Please close the popup page
when you ‘all clear’ the alarms in step 3.
5. When switching a page using page-related command expressions
(e.g., Prepage())
3-28
Keypad Page
You can add a keypad window by selecting ‘Keypad page’ in the [Page Properties]. The
default size of page is set the same as size of project model. Page name is specified as
‘Keypad 1’. This page is used to utilize the key input object.
The size of keypad page must be smaller than the size of project model. Also, the keypad
page must contain one or more key input object.
You can design the data entry screen by using keypad page. To configure the keypad
page settings, select ‘Open Keypad Page’ option under the ‘Touch’ feature in object
configuration.
※ Please refer to the ‘Key input window’ manual for more information about key input
object.
3-29
Page
If you add the key input object in the popup page, the shortcut keys of
3.4.2 Opening a Page
You can bring up the existing page files by selecting [File] – [Open] or icon. You can also
browse the page from other pages. You can either edit the page or copy the contents to the
current project’s page.
You cannot open the page which is created in the higher version of Xpanel Designer.
3-30
3.4.3 Closing a Page
You can close the current page by selecting [File] – [Close]. To close all of the pages, select
[File]-[Close All Page].
If there are any changes, a message will appear asking if you wish to save the changes.
It is recommended to close pages that do not need more modification, for the better working
environment.
3-31
Page
3.4.4 Recent Page
After launching the project, you may bring up a page which you have recently worked on, by
selecting each page name. Up to 4 pages are listed in the [File] menu.
If the page file is deleted or its path is changed, you cannot open the page from the [Recent
page] list. You cannot also open them if the page is saved in the higher version of Xpanel
Designer.
3-32
3.5 Page Properties
An operator can customize the monitoring environment by setting page properties. The
appearance of page window for the runtime can be determined such as the title, size or
the executable position. The user can define an action at opening or closing the window.
This manual is based on Xpanel Designer 2. 52 Ver. Software. Note that

some features may differ depending on the version of Xpanel Designer.
3.5.1 Settings
To prompt the ‘Page Properties’ dialog box, select [Tools] – [Page Setup] or double-click
the blank space of the page. The dialog box is categorized into three functions: Page
Property, Page Position and Action.
(1) Page Property
You may decide name and type of current page. The options for viewing objects and
security grade are under this tab.
3-33
Page Properties
 General
Item Description
Each page is defined by a unique number, and a header is assigned

Page Number according to the type of page. (Normal page: B, Popup page: P, Keypad
page: K)
Enter the unique name of page in the text field. Note that if the file name
Page Name contains non-alphanumeric characters, the project may cause a malfunction
in the English OS of Xpanel.
Select the type of page.
Normal Page Set as default page for the project.
Page Type
Popup Page Set as a floating page upon the normal page.
Keypad Page Set as a user-defined page for keypad.
Specifies the background color of current page. You may select a color from
Background
the palette.
Description Enter the short information of page in the text field.
Considers the object as a background which does not contains ‘change’
function such as ‘visible’, ‘color’, etc. Graphic processing speed may be
increased by this option. The object with ‘change’ function locates upon the
background. If objects are overlapped each other, the object with ‘change’
function will be placed upon the other object which has empty function.
Option Xpanel Designer Xpanel Runtime
Disabled
When ‘visible’ function is
Fixed Background
enabled, objects are displayed
same as Xpanel Designer
screen.
Enabled
When ‘visible’ function is
enabled, the assigned object
will be placed forward.
3-34
This option is used to increase the update speed of Xpanel screen, by

reducing the number of objects to display. By default, all objects are redrawn
when an object function is activated. If you selected this option, only changed
objects are redrawn as the screen is refreshed.
※ Please verify the following to avoid the malfunction.
(1) Avoid the overlapping of objects with ‘change’ function, which refers:
-The object including ‘visible’, ‘blink’, ‘H/V change’, ‘H/V move’, ‘color’ or ‘rotate’
function
-Objects that are grouped as a single object with a function
-Dynamic tag, date/time, string value, data log, trend graph, alarm summary
and pagelink objects
Draw Changed
Object Only
The picture above shows three rectangle objects with ‘color’ object, which are
overlapped each other. The most recent changed object will be placed
forward regardless of the position.
(2) ‘Draw changed object only’ option does not activate when the object with
‘H/V move’ or ‘rotate’ function is registered in the page.
(3) If the objects with ‘visible’ activated by same tag are overlapped each
other, the backward object may be covered by a forward object.
Converts the image to a 256-colored bitmap. This option makes image lower
Using 256
quality. You can reduce the speed for replacing page and capacity of the
Bitmap
page.
Display Touch
Shows the borderline of the button when touching the object.
Area
Enable When the multiple of objects with ‘touch’ function are overlapped each other,
Overlapping both functions activate by touching the layered area. Note that you cannot
Objects use this option to ‘Page open’ and ‘Page close’ action.
This option is to limit the authority according to the user’s security level. You
Security Level can assign a value from 1 to 10. Higher level indicates the higher authority.
※ Refer to the ‘Security’ for more information about security level.
3-35
Page Properties
 Options for popup page and keypad page
Item Description
Decides the shape of page. When you select the check box, the page is set as
a window. When you deselect the checkbox, the page is changed as a
normal page.
System Window Enabled Disabled
Determines whether to use system icons (Minimize, maximize, close).

System Menu
Apply to this Applies the ‘System Window’ or ‘System Menu’ option to the edit screen in
working page Xpanel Designer.
 Options for popup page
Item Description
Topmost Determines whether to show or hide the popup page in the assigned screen.
Shows or hides the popup page according to the display condition.
None Popup page is always visible without any condition.
Popup page is visible in the assigned screen. You can
assign a single page. If you wish to assign the
Visible in Screen
Display continuous page, enter the start and end number as
Condition ‘3-5’ in the field.
Popup page is hidden in the assigned screen. You
can assign a single page. If you wish to assign the
Hide in Screen
continuous page, enter the start and end number as
‘3-5’ in the field.
3-36
(2) Page Position
You can specify the position or the size of page in the Xpanel Designer, and reflect them
in the Xpanel runtime.
Item Description
Enter the coordinate value that indicates the number of pixels between
X the left edge of the designing area and the left edge of the window being
configured. Current location is set as default.
Edit Enter the coordinate value that indicates the number of pixels between
Position Y the top edge of the designing area and the top edge of the window
being configured. Current location is set as default.
Width Enter the window’s width in pixels. Current width is set as default.
Height Enter the window’s height in pixels. Current height is set as default.
X Represents the X coordinate of page window in the Xpanel runtime.
Run Y Represents the Y coordinate of page window in the Xpanel runtime.
Position Width Represents the width of page window in the Xpanel runtime.
Height Represents the height of page window in the Xpanel runtime.
After adjusting edit location appropriately, press [Copy] to reflect
Copy
coordinate values into the runtime.
Frame in Position Assign the frame position of the page configured in [File]-[Frame Editor].
3-37
Page Properties
(3) Action
You can define the action for opening or closing the page such as executing the script or
changing a tag value.
Item Description
Enter the real address of device configured in the [I/O Device].

Address The real I/O address notation is as shown below:
[I/O device name.Station name.Device address]
Tag Name You can browse a tag from the database.
On Opening Page Enter the command in the field activated by opening page.
On Closing Page Enter the command in the field activated by closing page.
3-38
3.5.2 Exercise
Exercise : Pop-up screen from opening page

By accepting action, you can bring up the pop-up screen when you are opening the
page.
a) Create a normal page and popup page. Specify the name of popup page as ‘Popup’
and design as shown below.
b) Double-click the background of main screen or click the [Tools]-[Page Setup], and
move to the [Action] tab. Enter ‘PageOpen(“Popup”)’ in the ‘On Opening Page’ field.
3-39
Page Properties
c) Launch the project in Xpanel. A popup message appears from the main screen.
3-40
3.6 Xpanel Configuration
You can set project runtime environment through the Xpanel configuration. The main
screen can be selected, and a scroll message may be shown by choice. You can enable or
disable the beep sound during a touch operation. Also, screen dimming after a certain
period of time allows you to save electricity consumption.

3.6.1 Settings
To bring up the ‘Xpanel Configuration’ dialog box, press [Tools]-[Xpanel Configuration]

or icon.
3-41
Xpanel Configuration
(1) Window
Item Description
Select a main screen for Xpanel project runtime. You can select the
Starting Page
normal page or frame file in the project directory.
When the option is selected, beep sounds only on the touch zone of the
Beep Only on Touch
project. The silent will remain on the other area. This option disappears
Zone
when ‘Beep off’ option is selected.
Disable Online
Disables opening the configuration dialog box during Xpanel runtime.
Configuration
Shows the description of alarm at the bottom of the screen. [Scroll
Using Scroll Messages
message] tab will be added to the configuration window.
When the option is selected, there are no beep sound on entire area of
Beep Off
screen.
If there is no touch operation within the period of specified time, the
screen darkens automatically. You can set from 10 to 3600 seconds for
Dimming dimming time. This option is applied after restarting the Xpanel system.
You can configure dimming feature in the [Misc. Config]-[LCD
Brightness] as well.
Keeps focus on key input field at all times while touching other areas in
Key Input Fix Focus
screen.
When the page is added in the ‘Preloading page’ list, Xpanel preloads
Preloading Page the page before project execution. This reduces speed for opening the
page which has large size.
3-42
(2) Scroll Message
Under the [Scroll Message] tab, you may configure the appearance of scroll message.
The message starts with an alarm occurred earlier. If the multiple of alarms including
scroll message feature are occurred, descriptions are displayed in rotation. Messages are
ended after alarm is cleared.
Item Description
Assigns the height of scroll message in pixels. Scroll message is

created at the bottom of the screen, and height must be shorter than
Scroll Message Height
the height of screen. You can assign from 0 to 1024 pixels. The value
specified by default is 20.
Assigns the text size of scroll message. Text size must be less than the
Text Size height of scroll message. You can assign from 5 to 100 for text size.
The value specified by default is 10.
Assigns the distance between messages. You can assign from 1 to
Scroll Message Gap
1280 for distance. The value specified by default is 10.
Adjusts the speed of scroll message. The smaller the value of speed,
Scroll Message Speed the slower the scroll message moves. You can assign from 1 to 20.
The value specified by default is 10.
3-43
You may edit the color of scroll message for assigned level of alarm.
Batch Edit Color of Scroll
When you press [Batch Edit] button, you can configure colors for
Message
each level of alarm.
Decides the scrolling direction of message.
The message appears from right to left side of the
Right → Left
screen.
The message appears from left to right side of the
Left → Right
Scroll Direction screen.
The message appears from top to bottom of the
Top → Bottom
screen.
The message appears from bottom to top of the
Bottom → Top
screen.
3-44
3.6.2 Exercise
Exercise : Configuring the scroll message for alarm occurrence

a) Create an analog tag named ‘STORAGE’.
b) Go to [Tools]-[Alarm] and add two alarms in the alarm group 1. Check the ‘Apply
Scroll Message’ option in the alarm configuration window.
 Configure an alarm level 1 with the condition of ‘Greater than 200’. Enter the alarm
description as ‘Water storage over 200L’.
 Configure an alarm level 2 with the condition of ‘Greater than 300’. Enter the alarm
description as ‘Water storage over 300L’.
3-45
c) Create a touch object for changing value of ‘STORAGE’ tag. The object includes
‘Entry data’ feature.
d) Click [Tools]-[Xpanel Configuration] or icon to bring up the Xpanel

Configuration window. Check ‘Use Scroll Messages’ option.
e) Configure the height, text size, distance and speed of scroll message under the
[Scroll Message] tab.
3-46
f) Configure the color of scroll message for each alarm level. You can choose color for
alarm level 1 and level 2 in the ‘Batch Edit Color of Scroll Message’ dialog box.
g) Launch the project in Xpanel or simulator. As the tag value changes, corresponding
alarm description is displayed by scroll messages.
3-47
Frame Editor
3.7 Frame Editor
The Frame Editor allows the user to see the several pages on the project at a glance. 4
pages in maximum can be registered as a part of the layout which is provided by Xpanel
Designer. The new frame will be saved as an individual file, which can be set as the
starting page in Xpanel. When only a part of the frame changes, the Xpanel does not
redraw the whole page, which enables the faster operation of the project.
3.7.1 Frame Editor Settings
Select [File] – [Frame Editor] or press hotkey [Ctrl + W] to bring up the [Frame Editor] as
shown below.
Item Description
Displays the list of frame files created in the current project. When you select
Frame File an item, the corresponding configuration will be displayed on the Frame
Editor.
Enter the name of the frame file, which will be saved in *.FRX format. The
File Name file name cannot contain special characters such as “\”. “/”, “ : “, “*”, “?”, “<”,
“>”, “ | “.
Displays the resolution of the current project’s Xpanel model. The width and
Resolution
height of the frame file cannot exceed the resolution.
3-48
Decides whether to add a border to the selected frame. You can select ‘No
Border’ or ‘Windows Default’. ‘Windows Default’ border type is a single black
line, which is shown as below. (Xpanel Designer Simulator)
Border Type
You can select the layout type of the frame. There are 12 layouts in total.
Type
You can assign from 1 page to 4 pages according to the layout type.
According to the selected layout type, the number of activated fields are
Page 1~4 different. The number of activated fields follows the number written on the
selected layout type.
You man manually enter the name of the page file or press […] button to
Name
browse the page file. Only one page can be assigned to each field.
Assign the width and height of the corresponding page. The total width and
height cannot exceed the resolution. You can manually enter the width and
Width/Height
height or click [▲/▼] button to change the value. The size of certain pages
cannot be manipulated since it is decided by the other page’s size.
Add Creates a frame file with the current configuration.
Edit Edits the selected frame file with the current configuration.
Delete Deletes the selected frame file.
Close Closes the [Frame Editor] without saving the current configuration.
3-49
Frame Editor
3.7.2 Page Settings for Frame
To display several pages on a single frame, there are more items to be configured
beforehand. For example, the page size and position in the frame must be set up.
Also, you will be guided to set the frame file as the starting page and switching the pages
on runtime.
Page Properties
When you configure the frame, the pages to be used in the frame must be configured
beforehand. Select [Tools] – [Page Setup] to set the size and position in the frame of each
page. The values assigned to size and position in the frame must be equal to the values
assigned in the [Frame Editor].
In the [Page Position] tab, assign the value to the ‘Size’. The assigned value must be
identical to the value assigned in the [Frame Editor].
Select the ‘Position in Frame’ and press [Copy] button.
The entire pages to be used in the frame must be configured as mentioned above. If any
of the pages are configured incorrectly, the frame may not be displayed properly.
3-50
Starting Page Setup
Select [Tools] – [XPANEL Configuration] or icon to bring up the window as shown

below. You may assign the frame file to use it as a starting page in the [XPANEL
Configuration] window.
The frame files are listed in the dropdown list for starting page selection, after the list of
the individual page.
3-51
Frame Editor
3.7.3 Cautions Before Creating a Frame
In some cases, the frame may not operate correctly or be created in an unintended
structure.
(1) In the case of using ‘Trend Graph’, ‘Key Input Window’, ‘Alarm Summary’
The objects such as ‘Trend Graph’, ‘Key Input Window’, ‘Alarm Summary’ are not cropped
automatically when the object is located outside of the page used in the frame. The
whole object will be displayed invading the other frame.
If there is an object which exceeds the range of the frame area 1, it will be displayed as
shown below.
3-52
(2) The Absence of the Normal Page in the Frame
If the types of the pages which configure the frame are popup or keypad, the screen may
not be refreshed properly. For the proper operation of the page, you must use at least
one normal page in the frame.
3-53
Frame Editor
3.7.4 Exercise
Exercise : Opening a Page in the Frame

Following is an example of opening a different page in a frame.
(1) Page Configuration
a) Create the pages to be used for the frame. In the frame, the user will touch the
objects in the upper frame to open the different pages in the lower frame. Create 1
normal page for upper frame and 3 normal pages for lower frame.
b) Configure the page for the upper frame as shown below. Each object will be
configured with the ‘Touch’ feature to open the corresponding page.
3-54
c) Configure the pages for the lower frame as shown below. To distinguish the pages,
mark the pages with the floor number on the top left corner.
d) Select each page and go to [Tools] – [Page Setup]. In the [Page Position] tab, enter
the size and position in frame as shown below then press [Copy]. The edit position
is not applied when you are using the page as a component of the frame. Press
[OK] to finish the configuration.
3-55
Frame Editor
(2) Frame Configuration
a) Select [File] – [Frame Editor] to configure the frame. In this example, the frame will
be configured as shown below. Assign “UpperFrame” page at ‘Page1’. Assign “1F”
page to ‘Page2’ to display the page at first when the project is executed.
b) Enter the name of the frame file and press [Add] button to finish the configuration.
3-56
(3) Setting Starting Page
a) Select [Tools] – [XPANEL Configuration] to bring up the [XPANEL Configuration]

window as shown below.
b) Select “Page” frame file from the “Starting Page” list, then press [Ok] button to finish
the configuration.
3-57
Frame Editor
(4) Checking the Operation
a) To check the operation on the PC that you are currently editing the project, select
[Tools] – [Run Simulator] or press [F5] key. You can check if the project operates
properly by selecting each button in the following window.
3-58
4 Database
4.1 Database Management
The database is a core of the CIMON-Xpanel. The database connects the superordinate
concepts such as process and the control devices. Connections are established between
the process and the control devices so that the system can enhance its efficiency and
rationality. Every feature provided by CIMON-Xpanel is based on the tags defined in the
database.
The real tag reads or writes its value to or from the external devices. When the value of
the real tag changes, it is immediately written to the CIMON-Xpanel. The virtual tag is
used internally within the CIMON-Xpanel. It is used to create the process simulation. You
can assign the specific type to each tag: Group tag, Digital tag, Analog tag and String
tag. These tags can be defined and edited by using easy interfaces. Since the Excel
program allows the users to export and import the database, you can manage and print
data from the database at ease.
4.1.1 Features
 Supports the real tag which connects to the PLC and the virtual tag which is used
internally.
 Provides Group tag, Digital tag, Analog tag and String tag.
 The operater can continue the work by maintaining the previous status of the
project, the user can continue the work.
 Supports various editing features for quick and easy modification of database.
 Through the mutual transfer of database and Microsoft Excel, it is possible to
manage the project’s data with ease.
4-1
Database Management
4.1.2 Settings
Select [Tools] – [Database] or icon to bring up the window as shown below.
Database Editor
Item Description
1. Select [Edit] – [New Tag] when the ‘Database’ editor window is activated.
2. Click icon in the ‘Database’ editor window.
3. Press ‘Insert’ key.
New Tag
4. Double-click the blank area of tag list.
5. Right-click on the tag list and select [New Tag] on the submenu.
6. Press [Next Tag] in the ‘Edit Tag’ window.
1. Double-click the tag to edit on the tag list.
2. Select the tag to edit and click [Edit] – [Edit Tag].
Edit Tag
3. Select the tag to edit and click icon in the ‘Database’ editor window.
4. Right-click on the tag to edit and select [Edit Tag] on the submenu.
1. Select the tag to delete and press ‘Delete’ key.
Delete Tag 2. Select the tag to delete and click [Edit] – [Delete] or [Cut].
3. Right-click on the tag to delete and select [Delete] or [Cut] on the submenu.
1. Select the tag to copy on the tag list.
2. Cut or copy the tag with the methods shown below.
- Select [Edit] – [Cut] or [Copy]
Copy Tag - Press Ctrl + X or Ctrl + C key.
- Drag and drop the tag.
- Right-click on the tag and select [Cut] or [Copy] on the submenu.
3. Move to the destination and select [Edit] – [Paste] or press Ctrl + V key.
4-2
With Drag & Drop action, you can copy or move the selected tag to the other
location.
1. When you drag and drop the tag in the same tag list, the selected tag moves.
Drag
2. When you drag and drop the group tag, it is copied with the included tags.
&
3. When you drag and drop the tag to the tag tree, the tag is copied into the
Drop
corresponding group tag.
4. When you drag and drop the group tag to the tag tree, the group tag is copied
into the corresponding group tag.
When you create the tag, use the name which follows the criteria listed
below.
1. No special characters
E.g.) Space, Tab, @, *, /, +, -
2. Cannot use the number as the first character of tag name.
E.g.) DIG1: Valid, 1DIG: Invalid
3. Not case-sensitive.
4. Cannot use duplicated tag name in a group.
4-3
Database Management
Group Tag
If you have created a large number of tags in a single window, it may cause inefficiency
for editing and managing tags. The group tag allows you to categorize all tags into the
user’s definition, and subordinate tags are organized into tree structures. The grouped
tags are displayed and managed in the tag tree.
To create a group tag, select [Group] in the ‘Type’ field.
Item Description
Name Enter the tag name.
Desc. Enter the description of the tag.
Previous Moves to the previous tag’s ‘Edit Tag’ window.
Next Moves to the next tag’s ‘Edit Tag’ window.
Ok Registers the tag in the database.
Cancel Cancels the tag registration and goes back to the database window.
4-4
Digital Tag
The digital tag is one of the system-managing tags. The digital tag is used to represent
ON/OFF status or the values that are divided into True or False.
Item Description
4-5
Database Management
(1) General
Item Description
Select the tag type between virtual and real tag.
Links to the external device which is connected to CIMON-
Real Tag Xpanel. The value changes according to the status of the
Tag Type
device.
The virtual tag is used when the user requires to check the
Virtual Tag
internal value changes.
Enter or select the external device where the digital tag belongs to. You can
I/O Device check the name of the external device at [Tools] – [I/O Device]. This field is
enabled only when the ‘Real tag’ is selected.
Enter the address according to the external device’s address assignment. You
I/O Address must enter the address in the device’s addressing method. This field is enabled
only when the ‘Real tag’ is selected.
Save last status When you select this option, the last status of the tag is stored when project is
when closing closed. When you execute the project again, the tag values will be maintained.
(2) Advanced
Item Description
Initial Value Assign the initial tag value when the project is executed.
4-6
Analog Tag
The analog tag is one of the system-managing tags. The analog tag is used to represent
values measure by external devices such as point’s temperature and pressure value.
Item Description
4-7
Database Management
(1) General
Item Description
Tag Type
device.
The virtual tag is used when the user requires to check the
Virtual Tag
internal value changes.
Enter or select the external device where the analog tag belongs to. You can
Enter the address according to the external device’s address assignment. You
I/O Address must enter the address in the device’s addressing method. This field is
When you select this option, the last status of the tag is stored when project
Save last status
is closed. When you execute the project again, the tag values will be
when closing
maintained.
(2) Advanced
Item Description
Initial Value Assign the initial tag value when CimonX is executed.
Select the data type of the tag value. This option is to convert the data precisely
Data Type from PLC to the CIMON-SCADA. Refer to the table below for the description
of each data type.
When the analog value exceeds the range, an alarm will appear and the value
Clipping
will not be recognized.
4-8
You can convert the device’s data into the site value through Scale/Offset or
Max,/Min. method. When you select this option, the system will operate
with Scale/Offset method. Enter scale and offset value at ‘Raw Data’ field. If
you wish to operate the project with Max/Min method, enter maximum
and minimum value at ‘Raw Data’ field.
If you use this option, the tag value will be calculated by the
formula below.
Result = (Tag Value X Scale) + Offset
E.g.) Select an analog tag in UINT16. When scale is 0.1 and
offset is 10:
Scale/Offset
Scale Minimum value: (0 X 0.1) + 10 = 10,
Maximum value: (65535 X 0.1) + 10 = 6563.5
The value you have input is calculated by the formula below
and reflected to tag value.
Input value = (Input Data - 10) + 10
Enter the min/max value of the raw data and compare it to
the min/max value of the Eng. data. The ratio will be the
result.
Min./Max.
E.g.) Condition: The min/max value of the raw data is
0/4000 and the min/max value of the eng. data is 0/100.
If the actual data is 2000, the field value becomes 50.
Data Type Description Range

INT8 Integers which can be displayed in 8bit. -128 ~ 127
Positive integers which can be displayed in
UINT8 0 ~ 255
8bit.
UINT16 0 ~ 65535
16bit.
UINT32 0 ~ 4294967295
32bit.
BCD8 BCD data which can be displayed in 8bit. -79 ~ 79
Positive BCD data which can be displayed in
UBCD8 0 ~ 99
8bit.
UBCD16 0 ~ 9999
16bit.
UBCD32 0 ~ 99999999
32bit.
4-9
Database Management
-3.40282e + 038 ~
Float Floating-point number
3.40282e + 038
String Tag
This tag stores the string value.
Item Description
4-10
(1) General
Item Description
Tag Type
device.
Virtual The virtual tag is used when the user requires to check the
Tag internal value changes.
Enter or select the external device where the string tag belongs to. You can
Enter the address according to the external device’s address assignment.
I/O Address You must enter the address in the device’s addressing method. This field is
When you select this option, the last status of the tag is stored when
Save last status
project is closed. When you execute the project again, the tag values will
when closing
be maintained.
(2) Advanced
Item Description
Assign the maximum length of string to write on the tag.
Length of String
If the tag is the virtual tag, you can assign from 1 to 22.
Initial Value Assign the initial value of the tag on CimonX runtime.
4-11
Database Management
4.1.3 Editing Database with Excel
You can manage the database with Microsoft Excel file.
Editing Database with Excel
(1) Copying database into EXCEL
a) Select the tag to be copied to Excel. You can select multiple tags by [Shift + Left-
click] or [Ctrl + Left-click]. When you select a group tag, the subordinate tags are
selected.
b) Copy (Ctrl + C) the selected tags to the clipboard.
c) Paste(Ctrl + V) the contents to the Excel. Each column has different contents.
Please refer to the table in the next section.
d) Edit the database in Excel. You can create the consecutive tags with
increment/decrement feature of Excel.
4-12
(2) Pasting the data from EXCEL to the database
a) Select the rows to copy. You must select from the first row.
b) Copy (Ctrl + C) them to the clipboard and paste (Ctrl + V) to the database manager.
The tags with the same name will be replaced with the pasted contents.
4-13
Database Management
Excel Data Types of each Tag Types

Cell No. Digital Tag Analog Tag String Tag Note
A Tag Name Tag Name Tag Name
B Tag Type (1) Tag Type (2) Tag Type (3)
C Description Description Description
Real Tag = 1
D Real/Virtual Tag Real/Virtual Tag Real/Virtual Tag
Virtual Tag = 0
E I/O Device I/O Device I/O Device
F I/O Address I/O Address I/O Address
G Initial Value Initial Value Initial Value
Data Type
0 : INT8
1 : INT16
2 : INT32
3 : UINT8
4 : UINT16
5 : UINT32
I String Length
6 : BCD8
7 : BCD16
8 : BCD32
9 : UBCD8
10 : UBCD16
11 : UBCD32
12 : Float
Scale/Offset=1
M Scale
Min./Max. = 0
Eng. Data Min.

N
Value
Eng. Data Max.

O
Value
4-14
Raw data Min. SCALE value if SCALE/OFFSET

P
Value is applied
Raw data Max. OFFSET value if

Q
Value SCALE/OFFSET is applied
4.1.4 About Database Manager
You can utilize the database manager to check the number of tags which are used in the
current project.
Open [Database] in Xpanel Designer. Here you can find [About Database Manager]
menu on [Help] dropdown menu. In the pop-up window, you can check the version of
the database manager and the information of registered tags in the project.
 Total tags consist of group tags, digital tags, analog tags and string tags.
E.g.) Total tags (90) = Group tags (1) + Digital tags (55) + Analog tags (32) + String
tags (2)
 Total tags consist of real tags and virtual tags.
E.g.) Total tags (90) = Real tags (50) + Virtual tags (40)
 Group tag is considered as a virtual tag.
4-15
Database Management
4.1.5 Exercise
Exercise : Using Scale/Offset feature with real tag
In this example, Celsius temperature acquired from the real tag will be changed into
Fahrenheit temperature by using Scale/Offset feature.
a) Create ‘Celsius’ and ‘Fahrenheit’ analog tag. Define the tags as real tag and enter the
I/O Device and the address as shown below.
b) Go to [Advanced] tab of ‘FAHRENHEIT’ tag. Check at the [Scale] option, then enter
“1.8” at Scale and “32” at Offset.
4-16
c) Go to [Draw] – [Dynamic Tag] and add tag value objects to display the
temperatures. When you configure the dynamic tag object, assign the ‘Digit
Number’ and ‘Decimal Point’ option. Otherwise the rounded value will be displayed.
Tag Name CELSIUS
Display Format ###.##
Tag Name FAHRENHEIT
Display Format ###.##
d) To check the operation, download the project to Xpanel. You can find that the
value acquired from PLC is transferred to real tag. The tag value is converted from
Celsius to Fahrenheit.
4-17
Cross Reference
4.2 Cross Reference
Cross Reference is a feature to check, manage and modify the tags in the project with
ease. You can categorize the tag list with modules or pages. You can also check the
location, feature, and settings of the tags on the Cross Reference window.
4.2.1 Features
 You can check the tag information on a single window, categorized by module
and/or page.
 You can check and modify the tag settings on the window.
 You can convert the the tag, which is registered to an object, to the other tag at
once.
4.2.2 Settings
You can open Cross Reference window by clicking [Tools] – [Cross Reference].
4-18
The functions of tags registered to the objects are displayed on the Cross Reference
window individually.
If numerous tags are used in the project, the response time of the program
may be delayed on the execution of Cross Reference.
(1) Object
You can display the tag information according to the category which you have selected.
Object Description
All Displays all tags used in the current project.
Displays the tags used in the selected module. You can only select the modules
Module
used in the project.
Displays the tags used in the selected page. You can only select the pages which
Page
are saved as a file.
(2) Classification
You can display the tag information with a specific category. If the ‘Object’ is set as ‘All’,
this dropdown list is disabled. When the ‘Object’ is set as ‘Page’, you can select the saved
pages in the current project. When the ‘Object’ is set as ‘Module’, you can select the items
shown below.
Classification Description
Data Bridge Searches all tags which are used for the Data Bridge.
Data Server Searches all tags which are used for the Data Server.
DataLogger Searches all tags which are used for the Data Logger.
Designer Searches all tags which are used for the Designer.
Modbus Slave Searches all tags which are used for the Modbus Slave.
Project Alarm Searches all tags which are used for the Project Alarm.
Recipe Searches all tags which are used for the Recipe Editor.
4-19
Cross Reference
Script Searches all tags which are used for the Script Editor.
You can only apply the features such as Searching, Replace All and
checking the tag to the listed tags.
(3) Replace All
Replace All feature replaces the searched tags into the assigned tag at once. If the
‘Object’ is set as ‘All’, you can replace all tags. If the ‘Object’ is set as ‘Module’, you can only
replace the tags which are used for the modules. If the ‘Object’ is set as ‘Page’, you can
replace the tags which are used for the pages.
Item Description
You can manually enter the name of the tag to be replaced or click
Find Tag
button to find the tag in the browser.
You can manually enter the name of the tag to replace the ‘Find Tag’ or click
Replace Tag
button to select the tag in the browser.
Replaces the ‘Find Tag’ into ‘Replace Tag’. The number of the converted tags
All Replace
will pop up as a message.
Close Closes the [Replace] window.
(4) CSV Convert
You can save the information on the current list as an Excel file in ‘*.csv’ format. The form
of the Excel file is as shown below.
A B C D E F
1 Module Tag Address Object/Group Function Order
4-20
(5) Tag Name / Search
You can enter the tag name and press [Search] button to find a specific tag. The tag
name you have entered must exactly match the tag to be found. If you press button,
you can manually select the tag from the database.
(6) Pop-up
When you add, change or delete the tags registered to the object while Cross Reference
is running, the pop-up message will appear as shown below. You can update the tag list
when you press [OK]. If you press [Cancel], the change in the tag list will not be updated.
When you use ‘Replace All’ feature, the pop-up message will appear as shown below.
4-21
Cross Reference
(7) Tag List
The tags list is categorized by module, tag name, address, object/group, function, and
order. You can arrange the list in ascending/descending order by clicking the category.
Item Description
Module Displays the module where the tag is used.
Displays the tag names used in the functions. When you double-click the tag
Tag Name name, [Object Config.] window will appear. Objects such as Trend, Alarm
Summary, Page Embedding, Switch/Lamp, will appear.
Address Displays the I/O address which is assigned to the tag.
Object/Group Displays the object/group where the tag is used.
Function Displays the function of the tag.
Arranges the tags in order of the registration to the object. If several tags are
Order used in a single object, they are classified as the same number. Even if you
delete the object, the number does not change.
(8) Close
Closes the Cross Reference window.
4-22
4.2.3 Exercise
Exercise : Using Cross Reference
(1) Adding a Tag and Checking
a) Press icon in the database to add a digital tag. Designate the tag name as
‘VISIBLE’.
b) Add an object to the graphic page and registser ‘VISIBLE’ tag at ‘Visible’ feature as
shown below.
4-23
Cross Reference
c) Go to [Tools] – [Cross Reference] to check the tag information.
(2) Changing Tag Configuration
Double-click the item to change. Here, the [Object Config] window will appear as shown
below. You can change the configuration in this window.
4-24
(3) Replace All
a) Create another tag in the database. Designate the tag name as ‘BLINK’.
b) Go to [Tools] – [Cross Reference] – [Replace All] and enter the ‘VISIBLE’ tag and
‘BLINK’ tag as shown below. Press [All Replace] to convert the tag.
c) After the tag replacement, a message will pop up as shown below.
4-25
Cross Reference
d) You can check the replaced tag in the Cross Reference window.
(4) Tag Searching
e) In the Tag Name text field, enter the tag name to look up for.
f) Press [Search] button to show the result.
You have to enter the exact tag name to show the result.
4-26
5 Graphic Tools
5.1 Standard Tool
The [Standard Tool] consists of commands that execute the most frequently used in
Xpanel Designer. Go to [View] – [Standard Tool] to show or hide the toolbar on the top
menu. The standard toolbar shows up on the top menu as default. This toolbar consists
of ‘Edit tools’ and ‘Execution tools’.
5.1.1 Edit tools
You can use features for editing a graphic page such as [New Page], [Open], [Save],
[Copy], etc. Refer to the table below for features and their descriptions.
Item Description
New Page Creates a new graphic page in the project.
Open Opens an existing graphic page.
Save Saves the currently designing graphic page.
Save All Saves all pages.
Print Shows the [Print] dialog box.
Preview Shows the [Print Setup] dialog box.
Cut Cuts the selected object.
Copy Copies the selected object
Paste Pastes the cut or copied object.
Find Shows a dialog box to find a string.
Replace Shows a dialog box to find a string and replace it.
Zoom In Zooms in to a page for 25% scale.
Zoom Out Zooms out from a page for 25% scale.
5-1
Standard Tool
5.1.2 Execution Tools
Execution tools consist of commands for executing the project. Refer to the table below
for features and their descriptions.
Item Description
Shows the dialog box about information or configuration of the

Project
current project.
Database Shows the [Database] configuration dialog box.
XPANEL Setup Shows [XPANEL Configuration] dialog box.
I/O Devices Shows [I/O Devices] configuration dialog box.
Alarms Shows [Alarms Configuration] dialog box.
Security Shows [Security] configuration dialog box.
Data Logging Shows [Data Logging} configuration dialog box.
Script Shows [Script] configuration dialog box.
String Editor Shows [String] configuration dialog box.
Data Server Shows [Data Server] configuration dialog box.
Recipe Shows [Recipe] configuration dialog box.
Data Bridge Shows [Data Bridge] configuration dialog box.
Download to XPANEL Download the project according to the connection method.
Help Shows [CIMON-XPANEL Help] window.
PC Runtime Launch the project in the Touch PC environment.
5-2
5.2 Status Tool
[Status Tool] shows the current selection state in Xpanel Designer. You can find a short
description of your selection, the location of the cursor and the lock status of your
keyboard.
You can show or hide the status toolbar through [View] – [Status Tool]. The Status tool is
shown at the bottom of the application as the default setting.
(1) (2) (3)

No. Description
(1) Shows a short description of the menu which is currently selected.
Shows the cursor’s coordinate on the current graphic page. The coordinate is expressed
in x and y, in pixel units.
(2)
If there are objects on the graphic page, you can acquire the exact coordinate of the
object by selecting it.
Shows the lock status of your keyboard. According to your locks such as Caps Lock,
(3)
Num Lock, and Scroll Lock, corresponding string lights up.
5-3
Drawing Tool
5.3 Drawing Tool
The drawing tool is grouped with commands used to drawing basic and advanced
objects, which are frequently used in project editing. You can register the toolbar on the
menu by selecting [View] – [Drawing Tool].
5.3.1 Basic Object
You can select and draw the basic graphic objects (line, rectangle, circle, arc, etc.) on the
graphic page. Features are listed in the following table.
Item Description
Selector mode used to select, move and resize objects.
You can move around in the graphic page by following steps:

Select
1. Right-click the blank space of graphic page.
2. Drag the mouse to opposite from location you want to move.
Line Line tool used to draw lines.
Rectangle Rectangle tool used to draw rectangles or squares.
Ellipse Circle tool used to draw circle or ellipses.
Arc Arc tool used to draw arcs.
Sector Circular sector tool used to draw circular sector.
Chord Chord tool used to draw chords.
Line tool used to draw polylines. Vertexes are added whenever clicking
Polyline blank space of the graphic page. To exit drawing mode, double-click the
blank space of the graphic page.
Line tool used to draw polygons. Vertexes are added whenever clicking
space of the graphic page. To exit drawing mode, double-click the blank
Polygon
space of the graphic page. At this moment, each location clicked the
beginning and the end is connected.
Text tool used to enter text tool. Click the blank space of graphic page
Text when you finish with editing text. You can add a new line with pressing
Enter key.
5-4
※ For more information about each basic object, please refer to the basic object manual.
5.3.2 Advanced Object
You can select and draw the advanced objects (Dynamic tag, alarm summary, trend
graph, etc.) on the graphic page. Functions are listed in the following table.
Item Description
Brings up Dynamic Tag configuration dialog box. This is used to display

Dynamic Tag
a current tag value or variable in runtime.
Brings up Date/time configuration dialog box. This is used to display the

Date/Time
time from PC setting.
Brings up String configuration dialog box. This is used to utilize settings

String Value
in the string table.
Brings up multi string value configuration box. This is used to utilize

Multi String
settings in the multi-language table.
Brings up Datalog object. This is used to display logged data values on

Datalog
the grid.
Brings up Trend configuration dialog box. This is used to display
Trend Graph currently logging data as trends. YT, LOG, SPC, Scope, XY, ST trends are
provided.
Brings up Alarm Summary configuration dialog box. This is used to

Alarm Summary
display summaries of alarm, such as alarm history or alarm status.
Brings up key input configuration dialog box. This is used to receive the
Key Input
analogic or string value from keyboard input.
Brings up Library selection dialog box. Library provides numerous

Library
graphic images such as engine, gauge, flowmeter, etc.
Brings up Pagelink dialog box. This is used to insert the other graphic
Pagelink
page objects in current page.
※ For more information about each advanced object, please refer to each object
manual.
5-5
Font Tool
5.4 Font Tool
The Font Toolbar contains commands about font type, size, style and alignments. You
can add this toolbar to the top menu at [View] – [Font Tool].
You can change the properties of an object’s strings with this toolbar. Font properties are
applied to any objects’ strings according to the font setup. To apply the settings, strings
have to exist in the object.
5.4.1 Font Type
You can check the entire list of font types installed in Xpanel Designer. These font types
can be applied to the objects’ strings. The default font type is Gulim. To change the font
type, you can either select one from the list or enter the font type manually in the combo
box.
 The use of illegally downloaded fonts can be subject to legal action, and
Cimon will not be held liable in such cases. Please make sure to look up
the license of any font you wish to use in the Xpanel project.
 If you have mistyped the font type or the font has not been installed in
Xpanel Designer, the font type does not change. The last font type
selected will be applied to the string.
5-6
5.4.2 Font Size
You can select or enter the font size. You can also change the font size by enlarging or
reducing the object’s size.
5.4.3 Font Style
There are three types of font styles which can be applied to the strings. Multiple styles
may be applied to a single string.
Bold Makes the string bold or unbold.
Underline Underlines the string or deletes the underline.
Italic Slants the string or makes the string upright.
5-7
Font Tool
5.4.4 Font Alignment
You can align the string within the object. Refer to the table below for the types of
alignment and the examples.
Aligns the string to the left side of the

Left Alignment
object.
Aligns the string to the center of the

Center Alignment
object.
Aligns the string to the right side of the

Right Alignment
object.
5.4.5 RTL
RTL (Right-to-Left) Language means the character writing starts from the right of the text
field and continues to left. Arabic or Hebrew are the most widely used RTL writing
systems.
When you set the ‘RTL’ option to the object, the text in the object will be written from
right to left side.
5-8
5.4.6 Column Selection
When the multi-language table is configured in the project, you may display the multi-
string values by selecting columns in the combo box.
If you select ‘Col 1’, a multi-string value object in the current page shows the string of
‘Column 1’.
※ Refer to the ‘Multiple-language setup’ manual for more information of multi-language

table.
5-9
Color Tool
5.5 Color Tool
The color tool contains features used to select line style, access the color palettes and
transparent object color.
5.5.1 Settings
Color tool is enabled when the page have focused, and the tool window appears when
you select [Color Tool] on the [View] menu. You can choose line color and line styles of
the selected basic objects. The settings on the color tool are assigned to newly created
basic objects by default.
Text color is changed when color is applied to the text object from the
color tool. Note that line style is not applied to the text.
5-10
Palette
You can change the basic object’s line color. Followings are the features that can be
utilized in the color palette.
Item Description
Provides 91 standard colors. It applies user’s selection on the line color. A color
Basic Color palette dialog box appears when the cell has been selected. User can define
the color through the color palette.
Color tool allows you to define custom colors and add them to your palette.
User Defined
A color palette dialog box appears when the cell has been selected. User can
Color
define the color through the color palette.
Following ‘Color’ dialog box appears when you double-click each cell.
5-11
Color Tool
Based on RGB color, HSV (Hue, Saturation, Brightness Value) values can be accurately
configured in the color window.
Following table explains about instructions and examples.
Click the object, and select a color on the palette you wish to change.
When you select a color and create an object, the color is applied on the
object by default.
Instruction
Text color is changed when color is applied to the text object.
When you draw the object with a right mouse click, the color is reversed
from the default.
Example
Line Style
You can change the basic object’s line style, such as solid line, dotted line, etc. The
following table demonstrates with instructions and examples.
Click the object, and select a line style on the list what you want to change.
When you select a line and create an object, the style is applied on the
Instruction object by default.
When you draw the object with right-click, the color is reversed from the
default.
Example
5-12
Preview
The preview area shows an example of the basic object with currently selected color and
line style.
Transparent
This feature allows a basic object to display line style. The background color is
transparent. The following table demonstrates with instructions and examples.
Select the object, and click the [Transparent] option to make the object
transparent. When you select the option and create an object, the
Instruction
transparency is applied on the object by default.
The background color will be returned when you make the object
transparent and deselect the option.
Example
5-13
Arrange Tool
5.6 Arrange Tool
The toolbar consists of commands such as object groupage, object ordering, etc. You
can add this toolbar to the top menu at [View] – [Arrange Tool].
You can only utilize the toolbar when there are multiple objects on the graphic page.
Please refer to the following section for more information about the arrange tool.
To select multiple objects, click your first selection and then hold down the
“SHIFT” key as you click the next. You may also click on a blank area on the
page and drag the mouse over all the objects you wish to select. You can
arrange selected objects with the popup menu when you right click the
objects.
5.6.1 Groupage
You can group multiple objects or change the placement order on the graphic page.
Refer to the table below for commands and the examples
This feature is enabled when more than two
objects are selected. Selected objects will be

Group
grouped and operate as a single object. →
This feature is enabled when you select a
group object. The selected group object will
Ungroup be broken into the individual objects it was

→
made from.
5-14
5.6.2 Ordering
You can change the placement order of multiple objects on the graphic page. Refer to
the table below for commands and the examples.

This feature operates by placing the selected
object in front of all other objects. If the
object is layered upon other objects, the

Bring to
selected object may partially cover the other →
Front
objects.
This feature operates by placing the selected
object behind of all other objects. If the
Send to object is layered under other objects, the
Back selected object may be partially covered by →

the other objects.
This command is used to move the object
just one layer forward. If the object is layered

One Step upon other objects, the selected object may
→
Forward partially cover the other objects.
This command is used to move the object
just one layer backward. If the object is
One Step layered under other objects, the selected
Backward object may be partially covered by the other →

objects.
5-15
Arrange Tool
5.6.3 Arrange
This feature is enabled when you select two or more objects. Objects may be aligned to
the top or bottom, the left or right sides, and in the middle, horizontal, or vertical
directions. Refer to the table below for the commands and examples.
Aligns the left edge of selected objects with the

Left left edge of the object in left side.
Aligns the middle of selected objects in horizontal

direction with the centered object. The recently
Horizontal
created object will be placed in front of the one ↓
Center
previously created.
Aligns the right edge of selected objects with the

Right right edge of the object in right side.
Aligns the top edge of selected objects with the

Top top edge of the object at the top. ↓
5-16
Aligns the middle of selected objects in vertical

direction with the centered object. The previously
Vertical
created object will be placed behind of the one
Center
recently created.
→
Aligns the bottom edge of selected objects with

↓
Bottom the bottom edge of the object at the bottom
5.6.4 Spacing
This feature is enabled when you select three or more objects. You can distribute spaces
between selected objects horizontally or vertically. Refer to the table below for
commands and the examples.
This feature is enabled when you select

three or more objects. Evenly spaces all
Space ↓
selected objects horizontally between the
horizontal
left most and right most selected objects.
This feature is enabled when you select

three or more objects. Evenly spaces all
Space selected objects vertically between the
Vertical top most and bottom most selected
objects. →
5-17
Arrange Tool
5.6.5 Rotation/Flip
This feature is enabled when you select one or more objects. You can rotate or flip the
selected objects. Refer to the table below for commands and the examples.
It rotates the selected objects 90
degrees clockwise based on the

90’ Clockwise center point.
→
It rotates the selected objects 90
degrees counter clockwise based on

90’
the center point.
CounterClockwise
→
It flips the selected objects horizontally

→
based on the center point of the X
Horizontal axis.
It flips the selected objects vertically
based on the center point of Y axis.

Vertical
5-18
5.6.6 Reshape
This feature is enabled when you select a simple object. You can change the shape of
simple graphic objects: Line, rectangle, arc, circular sector, chord, polyline, polygon.
When you select an object, icon is enabled and you can change the shape of object
by dragging its handles.
a) Select a simple graphic object to reshape. Click the [Reshape] icon ( ). Each
handle on the object’s line is turned to black.
b) You can change the shape of object by dragging its handles.
5.6.7 Snap to Grid
When you are arranging objects on the page, turning on the feature will lead your image
to snap on the grid. Objects may be drawn or positioned on the grid. It can be useful
when making fine arrangement of an object to disable [Enable Snap]. This will allow
control without grid snap.
You can enable or disable this feature by toggling its icon:

indicates the functionality is enabled, and means it is disabled.
5-19
Tag View Tool
5.7 Tag View Tool
Using the tag view tool, you can display tag names or addresses as label, which are
registered on the object. You can add the tool bar on the menu by selecting [View]-[Tag
View Tool].
Tag labels are visible with objects in current page. You may choose font color or
background color. The font style is fixed at ‘Gulim’ and cannot be changed.
 Tag labels are only shown in the work space of Xpanel Designer, and
they are invisible in Xpanel runtime.
 Please note that characters may corrupted if ‘Gulim’ font does not exist
in the PC.
5.7.1 Color
You can assign the font color or background color by selecting items in combo box. Tag
label color in current page will changed at once by selection.
5-20
5.7.2 Label
You can show tag names and addresses or hide them with each icon, which are
described in the table below.
Shows the tag name which is set in the object. If
Tag Name multiple of tags are assigned at the object, all tag
names will be displayed.
Shows the address which is set in the object. If
Address multiple of addresses are assigned at the object, all
addresses will be displayed.
Hide Hides labels from the object.
5-21
Object Configuration
6 Graphic UtilizationⅠ
6.1 Object Configuration
You can configure the object with basic control features such as [Visible], [Blink],
[Touch]. In addition, you can customize your project with various objects and features.
How to pop up the [Object Configuration] window
 Double click the object.

 Right-click the object and select [Object Config] on the pop up menu.
 Select the object, then go to [Edit] – [Object Config].
 When you select another object on the graphic page while [Object Config] window
is visible, any changes made to the old objects are applied and the [Object Config]
window points to the new object.
 Go to [View] – [Object Window] or [Selected Object Window]. You can check the
list of registered objects. Double click the item.
Any of the methods mentioned above will bring up the [Object Config] window.
6-1
Composition of [Object Configuration] window
Item Description
Name Designate a name for the object, spaces are not allowed.
Select the style or control features for the object. Selecting an option will
Config
change the taps shown on the right.
6.1.1 Style
(1) Position/Size
Item Description
The value assigned to position indicates the coordinate of the object’s top left
Position vertex. Default value is the coordinate of currently selected object. When you
change the value and save it, the object will change the location accordingly.
The size is measured from the top left of the object. The absolute value is
assigned in pixel unit. Default value is the width and height of currently
Size selected object. When you change the value and save it, the object’s size
changes. You can assign the value from 1 to 32767.
For the rectangles, polylines and polygons, the minimum is 2 pixels.
6-2
(2) Line/Fill
Item Description
The selected object will become a “No Fill”, or a line-only object. You can check
Transparent the changes made on the object at preview. The transparent object is selected
Draw by clicking its line. When the transparency is applied to the text object, the
background color will disappear.
Enabled when [Transparent Draw] is checked. You can utilize this feature
IMG Correction
when a bitmap image is used and [Transparent Draw] is checked.
6-3
Item Description
Selects the style of object’s outline. 7 types of lines are supported. Default is a
Style Line
solid line.
Selects the color of object’s outline. Color palette appears when you click the
Pen
button next to ‘Pen’. Default color is black.
Selects the color to fill in the object. Color palette appears when you click the
Color Fill
button next to ‘Fill’. Default color is white.
You cannot configure this area. This item indicates the tranparent area of the
Trans.
preview.
Enabled when [Transparent Draw] is checked. You can utilize this feature when
IMG Revision
bitmap image is used and [Transparent Draw] is checked.
Line-only objects such as line and arc do not support ‘Fill’ option.
6-4
6.1.2 Control Feature Configuration
(1) Visible
Shows or hides the object according to the tag value.

This feature does not support the following objects: Trend, Data Logging, Key Input
Window, Alarm Summary, Page Link.
Item Description
Controls the object with the address of I/O device which is registered in the
Addr [I/O Device]. You can select the data unit (BIT/WORD).
Press button to configure the detailed address.
You have to enter the tag name which will become the standard for the
‘Visible’ feature. You can find the tag with button or manually input the
Tag tag name.
If the corresponding tag does not exist in database, a message pops up
asking the user if they wish to add a new tag.
The object appears when the tag value is ON (Digital: ON, Analog: Values
ON
Condition other than 0).
OFF The object appears when the tag value is OFF (Digital: OFF, Analog: 0).
6-5
(2) Blink
Blinks in certain cycles according to the tag value.

Item Description
‘Blink’ feature. You can find the tag with button or manually input the
Tag tag name.
The object appears when the tag value is ON (Digital: ON, Analog: Values
ON
Condition other than 0).
OFF The object appears when the tag value is OFF (Digital: OFF, Analog: 0).
You can assign the interval value in 100msec units. The values from 1 to 999
Interval can be assigned. If the value exceeds the range, a warning message pops up.
e.g.) When you input 10, the object blinks every second. (1000msec)
6-6
(3) V-Size
Changes the size of object vertically according to the tag value.

[Vertical Size Variation]
Item Description
Controls the object with the address of I/O device which is registered in the [I/O
Addr Device]. You can select the data unit (BIT/WORD).

You have to enter the tag name which will become the standard for the ‘V-Size’
feature. You can find the tag with button or manually input the tag name.
Tag
If the corresponding tag does not exist in database, a message pops up asking the
user if they wish to add a new tag.
Assign the range of object’s transformation by minimum and maximum value.
When the tag value is equal to or less than the minimum value, the object is
hidden. When the tag value becomes greater, the object becomes closer to the
Data Range
original shape.
If you enter ‘?’, the minimum and the maximum value is same as those of the
tag’s.
6-7
[Vertical Size]
Item Description
Top The object’s size changes starting from top to bottom.

Center The object’s size changes starting from center to both sides.
Bottom The object’s size changes starting from bottom to top.
(4) H-Size
Changes the size of object horizontally according to the tag value.

[Horizontal Size Variation]
Item Description
6-8
You have to enter the tag name which will become the standard for the ‘H-
Size’ feature. You can find the tag with button or manually input the
Tag tag name.
Assign the range of object’s transformation by minimum and maximum
value. When the tag value is equal to or less than the minimum value, the
object is hidden. When the tag value becomes greater, the object becomes
Data Range
closer to the original shape.
If you enter ‘?’, the minimum and the maximum value is same as those of
the tag’s.
[Horizontal Size]
Item Description
Left The object’s size changes starting from left to right.
Middle The object’s size changes starting from middle to both sides.
Right The object’s size changes starting from right to left.
6-9
(5) V-Move
Moves the object vertically according to the tag value.

[Vertical Movement]
Item Description

You have to enter the tag name which will become the standard for the ‘V-Move’
Tag
Assign the range of object’s movement by minimum and maximum value. When
the tag value is equal to or less than the minimum value, the object is at the
starting point. When the tag value becomes greater, the object moves further
Data Range
from the starting point.
tag’s.
6-10
[Vertical Move]
Item Description
Top The object moves from top to bottom.
Bottom The object moves from bottom to top.
Assign the maximum distance of movement.

Move
The distance is assigned in pixel unit, from 1 to 1024.
(6) H-Move
Moves the object horizontally according to the tag value.

6-11
[Horizontal Movement]
Item Description

You have to enter the tag name which will become the standard for the ‘H-Move’
Tag
Assign the range of object’s movement by minimum and maximum value. When
the tag value is equal to or less than the minimum value, the object is at the
starting point. When the tag value becomes greater, the object moves further
Data Range
from the starting point.
tag’s.
[Horizontal Move]
Item Description
Left The object moves from left to right.
Right The object moves from right to left.
Assign the maximum distance of movement.

Move
The distance is assigned in pixel unit, from 1 to 1024.
6-12
(7) Color
Changes the color of object according to the tag value.

[Color]: You can configure the conditions of [Color]. You can set maximum 8 conditions.
Item Description

You have to enter the tag name which will become the standard for the ‘Color’
Tag
Pen Selects the color of object’s outline when color changes.
Fill Selects the color to fill in the object when color changes.
6-13
Value: The color changed according to the value assigned to the tag.
The color changes when the tag value is

>=
equal to or greater than the assigned value.
Priority of [Color]: The ‘Color Variation’ with bigger number has higher priority.
E.g.) Color Vari.1 < Color Vari.2
(8) Rotate
Rotates the object with assigned angle according to the tag value.
[Rotation]
Item Description

6-14
You have to enter the tag name which will become the standard for the ‘Rotate’
Tag
Assign the range of object’s rotation by minimum and maximum value. When the
tag value is equal to or less than the minimum value, the object does not rotate.
Data Range When the tag value becomes greater, the object rotates.
tag’s.
[Rotate]
Item Description
You can assign maximum rotation angle. A value from 0 to 360

Max Rotate Angle
can be assigned.
Rotate 90 Rotate Left The object rotates counter clockwise.

Direction 90 Rotate Right The object rotates clockwise.
Assign center point’s coordinate of the rotation.
The absolute coordinate has to be assigned in pixel unit It is
Center Point
recommended to assign the coordinate in range of the graphic
page.
Objects such as Circle, Text, Tag Value do not rotate with the default
center point. You have to change the value assigned to center point.
6-15
(9) Touch
Executes a defined operation when the object is pressed or released. You cannot use this
feature with EntryData.
[Action Script]: You can define the operation when you touch the object.
Item Description
Opens a graphic page. You can input the page’s name manually
Open Page
or press to select a graphic page through file browser.
Closes a graphic page. You can input the page’s name manually or
Close Page
press to select a graphic page through file browser.
Assign a condition to perform the touch feature. The condition
Cond must be in format of logical and/or comparison calculation. Refer
to the table below for more information.
Controls the object with the address of I/O device which is
registered in the [I/O Device]. You can select the data unit
Addr
(BIT/WORD).
6-16
You have to enter the tag name which will become the standard
for the ‘Touch’ feature. You can find the tag with button or
Tag manually input the tag name.
If the corresponding tag does not exist in database, a message
pops up asking the user if they wish to add a new tag.
Writes the assigned value to the registered tag.
You can assign a value to write at the selected tag. Write 0 or 1
Write Tag
Write for Digital Tag. For Analog Tag, write integer or floating-point
Value
Value number. If you wrote a value greater than 1 for the digital tag,
the tag recognizes it as 1.
Configures the operation on digital tag when you touch the object.
Write Value
Sets the digital tag value as “1”.
Set
Write Digital
Write Value
Value Sets the digital tag value as “0”.
Reset
Write value
Reverses the digital tag value. (0→1 or 1→0)
Toggle
You can write a command expression to execute.
Command
Command Inputs a command expression when you touch the object.
Down
Expression
Inputs a command expression when you release the
Command Up
object.
Writes an instant value when you touch or release the object.
Down – Written
Write Inputs a value when you touch the object.
Value
Momentary
Up – Written
Inputs a value when you release the object.
Value
Operates as a key of keyboard. Supports 83 keys in total, such as Arrow keys,
HOME, END, PAGE UP/DOWN, INSERT, DELETE, LOCK Keys, Alphabets,
Key Input
Numbers, ENTER, SPACE, ESC, PRINT SCREEN, PAUSE, F1~F12, TAB, “/”, “*”,
“-“, “+”, “.”, CLEAR.
Opens a keypad page. Assign the location where the keypad page will be
opened at ‘V Scale’ and ‘H Scale’. It is recommended to enter the value less
Open Keypad than the Xpanel’s resolution. You can select the ‘Use Max/Min’ option to
Page assign the range of value. If the option is deselected, the minimum and the
maximum value is same as those of the tag’s. You can input the page’s name
manually or press to select a graphic page through file browser.
6-17
Condition
Assign a condition to perform the touch feature. The condition must be in format of logical and/or
comparison calculation.
Item Description
Press [Addr] button to configure the detailed address.
Sets condotion with the tags from the database. Press [Tag] button or
Tag
manually input the tag name.
Enter the comparison calculation in the format as shown below.

[Tag Name or Device Address] [Comparison Operator] [Value]
Following table shows the list of comparison operators you can use.
Comparison Operator Description Example
== Is equal to A == B
>= or => Is greater than or equal to A >= B
> Is greater than A>B
<= or =< Is less than or equal to A <= B
< Is less than A<B
!= Is not equal to A != B
You can also use comparison calculation and logical calculation together. Use logical
operator between two comparison calculations as shown below..
[Comparison Calculation] [Logical Operator] [Comparison Calculation]
Following table shows the list of logical operators you can use.
Logical Operator Description Example
&& Logical AND A && B

|| Logical OR A || B
! Logical NOT !A
[Security]: This feature is to put a limit on users when using the object.
※ Please refer to ‘Security’ manual for more information.
6-18
(10) EntryData
Inputs data with data entry window when the object is clicked. You cannot use this
feature with Touch.
[Action]: You can select one of data entry type between numeric and text.
a) Numeric
6-19
Item Description
Assign a condition to perform the touch feature. The condition must be in

Cond format of logical and/or comparison calculation. Refer to the table below
for more information.
‘EntryData’ feature. You can find the tag with button or manually
Tag input the tag name.
Assign an input range. If you enter ‘?’, the minimum and the maximum
Min/Max Value
value is same as those of the tag’s.
You can select a window type when you use data entry feature. Through
[Preview], you can check the 3 supported window types.
Style
Title Designates the title of data entry window.
Comment Inputs the comment of data entry window.
6-20
b) Text
Item Description
Assign a condition to perform the touch feature. The condition must be

Cond in format of logical and/or comparison calculation. Refer to the table
below for more information.
Controls the object with the address of I/O device which is registered in
Addr the [I/O Device]. You can select the data unit (BIT/WORD).
‘EntryData’ feature. You can find the tag with button or manually
Tag input the tag name.
When you write text on the data entry window, it is expressed as
Password
“*****”.
You can select a window type when you use data entry feature.
Through [Preview], you can check the 3 supported window types.
Style
Title Designates the title of data entry window.
Comment Inputs the comment of data entry window.
6-21
Condition
Assign a condition to perform the entrydata feature. The condition must be in format of logical
and/or comparison calculation.
Item Description
Press [Addr] button to configure the detailed address.
Sets condotion with the tags from the database. Press [Tag] button or
Tag
manually input the tag name.
Enter the comparison calculation in the format as shown below.

[Tag Name or Device Address] [Comparison Operator] [Value]
Following table shows the list of comparison operators you can use.
Comparison Operator Description Example
== Is equal to A == B
>= or => Is greater than or equal to A >= B
> Is greater than A>B
<= or =< Is less than or equal to A <= B
< Is less than A<B
!= Is not equal to A != B
You can also use comparison calculation and logical calculation together. Use logical
operator between two comparison calculations as shown below..
[Comparison Calculation] [Logical Operator] [Comparison Calculation]
Following table shows the list of logical operators you can use.
Logical Operator Description Example
&& Logical AND A && B

|| Logical OR A || B
! Logical NOT !A
[Security]: This feature is to put a limit on users when using the object.
※ Please refer to ‘Security’ manual for more information.
6-22
[Position Offset]
Item Description
Assign a coordinate of X axis for data entry window. You can assign value
X Offset (pixels) from -32768 to 32767. If the coordinate exceeds the graphic page, the
window appears on the nearest border.
Assign a coordinate of Y axis for data entry window. You can assign value
Y Offset (pixels) from -32768 to 32767. If the coordinate exceeds the graphic page, the
window appears on the nearest border.
Following table shows the examples of each action’s window style 1.
Item Example
Numeric
Text
6-23
6.1.3 Input Device Address
You can configure the detailed device address in the following window, to control or
store the data through the object.
Item Description
Select Digital/Analog,String. The option window changed according to the

Data Type
selection.
Assign the device and address for the object control.
Device Type
Device Address
Enter the starting address of the device. The value you can
Address input may differ according to the selected I/O device and
the device type.
keyboard.
6-24
The [Option] is activated when the ‘Analog’ or ‘String’ option is selected.

Press the button to bring up the [Analog Tag Option] or [String Tag Option]
types: UINT8, UINT16, UINT32, INT8, INT16, INT32,
Type
UBCD8, UBCD16, UBCD32, BCD8, BCD16, BCD32, Float .
UINT16 is the default type.
Option default range is from 0 to 65535.

appear when the value exceeds the assigned range, and
the exceeded value will not be used.
Enter the value range which will be actually input to the
PLC.
Raw Data For example, if the raw data range is from 0 to 16000 and
This option calculates the PLC data and displays the result
to the Xpanel.
Scale

Assign the maximum length of the string data. You can

String Length
assign the value from 1 to 80.
6-25
6.1.4 Exercise
Exercise : Open page with [Touch]
(1) Opening the page with [Open Page] action
a) Select [Open Page] action and enter the page to open. In this example, ‘Base 2’ will
be opened. Enter the page name and press [OK].
b) The touch feature is used in the text object as shown below. Write the project to
Xpanel or run the simulator. Touch the object.
6-26
c) You will see that Base 2 is opened.
(2) Opening the page with [Command Expression] action
a) Select [Command Expression] action and enter the command expression as shown
below. In this example, ‘Base 2’ will be opened. Enter the command expression and
press [OK].
b) The touch feature is used in the text object as shown below. Write the project to
Xpanel or run the simulator. Touch the object.
6-27
c) You will see that Base 2 is opened.
6-28
Basic Object
6.2 Basic Object
Simple graphic objects are used to operate commands as buttons in Xpanel runtime.
You can draw lines, rectangles, circles, etc. These objects can be also used for displaying
operating conditions of Xpanel and external devices.
This section explains how to draw and create basic objects.
6.2.1 Drawing the Objects
A graphic page should be opened when the object has been created. Select the object
you wish to draw. The following methods can be made to an object:
 Click [View]-[Drawing Tool] in the top menu of Xpanel Designer. You can select the
object on the drawing toolbar.
 Click [Draw] menu in the top menu of Xpanel Designer. You can select the object
on the sub menu.
Line
This tool is used to draw lines.
Instruction Click the left mouse button and drag the mouse to the line direction.
Example
You can put to use following methods when drawing line objects.
● You can draw horizontal/vertical lines during holding down the “Ctrl”
key.
● When you draw the object with right-click, the color is reversed from
the default.
6-29
Rectangle
This tool is used to draw rectangles or squares.
Instruction Click the left mouse button and drag it down to the right or left.
Example
You can put to use following methods when drawing rectangle objects.
● You can draw squares during holding down the “Ctrl” key.
the default.
Ellipse
This tool is used to draw circles or ellipses.
Instruction Click the left mouse button and drag it down to the right or left.
Example
You can put to use following methods when drawing circle objects.
● You can draw circles during holding down the “Ctrl” key.
the default.
6-30
Basic Object
Arc
This tool is used to draw arcs.
Instruction Click the left mouse button and drag it to make the arc.
Example
You can put to use following methods when drawing arc objects.
● You can draw arcs in 90 degrees during holding down the “Ctrl” key.
the default.
Sector
This tool is used to draw sectors.
Instruction Click the left mouse button and drag it to the right or left to make the sector.
Example
You can put to use following methods when drawing sector objects.
● You can draw circular sectors in 90 degrees during holding down the
“Ctrl” key.
the default.
6-31
Chord
This tool is used to draw chords.
Instruction Click the left mouse button and drag it to the right or left to make the chord.
Example
You can put to use following methods when drawing chord objects.
● You can draw sines during holding down the “Ctrl” key.
the default.
Polyline, Polygon
These line tools are used to draw polylines and polygons.
1. Click the left mouse button and create a starting point of a line.
2. Move the cursor to draw an imaginary line.
3. If you click the left mouse button once more when a desired line is completed, an
Instruction
imaginary line will be drawn.
4. Double-click the blank space where you want to finish the line.
5. In case of a polygon, the first vertex and the last vertex are linked automatically.
Example
You can put to use following methods when drawing polyline and
polygon objects.
the default.
6-32
Basic Object
Text
This tool is used to enter texts.
1. Click the left mouse button on a desired position.

2. Enter a text. If you press the Enter key, you can add a new line in the text.
Instruction
3. Click the blank space after you finished entering the text.
4. You can edit the text in the [Object Config] – [Text Editing].
Example
If the size of text object is smaller than text, the font size will be
automatically adjusted to the object size. When you resize the text object,
font size will be changed together.
6-33
6.3 Dynamic Tag
Point values from the external device or internal data values can be displayed in the
‘Dynamic tag’ object. The operator may assign the digit number or decimal point
number. Also, decimal numbers can be converted into hexadecimal numbers.
 This manual is based on Xpanel Designer 2. 52 Ver. Software. Note that

 If an object’s size is not large enough, the tag value displayed may not
be shown fully. Please set the size adequately until the entire tag value
can be displayed.
6.3.1 Settings
You can decide the format of tag value displayed in the graphic page. To bring up the
dynamic tag dialog box, select [Draw] - [Dynamic Tag] or icon and click the
background of page. You may reenter in the configuration by double-clicking a dynamic
tag object.
6-34
Dynamic Tag
Item Description
The tag value will be displayed by using its real address with BIT or WORD data.
Address
You can input the device address in the ‘Input Device Address’ dialog box.
Enter the tag name which will be displayed in the object. You can browse the tag
Tag Name
with button or manually input the tag name in the text field.
Displays an example of the tag value as currently selected tag name and display
Preview
option.
You can select a dynamic tag format to display on the screen.
Displays the tag value with specified number of digits. You can
assign the number from 0 to 255.
Digit Number
If the ‘Decimal Point’ option has been selected, digit number must
Display be bigger than the number of decimal point number for 2.
Option Decimal Point Displays the tag value with specified number of decimals.
Hexa-Decimal Displays the tag value with hexadecimal number.
Zero Filling Displays the first number of tag value as 0.
Use 1000
Use a comma to mark every three digits in a tag value.
Separator (,)
(1) Address
You can display the tag value with assigned real address. The following dialog box will
appear when you press button.
6-35
Item Description
Select the data type to be displayed in the tag value. This option is different
from the BIT/WORD selection in the previous step.
‘Digital’ option displays a tag value as 0 or 1.
‘Analog’ option displays a tag value with analogic data assigned to the device
Data Type
address. Values will follow the configuration in the ‘Analog Tag Option’ dialog
box.
‘String’ option displays a tag value with string data assigned to the device
address.
I/O Device Shows the list of I/O devices registered in the current project.
You can assign the device and address for the tag value.
Shows the list of usable devices according to the selected I/O
Device Type
Device Address
Enter the starting address of the device. The value you can
Address input may differ according to the data type (BIT/WORD), I/O
device and the device type.
keyboard.
This button will be enabled when the data type is selected as ‘Analog’.
Pressing the button will prompt a [Analog Tag Option].
Option
6-36
Dynamic Tag
types: UINT8, UINT16, UINT32, INT8, INT16, INT32,
Type
UBCD8, UBCD16, UBCD32, BCD8, BCD16, BCD32, Float .
UINT16 is the default type.
appear when the value exceeds the assigned range, and
the exceeded value will not be used.
Enter the value range which will be actually input to the
PLC.
Raw Data For example, if the raw data range is from 0 to 16000 and
This option calculates the PLC data and displays the result
to the Xpanel.
Scale

6-37
You can configure the Dynamic Tag object with basic control features such as [Visible],
[Blink], etc. To open the [Object Configuration] window, double-click the object or right-
click the object and select [Object Config] in the pop-up menu.
Item Description
Item Description
Style Composed of [Position/Size] and [Line/Fill] tabs.
Blink Blinks in a certain cycle according to the tag value.
Color Changes the color of the object according to the tag value.
EntryData Inputs data with data entry window when the object is pressed.
Tag Value Show the configuration window of the Dynamic Tag object.
※ Please refer to the ‘Object Configuration’ manual for more information.
6-38
Dynamic Tag
6.3.3 Exercise
Exercise : Displaying the tag value

In this exercise, you will establish a connection between CICON PLC simulator and
Xpanel. The point value will be displayed in the dynamic tag object.
a) Create a PLC project in the CICON software and add a scan program as shown
below. When M01 turns on, the value in D100 will increase.
b) In the Xpanel Designer, select [Tools]-[I/O Device] to bring up the ‘I/O device
configuration’ dialog box. Add a I/O device with Ethernet communication.
c) Select a device type for CIMON-PLC. In the station configuration, enter the IP
address of PC which Xpanel Designer has installed. The socket port number is fixed
at 10262.
6-39
d) Create an analog tag ‘D100’ and assign the tag type as a real tag. Select the I/O
device and input ‘D100’ in the I/O address.
e) Select [Draw]-[Dynamic Tag] or icon to add a dynamic tag object. Enter the
tag name as ‘D100’.
f) Download a scan program from the CICON software, and launch a Xpanel
Designer project in the Xpanel. You may see the value increases.
6-40
Date / Time
6.4 Date/Time
Date/Time object is used to check the system’s date and time during the project
operation. This object displays the time set in the device where the project is executed.
6.4.1 Settings
Select [Draw] – [Date/Time] or press icon then click on the page to bring up the
Item Description
Configures the display format of the date/time object.

Display Format You can select one from the following options: yy/mm/dd, hh:mm:ss and
yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss.
OK Saves the setting and adds the object to the page.
Cancel Cancels the object configuration.
6-41
You can configure the date/time object with basic control features such as [Visible],
[Blink], etc. .To open the [Object Configuration] window, double-click the object or right-
Item Description
Name Designate a name to the object. You cannot leave the object’s name blank.
Item Description
Style Composed of [Position/Size], [Declutter], [Line/Fill] tabs.
Blink Blinks in certain cycle according to the tag value.
Color Changes the color of object according to the tag value.
Date/Time Show the configuration window of the Date/Time object.
6-42
Date / Time
6.4.3 Exercise
Exercise : Displaying the Time in Project
a) Adds a date/time object on the following page. Select [Draw] – [Date/Time] then
click on the marked area on the page as shown below.
b) To display entire date and time, select yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss option. Press [OK]
button to finish the configuration.
6-43
c) Drag the object to adjust the location. Then drag the handles of the object to
change the size.
d) Double-click the object to bring up the [Object Configuration] window. You may
configure the transparency of the object. You can also change the appearance of
the object by using the font tool, etc.
a) Write the project to Xpanel or execute simulator to check the operation. You will
find that the device’s system time is displayed on the project.
6-44
Key Input Window
6.5 Key Input Window
The key input window is used to get a numeric or string value by using keyboard. The
operator can determine the displayed digit number. Also, the object can be enabled
when meets the input condition. The user can make self-defined data input window by
locating the object in the keypad page.

6.5.1 Settings
To bring up the ‘Key input window’ dialog box, click [Draw]-[Key Input] or icon and
click the background of page.
6-45
Item Description
Assign the address or tag name to get values from key input window object.
The object will be input by using its real address with BIT or
Input Tag / Address WORD data. You can input the device address in the ‘Input
Address Device Address’ dialog box.
Enter the tag name to input the value via object. You can assign
Tag
an analog tag, digital tag, and string tag.
Executes the command in the text field when end-code has input. You can
Executive browse the address or tag name.
Command by You can assign a priority of the command expression used for
End-Code Priority the key input. The priority can be assigned from 0 (the lowest
priority) to 10 (the highest priority).
You may assign the background and line color. You can choose the color
Color Setting
from 90 colors.
Size / Position
You may assign the position and size of the object.
Setting
Displays the value with specified number of digits. You can assign the
Digit Number
number from 0 to 255. ‘0’ indicates no limitation for the digit number.
Decimal Point Displays the value with specified number of decimals.
Enter the hexadecimal code for ending key input. ‘0D’ means the ‘Enter’ key
End-Code
and is specified by default. The end-code follows the virtual key code.
Display Encryption The data is displayed as ‘****’.
Use 1000
Use a comma to mark every three digits in a tag value.
Separator (,)
Show Keyboard Displays the virtual keyboard when double-clicking the object. This option
on Dbl Click can be used when the keyboard device is missing.
Clear Window by If the data input exceeds the maximum digit length, earlier input will be
Overflow deleted and the new value is entered.
Auto Update on
Updates continuously for the current value of the tag.
Data
Remove Outer
Selects whether or not to show border line of the key input window object.
Border
Using Max / Min
Assigns the maximum and minimum values for the analog tag.
Value
6-46
Key Input Window
Assign the action when the end-code has been entered.

The cursor may disappear from the key input window.
Remove Pointer
To reenter the value, you must click the object.
When the value is entered, the previous content will
Delete Content
‘End-Code’ be erased.
Process When using multiple of key input objects, this option
allows you to move to the next key input window
Move to Next
object according to the input order. If same input
Input
order has assigned, the focus will move into the oldest
object.
Assign the input condition of key input window object.
Sets the input order for each key input window. You
Order of Enter
can assign the order from 1 to 100.
Enter the tag name or operation to enable the key
Use Enable
input. If the condition is not satisfied, you cannot enter
Enable Condition Condition
the data in the object.
Move Focus to
When the The focus will move to the object when the condition
Condition is is satisfied.
Satisfied
6-47
6.5.2 Related Feature
You can design the data entry screen by using keypad page. To configure the keypad
page settings, select ‘Open Keypad Page’ option under the ‘Touch’ feature in object
configuration.
 When using the ‘Open Keypad Page’ action, the target keypad page
must contain one or more key input object.
 In the tag registration of the keypad input window, the tag is ignored
when it is operated by the keypad. Note that the tag assigned in the
touch object for ‘Open keypad page’ action gets input value.
 If you add the key input object in the popup page, the shortcut keys of
※ Please refer to the ‘Object Configuration’ manual for more information about ‘Open
Keypad Page’ action.
6-48
Key Input Window
6.5.3 Exercise
Exercise: Making a keypad by using key input window object

In this exercise, you will register a key input object in the keypad page and design a
keypad yourself.
a) Create an analog tag ‘VALUE’ in the database.
b) Create a keypad page. Select [Draw]-[Key Input Window] or icon and insert
the object in the keypad page.
6-49
c) Draw touch objects in the keypad object as shown below.
d) Select the action as ‘Key Input’ and specify key types for each object.
6-50
Key Input Window
e) Create a touch object that opens the keypad page. Select the action as ‘Open
Keypad Page’ and enter the tag name ‘VALUE’ in the text field.
f) Launch the project in the Xpanel or Simulator. Open the keypad page by clicking
touch object in the main page. You may input the numeric data to change the tag
value.
6-51
6.6 Page Link
The function or touch objects commonly used in several screens can be called out on the
particular screen. This screen can be displayed on another screen with ‘Page link’ object.
The operator can show or hide the object’s appearance by changing tag value. The
location of object can be moved by manipulating its coordinates.

 Large amount of page link objects can cause a delay in the
performance. Please avoid inserting amount of objects in the graphic
page for smooth operation.
6.6.1 Settings
To open the object configuration window, press [Draw]-[Pagelink] or icon and click
the background of graphic page.
6-52
Page Link
Item Description
Name Enter the name of object. The name is designated as ‘PageLink’ by default.
Displays the page link object according to the ‘Page Control’ settings.
Controls On/Off for the screen specified in the number and
Specified Screen
name of the ‘Page control setting’. ‘Action Setting’
Control
configuration is enabled.
Page Ctrl Depending on the value of the analog tag or address
Specify by Tag
specified in the ‘Page select tag’, you can dynamically change
Values
the screen to be displayed in the runtime.
Always Display Always displays the screen specified in the number and name
Specified Screen of the ‘Page control setting’.
Displays the page link object set in the ‘Page Control’ according to the
configuration.
Select the page type to display in the page link object. You
Page Type
may choose normal page or popup page.
It indicates the page number to be displayed. When selected
as ‘Specified Screen Control’ or ‘Always Display Specified
Page Ctrl.
Number Screen’, it shows the screen on Xpanel runtime. Note that
Setting
you cannot call out (creating a page link object) the same
screen with the current screen.
Name Shows the name of page assigned by the ‘Number’.
When selected as ‘Specify by Tag Values’, it specifies the
Page Select Tag analog tag or address to control the number to be displayed
on the page link object.
When selected as ‘Specified Screen Control’, the page link object shows or hides
the page screen according to the tag value.
Action Depending on the control tag value, the object will be
Action Type
Setting shown or hidden.
Decides to control On/Off of the page link object. You may
Control Tag
enter the digital or analog tag.
6-53
These are the coordinates of the upper left corner of page link object displayed in
the graphic page.
‘Specified Screen
Control’, ‘Always The page link object will be displayed in the assigned
Display Specified coordinates.
Position
Screen’
Setting
When you are not using ‘Use coordinate control’ option, the
‘Specify by Tag
position will be decided by coordinates. Otherwise, the
Values’
position will be decided by tag values of ‘Page X/Y Pos.’
This option will be enabled when using ‘Use coordinate
Page X/Y Pos.
control’ option. You can only use the analog tag.
Determines whether to display the background of target page screen during the
Show runtime. If you deselect the ‘Show background’ option, the background is
Background transparent and only the shapes and objects of the target page will be shown. This
option cannot be used with ‘Display Overlapped Objects in Reversal Colors’ option.
Page
This option enables to preview what the page link screen actually looks like before
Preview
it is called out to the current page.
Mode
When two page link objects are located in the same position on a screen, the
upper page link screen (Base 3) blocks and covers the lower page link screen (Base
2). If there is a need to differentiate two page link screens even when they are
Display
overlapped, you can use this option to indicate the overlapping area with reversal
Overlapped
colors.
Objects in
Reversal
Colors
6-54
Page Link
 You may bring up the linked page by clicking icon in upper left side of
page link object.
 You can call out a page link screen on another page link screen up to
5 layers (levels) in Xpanel Designer and Xpanel runtime. For instance,
Base 1 calls out Base 2, Base 2 calls out Base 3 and so on.
E.g.) when the configuration is set as Base 1 - Base 2 - Base 3 - Base 4
- Base 5 - Base 6 - Base 7, with respect to Base 1 being the basis, Base
2 becomes Level 1, Base 3 becomes Level 2 … Base 6 becomes Level
5. The page link screen beyond Level 5 will not be displayed in Xpanel
Designer and Xpanel runtime. Base 7 can be configured on the ‘Page
Link’ setting but will not be displayed.
 You are recommended to use ‘Save All’ command ( ) when you
save page link objects in multiple layers.
6-55
 If the security level is set on the target page, page link object will be
operated only when the security condition is satisfied.
 You cannot use page link object in the screen where frame has been
configured.
 Be sure to note below points as using ‘Display Overlapped Objects in
Reversal Colors’ option.
1. The original color of object in the page link will be shown upon black
background. The color will be reversed on the background with other
colors.
2. Black color in basic objects (Line, rectangle, ellipse, etc.) will not be
shown.
3. If same colors are overlapped, the overlapped section will be
transparent.
When two objects are called out on the same position, the page link
screen will be displayed as shown below;
4. When there’s need to create a basic object without border line, you
are recommended to set as ‘No Line’ rather than filling the object as line
color.
6-56
Page Link
6.6.2 Exercise
Exercise : Changing the screen with page link object

a) Create an analog tag ‘SCREEN’, and specify the initial value as 1. The minimum and
maximum value may assigned from 1 to 3.
b) Create three popup pages and adjust their sizes for using page link object.
6-57
c) In popup page 1, you may see temperatures and fire elapsed time of each floor.
Alarms are displayed in the alarm summary object.
d) In popup page 2, you may check actions of fire and sprinklers.
6-58
Page Link
e) In popup page 3, temperatures of each floor will be shown in the trend. You may
check occurred alarms in the alarm summary object.
f) Click [Draw] – [Pagelink] to configure a page link object in the main screen. Select
‘Specify by Tag Values’ for page control and choose page type as ‘popup page’.
Assign the page select tag as ‘SCREEN’.
6-59
g) Create touch objects which change value of ‘SCREEN’ tag.
Function Touch
Action Command expression
Command SCREEN = SCREEN – 1
Function Touch
Action Command expression
Command SCREEN = SCREEN + 1
h) Launch the project in the Xpanel or simulator. When you click touch objects, the
page link screen will be displayed according to the tag value.
6-60
Switch / Lamp
6.7 Switch/Lamp
Xpanel Desinger offers various shaped switches and lamps. The On/Off state can be
described by a single object. You can also decide the operation of switch/lamp object
under a certain condition. Lamp object allows the configuration of up to 265 operations
in a single object. Different contents are displayed on the object according to the state of
the tag. These contents can be manually entered or brought up from the string table.

6.7.1 Settings
To open the ‘Switch/Lamp’ dialog box, press [Draw]-[Switch/Lamp] or icon and

click the background of page.
6-61
Shape Configuration
On the left side of the configuration window, you can setup the appearance and position
of the switch/lamp object. You can choose the shape of the switch/lamp object and
configure its size and position.
Item Description
Shape
You may decide a shape of the Switch/Lamp object.
Select
Hides the shape of the object. It is marked with dotted lines in the editor but the
No Shape
lines are not shown in the project runtime.
Decides the position of the object. You can assign values from 0 to 32767. X/Y
Position
Position indicates the coordinate of the graphic page. When you manually setup the
Setting
position, be cautious that the object does not exceed the page.
Decides the size of the object. You can assign values from 0 to 32767. The size is
Size Setting based on the default size of the shape you have selected. When you manually setup
the size, be cautious that the object does not exceed the page.
6-62
Switch / Lamp
(1) Shape Select
When the lamp feature is disabled, only the switch shape will be selected. When the
lamp feature is enabled, you can select images to indicate each status.
Item Description
Images provided by Xpanel Designer are listed here. You can select the
Part Palette
categories from the combo box.
Displays each pattern of switch/lamp operation. You can apply the shape by
Pattern
double-clicking the item.
You can create a new switch/lamp image. Enter the file name(*.ipx) and press
New Palette
‘Save’ button to create a part file.
Registers each pattern of switch/lamp operation. You can use bmp, jpg and png
Register
file format, from state 0 to state 16.
Deletes the selected switch/lamp image from the list. Note that you cannot
Delete
delete the default images which provided by Xpanel Designer.
OK Applies the switch/lamp image with settings.
Cancel Closes the ‘Shape Select’ dialog box without configuration.
6-63
Switch Feature
In this section, you can configure function when the object is pressed in project runtime.
The Switch functionality has operations such as bit switch, word switch, page switch and
switch with special functions. You may check the operation order from the list.
Item Description
Decides to use the object as switch function. When the option is deselected,
Switch Function
the object can only be used as lamp function.
Display Touch If the option is selected, the object will be displayed with its reversed color
Highlight when touched.
Touch Down Add the operation you wish to execute when pressing the button.
Touch Up Add the operation you wish to execute when releasing the button.
Bit Switch Defines a digital tag operation.
Word Switch Defines an analog tag operation.
Page Assigns the page to open by using the object.
Assigns the command, key input, or writing momentary value function to the
Special Function
object.
Edit Edits the selected operation of the switch.
Delete Removes the selected operation from the switch.
6-64
Switch / Lamp
(1) Bit Switch
Item Description
Controls the object with the address of the device registered in I/O Device. You
Address can decide the unit of the data: BIT or WORD. The detailed configuration can
be done by pressing the button.
Enter the tag name to change the value when the switch is pressed. You can
Tag Name manually enter the tag name or press button to browse the tag.
Do not enter the analog or string tag name.
Defines the action when the switch is pressed.
Set Sets the digital tag value as ON(1).
Function Reset Sets the digital tag value as OFF(0).
Reverses the state of the digital tag when it is pressed.

Toggle
(OFF(0) → ON(1) or ON(1) → OFF(0))
6-65
(2) Word Switch
Item Description
Defines an analog tag operation.

Write Analog Value Writes the assigned value to the corresponding tag.
Action
The tag value will be calculated based on the set value and
Tag Operation
operator.
Controls the object with the address of the device registered in I/O Device. You can
Address decide the unit of the data: BIT or WORD. The detailed configuration can be done
by pressing the button.
Enter the tag name to change the value when the switch is pressed. You can
Tag Name manually enter the tag name or press button to browse the tag.
Do not enter the digital or string tag name.
Assign a tag value to write when the switch is pressed.
Hexa Writes the value in hexadecimal in the input field.
When you select the option, the input field is changed into the tag
Value registering field. You can manually enter the tag name or browse the
Using Tag tag by clicking icon. You can add a digital or an analog tag.
When switch/lamp object operates, the tag value assigned to [Tag
Name] becomes the value assigned to [Use Tag].
This item appears when you have selected Tag Operation. The operators you can use
Operator
are [+, -, AND, OR, XOR].
6-66
Switch / Lamp
(3) Page Switch
Item Description
Assign the page to open when pressing the switch.

Enter the page file name in the text field to open. You may
General Page
Page Type browse the page file by pressing button.
Enter the keypad page file name in the text field to open. You
Keypad Page
may browse the keypad page file by pressing button.
Assign the keypad page to open when pressing the switch.
Gets the value with the address of the device registered in I/O
Device. You can decide the unit of the data: BIT or WORD. The
Address
detailed configuration can be done by pressing the
button.
Enter the tag name to get the value when the switch is
Open Keypad Tag Name pressed. You can manually enter the tag name or press
Page button to browse the tag.
Assign the location where the keypad page will be opened at
Horizontal /
‘V Scale’ and ‘H Scale’. It is recommended to enter the value less
Vertical
than the Xpanel’s resolution.
You can select the ‘Use Max/Min’ option to assign the range of
Max / Min value. If the option is deselected, the minimum and the
maximum value is same as those of the tag’s.
6-67
(4) Special Function
Item Description
Command You can write a command expression to execute.

Operates as a key of keyboard. Supports 83 keys in total, such as Arrow keys,
HOME, END, PAGE UP/DOWN, INSERT, DELETE, LOCK Keys, Alphabets,
Key Input
Numbers, ENTER, SPACE, ESC, PRINT SCREEN, PAUSE, F1~F12, TAB, “/”, “*”,
“-“, “+”, “.”, CLEAR.
Writes an instant value when you touch or release the object.
Down – Written
Write Inputs a value when you touch the object.
Value
Momentary
Up – Written
Inputs a value when you release the object.
Value
6-68
Switch / Lamp
Switch Common
This section explains about the conditions when the user touches the switch/lamp object.
You can also set the security level on the object.
Item Description
Logical operations can be used to control touch features. When the

Touch Condition
result of a logical operation is True, the touch feature operates;
Setting
otherwise it doesn't.
Sets an delay option that executes by a second. This option will be
executed only when the button is pressed and held down for assigned
value. The value you can assign is from 1 to 30 seconds.
When touching the object in set amount of time, the
assigned action set in ‘Touch down’ would run. If
untouched before reach the amount time, the object

On Delay
would not operate. ‘On Delay’ is usable for ‘Touch
Action Delay Setting down’ action. ‘Touch up’ action operates with no
relation to On delay.
The assigned action would operate when releasing

Off Delay the object after amount time(Delay time). ‘Off Delay’
is usable for ‘Touch down’ or ‘Touch up’ action.
The assigned action would operate when touching
Double Touch the object and retouch in intervals. ‘Double Touch’ is
usable for ‘Touch down’ or ‘Touch up’ action.
6-69
Sets a security level on the object. (1-10)

Security Setting ※ Please refer to the ‘Security’ manual for more information about
security level.
Lamp Feature
Lamp feature shows the appearance of object based on a condition. If lamp feature is
disabled, the object will only display switch image.
Item Description
Decides the enablement of the lamp feature and type of the lamp.
Digital Operates by combination of digital tags. Lamp state is changed
Enable Lamp Tag according to data value or bit combination.
Analog
Changes the lamp state by tag value or bit combinations.
Tag
Number of
Assigns the number of states to display lamp object.
States
Condition of
Changes the lamp state with two methods.
State
6-70
Switch / Lamp
(1) Changing states with bit lamp
Item Description
Each digital tag composes each digit of the binary number. The state of data is
defined according to the combination of each digit.
With Data
Condition
Conversion
E.g.) If DIGITAL1 = 0, DIGITAL2 = 1, DIGITAL3 = 1 and DIGITAL4 = 0, they indicate

0110 in binary. Since it is equal to “6” in decimal, the ‘State 6” is displayed.
You can use maximum 16 states with this option.
Each digital tag represents a single state. If all digital tags’ values are “0”, “State 0”
will be displayed. If the DIGITAL4 = 1, the “State 4” will be displayed. When
At Each Bit
multiple tags are set as “1”, the priority goes to the state with the lower number.
Conversion
E.g.) If DIGITAL1 = 1, DIGITAL3 = 1, “State 1” will be displayed.
You can use maximum 5 states with this option.
6-71
(2) Changing states with word lamp
Item Description
With Data
Condition Displays the state with a single analog tag. Maximum 256 states can be displayed.
Conversion
Since an analog is composed of a word, it is possible to display the states with 16
bits. It indicates that a word can display 17 states. Only one bit has to be turned
ON at a time. If any other bit is ON simultaneously, the priority goes to the less
significant bit.
At Each Bit
Conversion
E.g.) If the value of an analog tag is 3(0000 0000 0000 0011), State 1 and 2 are
supposed to be ON. However, since State 1 has higher priority, the State 1 is ON.
6-72
Switch / Lamp
Label
You can display a text on the object. The text may differ according to the tag’s state. User
can enter the text manually or retrieve the contents from the string table.
Item Description
Select a state of the tag (OFF or ON) when the label is displayed.
If you have configured multiple states on [Lamp Feature] tab, you can select a
state in the range as shown below.
With Data Condition

Max 16 states (0 ~ 15)
State Select Bit Lamp Conversion
At Each Bit Conversion Max 5 states (0 ~ 4)
With Data Condition

Word Max 256 states (0 ~ 255)
Conversion
Lamp
At Each Bit Conversion Max 17 states (0 ~ 16)
Direct The operator manually enters the text to be displayed on the

Input object. You can enter up to 30,000 characters.
Retrieve the string you have entered in the string table. You can
String set group and string No.
Input Type
Table ※ Please refer to the ‘String table’ manual for more information
about string table.
Configure the manually entered text’s properties, such as font
Font Set
type, font size, alignment and the slant.
6-73
Apply Label to
The current label setting will be applied to all states.
All State
Apply Font to
The current font setting will be applied to all states.
All state
6.7.2 Exercise
Exercise : Using Switch/Lamp object as ON/OFF button

a) Create a digital tag ‘SWITCH’ in the database.
b) Click [Draw]-[Switch/Lamp] or icon. Go to [Lamp] tab in the switch/lamp

configuration window.
6-74
Switch / Lamp
c) Check ‘Enable Lamp’ option and select the tag type as digital tag.
d) Assign the number of state as 2 and select the condition for ‘Change by Data Input’.
Enter the ‘SWITCH’ in the tag name 1.
e) Press [Shape Select] to assign the different images for each state of the switch
object.
6-75
f) Go to [Switch] tab. Select ‘Bit Switch’ function and enter the tag name ‘SWITCH’ in
the field. Add the toggle function as ‘Touch down’ action.
g) Launch the project in the Xpanel or simulator. When you press the switch/lamp
object, the image is reversed while SWITCH tag is toggled.
6-76
String Editor
6.8 String Editor
String editor constructs a number of string groups, and these are managed like tables.
Each group can be distinguished by group number. The strings defined in a group can be
referenced by index number. To display strings configured in the index group, you may
use the ‘String value’ object.
※ Please refer to the ‘String value manual’ for more information about string value object.

6.8.1 Settings
To bring up the string editor window, select [Tools]-[String Editor] or icon.
(1) Add String Group
Creates a new string group. When you click icon, a dialog box will appear as shown
below.
6-77
Item Description
Single Column Set a single column in an index. A single tag value can store an one string.
Set the multiple columns in an index. A single tag value can store up to 16
strings. This type is used to construct a multi-language table.
Multiple Column
※ Please refer to the ‘Multi-language Setup’ manual for more information
about multi-language table.
Assign a group number. The group number cannot be duplicated. You can
Group No.
assign from 0 to 32767.
(2) Delete String Group
Press icon to delete the string group. Strings stored in the group will be deleted
together.
(3) Add String
Press to add a string in the column. You may register a digital tag or an analog tag
to the group.
When the column is selected as ‘Single Column’, you can assign a single string to an each
tag value. When you use a digital tag, you can only assign 0 and 1. When you use an
analog tag, you can assign from -32768 to 32767. Strings in the single column can be
shown in the string value object.
6-78
String Editor
When the column is selected as ‘Multiple Column’, you can assign up to 16 columns
(0~15) to an each tag value. When the tag value changes, the corresponding column
number will be displayed. Strings in the multiple column can be shown in the multi string
object.
(4) Edit String
Edits the selected string by pressing icon or double-clicking the item. You may
change the value or string in the [Edit String] dialog box.
(5) Delete String
Deletes the selected string by pressing icon. You can select items by dragging with
the mouse at once.
6-79
(6) Column Property
This is used to assign different language and font type to each column. You can use this
command when ‘Use Multiple Language Table’ option has been selected in the ‘Multi-
language Setup’.
※ Please refer to the ‘Multi-language Setup’ manual for more information.
6.8.2 Related Features
In this section, you will find a function frequently used for string editor. Please refer to the
table below for applicable function.
Command Description
String Editor Function StringTable Gets a string data from string table.
StringTable Gets a string data from string table.

Function n = StringTable (“Group Number”, “String number in a group”)
Returns a string data from specified string group. A string tag must be used for
Description
the string data.
Returns the first string data in group number 1.
Example
StrTag = StringTable (1, 1)
6-80
String Editor
6.8.3 Exercise
Exercise : Showing string value according to analog value

Each water tank will display its status with the change of analog value. Strings may be
configured in the ‘String table’.
※ Please refer to the ‘String table’ manual for more information.
a) Create a new analoga tag and name it as ‘VALUE’.
b) Go to [Tools] – [String table] to configure the contents of string table. Add the
strings in the group 0.
 When ‘VALUE’ tag is equal to 0, ‘The water tank is empty.’ will be displayed.
 When ‘VALUE’ tag is equal to 1, ‘The water has been stored in the tank.’ will be
displayed.
 When ‘VALUE’ tag is equal to 2, ‘The water tank is full.’ will be displayed.
6-81
c) Select [Draw] – [String Value] and enter the tag name ‘VALUE’ in the text field.
Specify the string group as 0.
d) Select [Draw] – [Switch/Lamp] to create a word switch. Define the action as ‘Tag
operation’ to add 1 value to the ‘VALUE’ tag for every clicking.
6-82
String Editor
e) Launch the project in the Xpanel or simulator. You may see strings from string table
are switched as the value of tag is changed.
The string will not be displayed when there is no string configured in the
value of analog tag.
6-83
Exercise : Showing string value by using a string tag

Following is an example of displaying the data from string table by using a string tag.
a) Create a string tag ‘STR’ in the database.
b) Go to [Tools]-[String Editor] to configure the string table. Add a string in the first
index of group number 1.
c) Go to [Tools]-[Script] and write the script as shown below.
6-84
String Editor
d) Select [Draw] – [Dynamic Tag] and enter the tag name ‘STR’ in the text field.
e) Launch the project in the Xpanel or simulator. You may see a data of string table via
string tag value.
Data in the string tag can be stored up to 80 characters. You can set the
length of the string under the [Advanced] tab.
6-85
6.9 String Value
Strings configured in the ‘String Table’ can be displayed in the string value object. The
multiple of predefined strings are shown in a single object, and the contents will be
switched by digital or analog value.

 If an object’s size is not large enough, the string value displayed may not
be shown fully. Please set the size adequately until the entire string can
be displayed.
6.9.1 Settings
To bring up the ‘string value’ dialog box, select [Draw]-[String value] or icon and
click the background of graphic page. You may reenter in the configuration by double-
clicking a string value object.
Item Description
The string value will be displayed by using its real address with BIT or WORD
Address
data. You can input the device address in the ‘Input Device Address’ dialog box.
Enter the tag name which will be displayed in the object. You can browse the
Tag Name
tag with button or manually input the tag name in the text field.
Specify the group number where string value is defined. You can assign the
String Group string group up to 32767. When the tag value is changed, a string in the object
will be switched according to the tag value.
6-86
String Value
You can configure the String Value object with basic control features such as [Visible],
Item Description
Item Description
String Value Show the configuration window of the String value object.
6-87
6.9.3 Exercise
Exercise : Showing string value according to analog value

Each water tank will display its status with the change of analog value. Strings may be
configured in the ‘String table’.
a) Create a new analoga tag and name it as ‘VALUE’.
b) Go to [Tools] – [String table] to configure the contents of string table. Add the
strings in the group 0.
 When ‘VALUE’ tag is equal to 0, ‘The water tank is empty.’ will be displayed.
 When ‘VALUE’ tag is equal to 1, ‘The water has been stored in the tank.’ will be
displayed.
 When ‘VALUE’ tag is equal to 2, ‘The water tank is full.’ will be displayed.
6-88
String Value
c) Select [Draw] – [String Value] and enter the tag name ‘VALUE’ in the text field.
Specify the string group as 0.
d) Select [Draw] – [Switch/Lamp] to create a word switch. Define the action as ‘Tag
operation’ to add 1 value to the ‘VALUE’ tag for every clicking.
6-89
e) Launch the project in the Xpanel or simulator. You may see strings from string table
are switched as the value of tag is changed.
The string will not be displayed when there is no string configured in the
value of analog tag.
6-90
Multi-language Setup
6.10 Multi-language Setup
Using the multi-language table, multilingual feature supports virtually every language to
be displayed on the screen. Strings defined in the table can be referenced by index
number. Also, all the fonts provided by Windows can be used.
※ Please refer to the ‘String Editor’ manual for more information about string table.

6.10.1 Settings
To bring up the ‘Language Configuration’ dialog box, go to [Tools] – [Multi-language

Setup] or press ‘Language…’ button in the [Tools]-[Project].
6-91
Item Description
Select this option to use the ‘Multiple Column’ in the string editor. If the option
Use Multiple
is deselected, you can only use the contents of ‘Column 0’, regardless of the
Language Table
string table configuration.
Initial Value selected. The assigned value will display the corresponding column. You can
assign the value from 0 to 15.
selected. Assign the device address or tag to control the column number.
Controls the column with the address of the device registered in

I/O Device. You can decide the unit of the data: BIT or WORD.
Control Addr / Address
The detailed configuration can be done by pressing the
Tag
button.
Controls the column with the tag registered in the database. You
Tag can manually enter the tag name or press button to browse
the tag.
Specify properties used in the ‘Column Property’ of string editor.
Language
Name Enter the name to distinguish the language.
Option
Select the font type to display the corresponding language. You
(Lang. 0 ~ 9) Font
can use the fonts which you downloaded in the Xpanel Designer.
(1) Control Address
You can configure the details of the assigned device address for controlling column by
pressing the button.
6-92
Item Description
Select the data type to be used for the column control. This option is different
from the BIT, WORD selection in the [Language Configuration] window.
When you select ‘Digital’, you will control the column with 0 or 1. All values
exceeding 1 will be recognized as 1.
Data Type
When you select ‘Analog’, you will control the column with the value assigned
to the device address. The values from 0 to 15 will only be recognized. The
values exceeding 15 will be recognized as 15 or will follow the configuration in
the [Option] window.
Assign the device and address for the column control.
Device Type
Device Address Enter the starting address of the device. The value you can
input may differ according to the data type (BIT/WORD)
Address
selection from the [Language Configuration] window, the
selected I/O device and the device type.
You can use this keypad when you have to input the address
without a keyboard.
Enter the address in decimal or hexadecimal according to the device
Device Address
type.
Input Keypad
For example, if you assign an address in device X of CIMON-PLC, the
address must be assigned in hexadecimal. In case of the device D,
the address must be assigned in decimal.
The [Option] is activated when the ‘Analog’ option is selected.
Press the button to bring up the [Analog Tag Option] window as shown
below.
Option
6-93
types: UINT8, UINT16, UINT32, INT8, INT16, INT32, UBCD8,
Type
UBCD16, UBCD32, BCD8, BCD16, BCD32, Float . UINT16 is
the default type.
appear when the value exceeds the assigned range, and the
exceeded value will not be used.
Enter the value range which will be actually input to the PLC.
For example, if the raw data range is from 0 to 16000 and
Raw Data
This option calculates the PLC data and displays the
result to the Xpanel.
Scale

6-94
6.10.2 Setting Up the Multi-Language Table
(1) Multi-language Setup
a) Create an analog tag to control the column.
b) Go to [Tools]-[Multi-language Setup]. Check ‘Use Multi-language Table’ option and

assign the initial value as 0.
c) Enter the language name and select the font for each language installed in Xpanel
Designer.
6-95
(2) Setting the multi-language table
a) Go to [Tools] – [String Editor] and select ‘Multiple Column’ for adding a group.
b) Press ‘Add string’ and enter the each string at column fields in different languages.
Enter the same contents in a different language in the same string value.
c) Press ‘Column Properties’ and specify languages and fonts to each columns, which
are configured in step (1)-c).
6-96
d) To use a multiple language table, select [Draw]-[Multi string]. Select a string group
then choose the appropriate string value.
e) You can edit the contents of multi-language table by using Excel with copy and
paste commands.
If a column value contains the string beginning with operation symbols

such as “=+ABC”, Excel recognizes the string as a formula and cause a
formula error, displaying the value as “#NAME?”. When the value
“#NAME?” is pasted in Xpanel Designer, the column value will be written
as “#NAME?”.
If you edit the column using Excel, please beware of the column values
that start with arithmetic symbols.
6-97
6.10.3 Exercise
Exercise: Expressing contents of the page in different languages

You can use the multi-language table to express various elements of the page in
different languages. In this example the multi string object is used to express the simple
explanation for a flowmeter in Korean, English and Japanese.
※ Please refer to the ‘Multi String Object’ manual for more information about the multi
string object.
a) Create an analog tag ‘INDEX’ to assign the string index.
b) Go to [Tools]-[Multi-language Setup] and select ‘Use Multiple Language Table’

option. Enter the control tag name ‘INDEX’ in the text field, and assign the language
and font to display.
6-98
c) Go to [Tools]-[String Table] and select the group type as ‘Multiple Column’.
d) Press ‘Add String’ and enter the strings in the each column to display in the
multi string object. Write the same contents in a different language in the same
index. Korean, English and Japanese will be displayed according to the ‘INDEX’
value.
e) Press ‘Column Property’ and assign languages and fonts configured in the step
c).
6-99
f) Press [Draw]-[Multi String] to create a multi string object. Specify the group number
and string value.
g) Create three touch objects to change the value of ‘INDEX’ tag.
6-100
h) Launch the project in Xpanel or simulator. When you press each button, you will
find that different strings are displayed.
 When you press [KOR] button, the texts will be displayed in Korean.
 When you press [English] button, the texts will be displayed in English.
 When you press [Japanese] button, the texts will be displayed in Japanese.
6-101
6.11 Multi String
Strings configured in the multi-language table can be displayed in the multi string object.
The multiple of predefined strings are specified in a single object, and the contents will be
switched by digital or analog value.
※ Please refer to the ‘Multi-language Setup’ and ‘String Editor’ manual for more
information about multi-language editor.

6.11.1 Settings
To bring up the ‘Multi string’ dialog box, select [Draw]-[Multi String] or icon and
click the background of graphic page. You may reenter in the configuration by double-
clicking a multi string object.
Item Description
String Group Specify the number of string’s group.

String Value Specify the number of string’s index.
Displays an example of the string which is currently figured by the string
Preview
group and string value.
When the option has enabled, the font size changes automatically to fit
Font Auto Resizing the object size. If the option has deselected, only font size will change
yet retain the object size.
6-102
Multi String
You can configure the multi string object with basic control features such as [Visible],
Item Description
Item Description
Multi String Show the configuration window of the multi string object.
6-103
6.11.3 Exercise
Exercise: Expressing contents of the page in different languages

You can use the multi-language table to express various elements of the page in
different languages. In this example the multi string object is used to express the simple
explanation for a flowmeter in Korean, English and Japanese.
※ Please refer to the ‘Multi-language Setup’ and ‘String Editor’ manual for more
information about multi-language table.
a) Create an analog tag ‘INDEX’ to assign the string index.
b) Go to [Tools]-[Multi-language Setup] and select ‘Use Multiple Language Table’

option. Enter the control tag name ‘INDEX’ in the text field, and assign the language
and font to display.
6-104
Multi String
c) Go to [Tools]-[String Table] and select the group type as ‘Multiple Column’.
d) Press ‘Add String’ and enter the strings in the each column to display in the
multi string object. Write the same contents in a different language in the same
index. Korean, English and Japanese will be displayed according to the ‘INDEX’
value.
e) Press ‘Column Property’ and assign languages and fonts configured in the step
c).
6-105
f) Press [Draw]-[Multi String] to create a multi string object. Specify the group number
and string value.
g) Create three touch objects to change the value of ‘INDEX’ tag.
6-106
Multi String
h) Launch the project in Xpanel or simulator. When you press each button, you will
find that different strings are displayed.
 When you press [KOR] button, the texts will be displayed in Korean.
 When you press [English] button, the texts will be displayed in English.
 When you press [Japanese] button, the texts will be displayed in Japanese.
6-107
7 Graphic UtilizationⅡ
7.1 Library
Xpanel Designer provides prebuilt images by category, and it allows you to quickly and
easily design the graphic page. Images are sorted into several groups which are
categorized by product or field works. Numerous images such as valves, water tanks or
pipes are described as 3D style. You can also add unique libraries of your choice.

7.1.1 Settings
To bring up the library window, select [Draw]-[Library] or icon.
The categories are listed at the left side of the window. Each category contains series of
images, and they are listed at the right side of the window by group selection. You may
create a new group in the ‘Library Editor’.
7-1
Library
You may choose images directly from the library window and insert them into the
graphic page by double-clicking or drag-and-drop. You can also add an user-defined
object to the library by using ‘Library Editor’.
There are two different types of objects in the library. The ‘Library object’ does not have
any object properties.
The ‘Wizard object’ contains a single function for controlling project such as bit switch,
key input, data entry, etc. The wizard objects are marked with ‘(w)’ string in front of their
names as shown in the picture below.
※ Please refer to the ‘Library Editor’ for more information about library editor.
7-2
You can configure the library object with basic control features such as [Visible], [Blink],
etc. To open the [Object Configuration] window, double-click or right-click the object
and select [Object Config] in the pop-up menu.
This section only explains about image object configuration of library

object. Please note that wizard objects have different configuration. For
information about this, refer to manuals explaining each function.
Item Description
Item Description
7-3
Library
7.1.3 Exercise
Exercise : Inserting library objects into the page window

In this exercise, you will design the graphic page by adding library objects.
a) Click [Draw] – [Library] or icon to bring up the library window. Select the group
which contains images you wish to use.
b) Select an image on the right side of the window, and add the image into the
graphic page by double-clicking or drag-and-drop.
7-4
c) Adjust the image’s size or location appropriately.
 Large amount or size of images can cause a delay in the performance.

Please avoid inserting amount of images in the graphic page for
smooth operation.
 When downloading project to the Xpanel, ‘Using 256 Bitmap’ option in
‘Page properties’ lowers the quality of images and reduces page size
helping smooth operation.
7-5
Library Editor
7.2 Library Editor
‘Library Editor’ feature allows you to create a library object, by using graphic objects or
image objects. Once the object is added to the library, you can pick the object from the
library whenever necessary. With this feature, the user does not have to build additional
object again which contains same function. It is possible to remove the object which isn’t
used anymore.

7.2.1 Settings
To bring up the ‘User library editor’ window, select [Tools]-[User Library Edit]. Each
window will appear according to the object selection as shown below.
Item Description
Enter the group name to add to the library. Alternatively, you may select the
group name to delete from the library. You must assign a group name to add
the library object. If you wish to create a group, enter the unique name for the
Group Name
new group in the field. If you wish to add a library object to the existing group,
select the group name in the drop-down list. Then enter the object name in
the text field.
7-6
Enter the object name to add to the library. Alternatively, you may select the
object name to delete from the library.
Object Name
You must assign a group name. Duplicate object names are not allowed in the
same group.
Preview Displays an example of the library object as a thumbnail image.
Adds the object which the operator made in the graphic page. A single object
can be added to the library at a time. If you add the object which contains
Add functionality, the configuration is also applied to the library object. The library
object file is automatically named ‘GroupName.DAT’, and saved to the
following directory; C:\CIMON\”Xpanel Designer Version ENG”\UserLib
Removes the selected user library object from the library. There must not be
any selection in the graphic page.
Delete
Since the object file in the directory is also deleted, you are recommended to
back up the file before deletion of the library object.
Deletes the selected group from the library. Deleting the group will delete all of
Delete Group
the objects it contains.
Cancel Exit the ‘User library editor’ window.
7-7
Library Editor
7.2.2 Exercise
This section explains the basics of the feature. Please utilize the
feature according to your site environment.
Exercise : Adding or deleting the User Library Object

In this exercise, you will draw a graphic object and add or delete it on or from the library.
(1) Adding the library object
a) Draw a radio object by using graphic objects. Then group the objects to treat them
as a single object.
7-8
b) Select the radio and click [Tools] – [User Library Edit]. When the ‘Make Library’
window pops up, enter the group name and object name for radio.
c) Press [Add] button to add the radio object to the library. You may check the library
object in the ‘Library’ window.
7-9
Library Editor
(2) Deleting the library object
a) To delete the User Library object, click [Tools] – [User Library Edit] without selecting
the object.
b) You may delete the library object in two ways.
 Group Delete
When you delete a group, you will also delete the library objects stored in the group. To
delete a group and its objects, select the group from the drop-list then press [Delete
Group] button.
 Object Delete
You may delete the object which corresponds to ‘Object Name’. To delete a library
object, select the group from drop-down list and object name, then press [Delete]
button.
7-10
7.3 Animation Bitmap
Animation bitmap displays the movement of images according to tag value. Xpanel
Designer provides various animation objects, and this helps user to display the process
more efficiently.
※ Please refer to the ‘Animation Bitmap Editor’ manual for information about editing an
animation bitmap object.

 Large amount or size of animation objects can cause a delay in the
performance. Please avoid inserting amount of objects in the graphic
page for smooth operation.
7.3.1 Settings
To bring up the ‘Insert Animation Bitmap’, select [Edit] – [Insert Animation Bitmap].
7-11
Animation Bitmap
Item Description
Groups which containing animation objects are listed in the left side of the
Group Name window. If you select the group name, animation objects are listed in the
‘File Name’.
Animation objects which included in the selected group are listed on the
File Name right side of the window. Each animation bitmap is saved as ‘*.cmani’ file
(*.cmani) format, and stored in the following directory; “C:\CIMON\”Xpanel
Designer Version ENG”\AniLib”.
Displays an example of the library object as a thumbnail image. Object size

Preview
is shown under the preview image.
Removes the selected group from the library. Deleting the group will
delete all of the objects it contains.

Delete Group
Since the group folder in the directory is also deleted, you are
recommended to back up the file before deletion of the animation group.
Removes the selected object from the library.
Delete Animation Since the object file in the directory is also deleted, you are recommended
to back up the file before deletion of the animation object.
OK Adds the selected animation bitmap to the graphic page.

Cancel Exits the window without inserting the animation bitmap.
7-12
You can configure the animation bitmap object with basic control features such as
[Visible], [Blink], etc. To open the [Object Configuration] window, double-click or right-
Item Description
Item Description

Blink Blinks in the certain cycle according to the tag value.
Animate Bitmap Shows the configuration window of the animation bitmap object.
※ Please refer to ‘Object Configuration’ for more information.
7-13
Animation Bitmap
Item Description
You can assign an address or tag for controlling animation bitmap object
The animation object will be displayed by using its real address

Address with BIT or WORD data. You can input the device address in the
‘Input Device Address’ dialog box.
Action Tag Enter the tag name to control the performance of animation
bitmap object. You can assign an analog tag or a digital tag. If the
Tag tag value equals to ‘0’, the object is paused. If the tag value
exceeds ‘0’, the object operates according to the conditions of ‘Play
Count’.
Determines the number of play counts of the animation bitmap. The value can
be assigned from 0 to 32767.
0 The animation bitmap operates continuously.
Play Number
The animation bitmap operates once.
1 When you assign the count number greater ‘1’, the animation
bitmap operates as much as assigned number.
Determines the playing time for each frame in the animation bitmap. The
Play Interval
value can be assigned from 1 (100msec) to 32767 ( 3276700msec).
7-14
7.3.3 Exercise
Exercise : Playing animation bitmap object

Following example shows the conveyor which carries a box. The animation bitmap
object operates when the condition has been satisfied.
a) Create two tags, one for the digital tag and another for the analog tag.
b) Go to [Edit]-[Insert Animation Bitmap] and select the conveyor object. Insert 2

objects in the graphic page.
7-15
Animation Bitmap
c) Define each object configuration of conveyor objects as shown below.
d) Click [Arrange]-[Horizontal Flip] to connect conveyors as a single object.
e) Go to [Draw]-[Library] and insert a box object in the graphic page. Set the object
size as 60 x 60.
7-16
f) Set the ‘Horizontal move’ function in the [Object Configuration]. Enter the tag
name ‘BOX’ in the field, and assign the data range from 0 to 30.
g) Set the base position as ‘Left’ under the [Horizontal Move] tab. Assign the distance
as 380.
h) Create a period script in the [Tools]-[Script]. Write a script like “script” as shown
below.
7-17
Animation Bitmap
i) Go to [Draw]-[Switch/Lamp] and create a bit switch.
j) Launch the project in the Xpanel or simulator. When the digital tag has been
turned ON, the conveyor object operates. The box object moves from left to right
side for 30 seconds. When ‘BOX’ tag value became 30, the analog value will be
reset to the 0.
7-18
7.4 Animation Editor
Xpanel Designer provides the editor which allows the operator to create or modify an
animation bitmap object. External images such as BMP, JPG, and PNG files can be
customized as an animation bitmap. The editor includes the preview in a small display,
and this helps the user to generate an animation bitmap as desired appearance.

7.4.1 Settings
To bring up the animation editor window, double-click the ‘Animation Editor’ in the
project workspace or click the [Tools]-[Animation Editor].
7-19
Animation Bitmap Editor
Item Description
Group Represents the group name of current animation bitmap.
Name Represents the name of current animation bitmap.
Initializes the change to create a new animation bitmap. When there is a
change, a message box asking you to confirm the save will appear.
New
Animation bitmap object is automatically saved in the following path;
“C:\CIMON\”Xpanel Designer Version ENG”\AniLib”.
Yes Saves the changes and initialize the editor.

No Initializes the editor without saving modifications.
Cancel Goes back to the editor window without initializing.
You may select and open an animation bitmap for editing. Each animation
bitmap is saved as ‘*.cmani’ file format, and stored in the following directory;
“C:\CIMON\”Xpanel Designer Version ENG”\AniLib”
Group Represents the group name of animation bitmap.

Open File Name Represents the name of animation bitmap.
Enter a Group Enter the group name of animation bitmap to modify.
name Alternatively, you may select the group name.
Enter a File Enter the file name of animation bitmap to modify.
name Alternatively, you may select the file name.
Saves the currently editing file.
Save If you enter the same name with an existing file, the file will be overwritten by
new animation bitmap.
You can save the animation bitmap with a new group and file name. The
Save as animation bitmap is saved as ‘*.cmani’ file format, and stored in the following
directory; “C:\CIMON\”Xpanel Designer Version ENG”\AniLib”.
You can add a new image to the animation bitmap. The image is added at the
Add Frame
end of the frame. The editor supports the BMP, JPG, and PNG file formats.
Insert Frame Inserts a new frame in front of the selected image of animation bitmap.
Delete Frame Deletes the selected frame from the images of animation bitmap.
7-20
Change Replaces the selected image with a new image. You may import the image from
Bitmap the desired path.
Forward Moves the selected frame to the forward sequence.
Backward Moves the selected frame to the backward sequence.
You can simulate the current editing animation bitmap by assigning frame
display time. A ‘Simulation’ dialog box appears when you press the button. The
simulation operates when picture is inserted more than 2 frames. The actual
speed of the animation bitmap is 100msec.
Simulation
Close Closes the ‘Simulation’ dialog box.

Pauses the simulation. You can enter the value to change the
Stop play interval. The value can be assigned from 1msec to
32767 msec.
Run Starts the simulation.
Closes the editor window. When there is a change, a message box asking you to
confirm the save will appear.
Quit
Yes Saves the changes and closes the editor.

No Closes the editor without saving modifications.
Cancel Goes back to the page window without saving.
7-21
Animation Bitmap Editor
7.4.2 Exercise
Exercise : Generating an animation bitmap object

In this section, you will create a new animation bitmap object through the animation
editor.
a) Click [Tools] – [Animation Editor] to bring up the ‘Animation editor’ window. Press
[Add frame] button and insert images to make an animation bitmap.
b) Press [Simulation] to confirm the operation of animation bitmap. You can assign
the play interval time from 1msec to 32767msec. Note that the actual speed of
animation bitmap object is configured as 100msec in default.
7-22
c) Press [Save] to store the animation bitmap file in the desired path. If you wish to
add the object to the existing group, select the group name from the group list. If
you wish to add the object to the new group, Enter the group name in the field.
d) You can insert the animation bitmap in the project by using ‘Insert Animation
Bitmap’.
※ Please refer to the ‘Animation Bitmap’ manual for more information about animation
bitmap object.
7-23
Image Embedding
7.5 Image Embedding
In the Xpanel Designer, the user can import the image from external folder and treat it as
an object. Multiple of image formats such as BMP and JPG file types can be used in the
project.

 BMP files have a relatively large file size. Please notice that overusing of
BMP files can cause a delay in the process. When you insert the image,
you are recommended to use JPG file types rather than a BMP file.
 Large amount or size of images can cause a delay in the performance.
Please avoid inserting amount of images in the graphic page for
smooth operation.
7.5.1 Settings
To insert an image file into the graphic page, select [Edit] - [Insert Graphic File]. You can
select the image file in the file browser window.
7-24
You can configure the image object with basic control features such as [Visible], [Blink],
etc. To open the [Object Configuration] window, double-click or right-click the object
and select [Object Config] in the pop-up menu.
Item Description
Item Description

Blink Blinks in the certain cycle according to the tag value.
7-25
Image Embedding
7.5.2 Exercise
Exercise 1 : Setting the background image by using Image Embedding

Following is an example of setting the background image of the project. You will import
an image from the external directory.
a) Select [Edit] – [Insert Graphic File] and the file browser will appear. Select an image
you wish to insert and press [Open] button. The image will be placed on the
graphic page.
b) Resize the image and page appropriately, then select [Arrange] – [Make Symbol].
The image is set as a background of the page.
7-26
c) To replace or edit the background image, select [Arrange] – [Break Symbol]. The
handles will appear around the image. You may resize or replace the image object.
7-27
Image Embedding
Exercise 2 : Grouping multiple image objects

In this section, you will add multiple images to the page and attribute a ‘Vertical Move’
function.
a) Create an analog tag in the database. Enter the tag name as ‘SEC’.
b) Select [Edit] – [Insert Graphic File] to import images from the desired folder. In this
example, each of embedded images represents the air balloon and a human.
7-28
c) Resize both images appropriately and drag the cursor over them. Group two
images into a single object.
d) Go to [Object Config] window and click [V-Move] feature. Enter the tag name as
‘SEC’ in the field and assign the data range from 0 to 60.
7-29
Image Embedding
e) Under the [Vertical Move] tab, select the base position as bottom and assign the
distance as 500.
f) Create a period script in the [Tools]-[Script]. Write a script like “Move” as shown
below. The value of ‘SEC’ increases 3 every second. When ‘SEC’ tag became 60, the
value will be reset to the 0.
7-30
g) Launch the project in the Xpanel or simulator. The air balloon object will rise for 20
seconds.
7-31
Security
8 Security
The Security feature distributes the authority to users. Securing the system means that
the administrator gives different authority to different people. To accommodate the
different needs, Xpanel Designer includes various security options.
The first step to the Security configuration is registration of a user account and the
password. The next step is to assign security level to each account. These configurations
let only verified users to control the specific functions.
8.1 Features
 The security level allows the detailed discrimination in authority.

 You can configure a script action when a user logs in or out.
8.2 Settings
You can bring up the [Security Configuration] window by selecting [Tools] – [Security] or
double-clicking the ‘Security’ on the project workspace.
8-1
(1) Security Configuration
Item Description
ID Displays the user’s ID.
Desc Displays the description of the corresponding user.
Level Displays the user’s security level.
Log On Action Displays the log on action of the corresponding user.
Log Off Action Displays the log off action of the corresponding user.
New User Adds a new user to the list.
Delete Deletes the selected user from the list.
Edit Edits the selected user.
(2) New User
Item Description
User ID Enter an ID to distinguish the user. You can enter up to 15 characters.

Assign a security level for the current user. You can assign from 0 (the
Level
lowest level) to 10 (the highest level).
Password
Enter a password for the current user. You can only enter the numeric
characters.
Description Enter a description of the user.
8-2
Security
Enter a command expression which will be executed when the user logs
Log On Action
on. You can use address or tags by pressing the [Addr] or [Tag] button.
Enter a command expression which will be executed when the user logs
Log Off Action
off. You can use address or tags by pressing the [Addr] or [Tag] button.
You can assign a priroty of the command expression used for the Log
Script priority On/Off Action. The priority can be assigned from 0 (the lowest priority) to
10 (the highest priority).
When there are several user IDs in the project, only one account can log in
to the system. If another user logs in to the project, the current user ID
automatically logs out.
8-3
8.3 Related Features

3
In this section, you can find functions and subroutines frequently user for ‘Security’
feature. Please refer to the table below for applicble functions/subroutines.
All commands must be used with brackets.
Command Description
Subroutine LogOn Logs on with the user information.

Subroutine LogOff Logs out the current user.
Security
Subroutine LogOnWin Brings up the User Log On window.
Function GetSecurity Returns the current security level.
3
Subroutine operates a certain action without any value returned, unlike the functions have return value.
8-4
Security
8.3.1 Functions for Security
LogOn Logs on with the user information.
Subroutine LogOn(“UserID”,”Password”)
Logs on with the user ID and password which is registered in the ‘Security’. If
the wrong information is used, the message will pop up as shown below.
Description
Logs on with the user ID “CIMON”, password “0000”.

Example
LogOn(“CIMON”,”0000”)
LogOff Logs out the current user.

Subroutine LogOff()
Description Logs out the current user.
Logs out the current user.

Example
LogOff()
8-5
LogOnWin Brings up the User Log On window.
Subroutine LogOnWin()
Brings up the User Log On window on Xpanel. If there is no registered user in

the project, the window will not appear.
Description
Select a user and enter the password.
If you enter a wrong password, the message will pop up as shown below.
Brings up the User Log On window.

Example
LogOnWin()
GetSecurity Returns the current security level.
Function n=GetSecurity()
Description Returns the current security level and store the value to the variable.
Stores the current security level to the variable “Slevel”.

Var Slevel;;
Example
……
Slevel = GetSecurity();
8-6
Security
8.4 Exercise
Exercise : User Login and Access to the Object

In this example, you will add a user to the project and assign a security level. Then, you
will configure the accessibility of the control functions in Xpanel project.
(1) Adding a user
a) [Go to [Tools] – [Security] and select the [New User] button to bring up the [Security
Properties] window.
b) Set the user ID as ‘A’ and the password as ‘1234’. Set the user’s security level as 8.
8-7
c) Press [OK] then you will find that the new user is added to the list.
(2) Configuring Objects with Security Level
a) Create an analog tag named “RUN” in the database.
b) Select [Draw] – [Tag Value] and add the object to the graphic page. Then assign
‘RUN’ tag to the object as shown below.
8-8
Security
c) Create an object to write value at ‘RUN’ tag. Label the object with text object “Level
10” and set the action as “Write Tag Value”. Enter 10 at the “Write Value” field.
d) Go to [Security] tab and set the Security Level as 10.
8-9
e) Create another object to write value at ‘RUN’ tag. Label the object with text object
“Level 5” and set the action as “Write Tag Value”. Enter 5 at the “Write Value” field.
f) Go to [Security] tab and set the Security Level as 5.
8-10
Security
g) Create an object as shown below to log on after the project execution.
a) Execute the project with Xpanel or run the simulator. Press the ‘LogOn’ object and
then press ‘Level 10’ object. Since the user’s security level is 8, you cannot operate
the object and the following message will appear.
8-11
b) When you press the ‘level 5’ object, the value will be written to the tag value object
since the user’s security level is higher than the object’s.
8-12
Data Logging
9 Data Logging
Data Logging is a feature which saves the historical data as a file. This functionality may
collect the data from analog and digital tags in the internal storage of Xpanel which is
called ‘Block’. The log file can be converted into csv file and used as the data for Scope
Trend object.
To use Data Logging functionality, there must be data logging model and
the registered tags in the model.
9.1 Features
 Creates the blocks according to the user’s configuration.

 The tag value can be collected in real-time according to the interval, and can be
saved as a file or displayed on the object.
 You can efficiently manage the storage space by collecting the data only when
the tag value changes.
 The collected data can be stored in the internal storage of Xpanel according to
the block configuration.
 You can use command expressions to save the data blocks as a CSV file or edit
the data.
9-1
9.2 Model Configuration
Double-click the [Data Logging] on the Project Workspace or select [Tools] – [Data
Logging] to bring up the configuration window as shown below. You can add or edit
the model after the configuration by pressing [Add] or [Edit] button. You can delete the
selected model.
9-2
Data Logging
(1) Start Option
Idtem Description
Enter the name of the Data Logging model. You may use alphanumeric
Logging Model
characters, Korean alphabets and special characters as the model name. You
Name
cannot use the duplicated model name.
Assign an interval of creating a new data block. The block

will be created according to the assigned period, starting
from 00:00 daily.
The actual data will be logged to the block after the delay
Periodic time.
E.g.) When the start time is set as 4 minutes and the delay
is 2 minutes, the block will be created every 4 minutes and
the data will be stored 2 minutes after when the new block
is created.
Select this option to create a new block by using a
Called
command expression “DataLog()”.
Creates a new block when the assigned tag or address value
Trigger ON becomes ON. The data will be logged even the status
Type
becomes OFF.
Trigger OFF becomes OFF. The data will be logged even the status
becomes ON.
Trigger Change
becomes OFF to ON or ON to OFF.
Controls the block creation according to the assigned tag’s
Enable Tag ON/OFF state. The block will be created when the tag is ON.
The block will not be created when the tag is OFF.
Creates a block once a day at the assigned time. If the
On Time block is full, the data will no longer be logged to the block.
(Once a Day) When you select this option, any other method to create a
block (such as Xpanel Reset) will not operate.
9-3
Creates a block according to the time.

Periodic: Assign the creation interval and the delay.
On Time: Assign the time of the day to create the block.
You can assign the time from 00:00 to 23:59.
Periodic In case of the delay, you can assign the value up to 1439.
On Time
Start
Time
Creates the block when the assigned address or tag’s value

Trigger Tag
changes from 0 to the other value. You can assign the device
On/Off/Change
address or tag by pressing the button. In case of the address,
Enable Tag
you can assign the data type (Bit/Word).
(2) Logging Option
Item Description
The data is logged according to the assigned interval.

You can assign the interval from 1 to 30,000 seconds.
Periodic
(500min). This option operates when the block is
created.
Logs the data when the assigned address or tag’s value
changes from 0 to the other value. You can assign the
Tag Value device address or tag by pressing the button. In
case of the address, you can assign the data type
(Bit/Word).
Type Logs data according to the interval or the tag value.
Log To CSV When you select this option, a CSV file will be created
(Periodic/Tag Value, once a day, with the file name as ‘YearMonthDay.csv”.
Daily) The log data of a single data logging model will be
saved in the same csv file.
Logs data according to the interval or the tag value.
Log To CSV When you select this option, a CSV file will be created
(Periodic/Tag Value, once a month, with the file name as ‘YearMonth.csv”.
Monthly) The log data of a single data logging model will be
saved in the same csv file.
9-4
Data Logging
Stores the data to the block according to the assigned

interval. You can assign from 1 to 30000 seconds.
Period
Standard
Logs the data when the assigned address or tag’s value

changes from 0 to the other value. You can assign the
Addr/Tag device address or tag by pressing the button. In
case of the address, you can assign the data type
(Bit/Word).
(3) Block Option
Item Description
Assign the maximum number of the data to be stored in each block. You
can assign the number of data from 1 to 2048. It means that the individual
Maximum Log No.
tag can log as much as the assigned value.
Per Block
E.g.) If there are four registered tags and the maximum log no. per block is
set as 20, Each tag can log 20 data.
Maximum Block Assign the maximum number of blocks. You can assign the value from 1 to
No. 32.
Add Tag
Adds a tag or an address to log data. You can assign the device address or
tag by pressing the button.
You can also configure the tag display setting. You can enter the value from
0 to 4 to the ‘Point Number Setting’ field. To display the value in
hexadecimal, select the ‘Hexadecimal Display’ option.
Edit Tag Edits the selected tag.
Delete Tag Deletes the selected tag.
9-5
Moves the selected tag’s location upward or downward. The white arrow
▲/▼/△/▽ button moves the tag to the topmost or bottommost location. The black
arrow moves the tag 1 step upward or downward.
• Since the data is logged in block unit, the block must be created in
advance.
• If a block is full, you must create a new block to continue the data
logging.
• If the number of blocks reached the maximum, the next block will be
created after the deletion of the oldest block.
• Before saving the CSV file, check the volume of the storage. It is
recommended to save the files in USB or SD memory.
• If the configuration of the data logging model has changed and the
project is written to the Xpanel, the former project’s entire blocks will
be deleted. (CSV files are not deleted.) Thus, back-up is needed if
necessary.
• The location where the data log file is stored in the Xpanel is as
follows:
\ Xpanel\Log\“LogModelName”
9-6
Data Logging
9.3 Object Configuration
Select [Draw] – [Data Logging] or press icon on the drawing tool. Then click on the
graphic page to bring up the window as shown below.
Item Description
Displays the currently existing data logging model in the project. Select the
Log Model Name
model from the list to display the data on the object.
Text Color Sets the text color. You can select one from the 98 colors.
Line Color Sets the line color. You can select one from the 98 colors.
Line Type Sets the line type. You can select one from the 7 types.
Assign the number of columns and rows to be displayed on the object. You
Group/Row No.
can assign from 2 to 100.
9-7
Configures the size of column. You can select the option between ‘Equally’
and ‘Custom’. If you select the ‘Custom’ option, the number of the column
is automatically set as the number of tags in the data logging model. You
Column Size.
cannot select the ‘Custom’ option if the number of the tags in the data
logging model exceeds 20.
The column size can be customized according to the number of columns.
Select the date display type. You can select the type from the following
Date Type options:
yy/mm/dd, dd/mm/yy, mm/dd, dd/mm
Select the value display type.
“????” indicates that the tag value will be displayed as its configuration in the
database.
Value Type “####”, “####.0”, “####.00”, “####.000”, “####.0000” indicates that the
tag value will be displayed with 4 integers and the decimal points.
If you select ‘Use Log Model’s Tag Setting’ option, the value will be displayed
according to the configuration in the data logging model.
Select the other items to be displayed on the object. You can select Date,
Display
Time, Max/Min. Value, Average Value and Summation Value.
Select the display type of the data logging object.

When you select the ‘Continuous Display’ option, the log data will be
displayed on the object regardless of the block, in real-time.
Display Type
When you select the ‘Block Display’ option, the log data will be displayed on
the object only after the manual object refresh, such as Xpanel reboot. The
latest data before the object refresh will be displayed.
• Since XpanelDesigner V2.40, the log data is displayed in descending

order. (Under XpanelDesigner V2.34: Ascending order)
To change the display order, go to Xpanel Config window → Log
Configuration and set the ‘Log Data Sort Type’ as ‘Time Ascending
Sort’.
• ‘Block Display’ does not support the object auto-refresh. To display
the block data, update the object by Xpanel reboot.
9-8
Data Logging

4
In this section, you can find subroutines frequently used for Data Logging. Please refer
to the table below for applicable subroutines.
All commands must be used with brackets.
Command Description
Subroutine DataLog Creates or stops the data logging block.
Saves the data block to the SD/MMC

Subroutine MakeCsv
memory in CSV file format.
Data
Saves the data block to the assigned location
Logging Subroutine MakeLogCsv
in CSV file format.
Saves the data block in CSV file format and

Subroutine MakeLogCsvEx
stores the header name at cell A1.
4
9-9
9.4.1 Functions for Data Logging
DataLog Creates or stops the data logging block.
Subroutine DataLog(“LogModelName”,BlockControl)
Creates or stops the data logging block.

Description
Enter 0 at BlockControl to stop the block. Enter 1 to create a new block.
Creates a new block for the data logging model “LOG” and start logging.
Example
DataLog(“LOG”,1)
MakeCsv Saves the data block to the SD/MMC memory in CSV file format.
Subroutine MakeCsv(“LogModelName”, BlockNumber)

Saves the assigned LogModelName ‘s data block to the SD/MMC memory in
Description CSV file format.
You can assign the value from 0 to 31 at BlockNumber.
Saves the 10th data block in data logging model “LOG” to SD/MMC memory in
Example CSV file format.
MakeCsv(“LOG”,10)
MakeLogCsv Saves the data block to the assigned location in CSV file format.
Subroutine MakeLogCsv(“LogModelName”, BlockNumber, Location)
Saves the assigned LogModelName ‘s data block to the assigned location in CSV
file format.
Description You can assign the value from 0 to 31 at BlockNumber.
When you assign 0 at Location, it means the local. The value 1 means the
SD/MMC and the value 2 means the USB.
Saves the 10th data block in data logging model “LOG” to USB in CSV file format.
Example
MakeLogCsv(“LOG”,10,2)
9-10
Data Logging
MakeLogCsvEx Saves the data block in CSV file format and stores the header name at cell A1.
Subroutine MakeLogCsvEx(“Header”, “LogModelName”, BlockNumber, Location)

Saves the assigned LogModelName ‘s data block in CSV file format and stores
the header name at cell A1.
Saves the 10th data block in data logging model “LOG” to USB in CSV file format.
Example Sets the header name “Header” at cell A1.
MakeLogCsvEx(“Header”,”LOG”,10,2)
9-11
9.5 Advanced Features
You can utilize the logged data with trend object. You can use Scope trend to display the
data logging model’s data.
The tags registered in the model are automatically set as the pens (max. 8 pens). The
trend object reads the block data when the screen is updated. The X-axis indicates the
number of data stored in the block. The object is updated when the control tag’s value
changes.
Control Tag Value 2 Deletes the current graph.

Control Tag Value 3 Deletes the current graph and updates with the new data.
※ Please refer to ‘Trend’ manual for more information.
9-12
Data Logging
9.6 Exercise
Exercise : Monitoring the Change in Flow Through Data Logging Object

In this example, you will collect and monitor the flowmeter data at every second.
(1) Creating Tags
a) Select [Tools] – [Database] to bring up the database manager. Create the tags to
collect the data.
9-13
(2) Data Logging Model/Object Configuration
a) Select [Tools] – [Data Logging] to bring up the configuration window. Name the
model as “Log” and configure the model as shown below.
9-14
Data Logging
b) Select [Draw] – [Data Logging] and click on the page to add the object. In the
configuration window, select the model and configure the object as shown below.
Press [OK] to finish the configuration.
9-15
Run simulator or write the project to Xpanel to check the operation.
9-16
Trend Utilization
10 Trend Utilization
Xpanel Designer provides a real-time Trend and a historical Trend. A real-time Trend
monitors the tendency of the measured data in real-time. A historical Trend is for the
analysis of the collected data, based on the time interval. Also, you can analyze the
maximum 16 data in a single Trend object. The analyzed data can be saved as a CSV file.
The Trend object includes six interfaces. The user can choose one of the types from the
following suggestions; YT, Scope, SPC, XY, Log and ST Trend.
10.1 Features
 It is possible to register maximum 16 tags to a single Trend and analyze the data.
 You can expand or reduce the monitoring time interval.
 You can easily monitor the Trend with the toolbar which includes the
functionalities such as searching in a specific time zone, moving in a frames, etc.
 You can select one of the Trend types (YT Trend, Scope Trend, SPC Trend, ST
Trend, Log Trend, XY Trend) to monitor the data in the desired format.
 Using multiple Trend objects in a single graphic page can slow system
performance.
 The Trend value between the moment of project’s termination and the
restart is not maintained.
10-1
10.2 Settings
Select [Draw] – [Trend Graph] or press icon to bring up the configuration window
as shown below.
Item Description
Assign a unique name of the Trend object. You can use the alphanumeric
characters, the Korean alphabet, and the special characters. If the name is
Name
duplicated with the other trend graph, the project will not be downloaded to
the Xpanel.
Select a type of the trend.
A Trend which monitors the tag values based on the time

General (YT)
interval.
A Trend which assigns x-coordinates to the data stored in PLC
Trend Type SPC
to monitor them at once.
A Trend which displays the user-defined step trend and
ST monitors the logged data according to the existing step
trend.
10-2
Trend Utilization
A Trend which displays the data which is logged by the data

Scope
logging or PLC memory.
A Trend which displays the logged data in real-time. You can
Log
use multi-channel and log the data in an interval or a trigger.
A Trend which displays the logged data in real-time. The
XY difference from the Log Trend is that you can assign the x-
coordinate.
Configures the direction of the Trend’s data. If you select ‘Left’, the Trend will be
Display Base drawn from the left to the right. If you select’ Right’, the Trend will be drawn
from the right to the left.
Displays the time range of the Trend’s x-axis. The display time may be changed
Display Time according to the sampling time. (YT Trend) In this case, you cannot assign the
display time less than or 5000 times greater than the sampling time.
Configures the interval of data display. The smaller sampling time will increase
Sampling Time the accuracy of the Trend graph. You can assign the value in the range of 1 ~
display time.
Select this option to preserve the data displayed on the Trend graph. You can
use the file to display the Trend graph which is drawn before the project restart.
Regardless of the memory type, you can store the data:
YT Trend: 5000
Log Trend: 30000
XY Trend: 10000 in maximum.
File Saving If the number of data has exceeded the maximum, the system will delete the
old data and save the new data. SPC Trend, ST Trend, Scope Trend do not
support this feature.
Saves the file in the Xpanel device. The default path is
Main Memory
\\Xpanel\.
SD Memory Saves the file in the root path of SD memory.
USB Memory Saves the file in the root path of USB memory.
Prev Moves to the previous Trend configuration tab.
Next Moves to the next Trend configuration tab.
OK Adds the Trend graph to the page with the current configuration.
Cancel Cancels the configuration and closes the configuration window.
10-3
10.2.1 YT Trend
YT Trend is the most basic shaped trend object. You can monitor the tag value (Y-axis)
based on the time interval (X-axis).
(1) Object Style
Configures the background color of the Trend object. The background indicates the
object area except the data display.
Item Description
Color Selects the object’s background color. You can select one from the 98 colors.
10-4
Trend Utilization
(2) Trend Area Style
Configures the graph’s background color and the initial draw type.
Item Description
Selects the graph’s background color. You can select one from the 98
Back. Color
colors.
Selects the method of drawing a graph at the beginning.
If you select the ‘Fixed Pen’ option, the new data will be updated on the
side of the display base (right or left).
Initial Draw Type
If you select the ‘Moving Pen’ option, the new data will be updated at the
end of the latest pen’s location.
Both options will draw the same graph.
10-5
(3) Pen
In this tab, you can assign the tags to monitor in the Trend object. You can assign
maximum 8 tags.
Item Description
Assign a tag name to monitor. You can manually enter the tag name in the field
or select the number button on the left to bring up the [Pen] window.
Tag Name
Assign the device address to be monitored. Select the data

Addr type and I/O device then press button to configure the
detailed address.
Assign the tag to be monitored. You can manually enter
Tag
the tag name or press button to select the tag.
10-6
Trend Utilization
Enter the detailed comment of the pen. This field must be

Comment filled in. The comment will be used instead of the tag name
in the graph.
Enter the minimum value which will be displayed on the
Min Value graph. If you do not enter a value, this field will be set as
the minimum value of the tag.
Enter the maximum value which will be displayed on the
Max Value graph. If you do not enter a value, this field will be set as
the maximum value of the tag.
You can set a pen color. You can choose one from the 98
Pen Color
colors.
Color You can set a pen color. You can choose one from the 98 colors.
(4) Control Button
You can use the control button to switch the Trend mode between real-time and
historical trend. You can also analyze the past data by changing the time zone.
Item Description
Trend Mode Switches the Trend mode between real-time Trend and historical Trend.
- Displays the previous frame.

E.g.) A trend with 2 minutes of ‘Display time’ and the present time is
Prev Frame
12:00:00 – 12:02:00. If you press the ‘Prev Frame’ button, the Trend displays
the data of 11:58:00 – 12:00:00.
10-7
- Displays the next frame.

E.g.) A trend with 2 minutes of ‘Display time’ and the present time is
Next Frame
12:00:00 – 12:02:00. If you press the ‘Next Frame’ button, the Trend displays
the data of 12:02:00 – 12:04:00.
When you press the button, the monitoring interval is cut into the half. In
other words, this button is to monitor the data in detail.
Decrease Interval E.g.) A trend with 2 minutes of ‘Display time’ and the present time is
12:00:00 – 12:02:00. If you press the ‘Decrease Interval’ button, the Trend
Time becomes 12:01:00 – 12:02:00.
When you press the button, the monitoring interval is doubled. In other
words, this button is to monitor the data in a broader range.
Increase Interval E.g.) A trend with 2 minutes of ‘Display time’ and the present time is
12:00:00 – 12:02:00. If you press the ‘Increase Interval’ button, the Trend
Time becomes 11:58:00 – 12:02:00.
Changes the pen to display the different minimum/maximum value. When
you press the button, the min/max. value will change according to the order
of the assigned pens.
Pen
Trend Setup
You can configure the base time, time width and the pen display.
The base time indicates the time to be displayed in the historical mode. The
time width can be configured in minute units, from 1 to 65535. However,
the actual time width cannot be less than or 5000 times greater than the
sampling time.
10-8
Trend Utilization
(5) Legend
Item Description
Display Tag Value Select this option to display the current tag value.
Select this option to display the system’s date on the middle-top of the
Show Date object. You can select one from the four formats:
yy/mm/dd, dd/mm/yy, mm/dd, dd/mm.
10-9
(6) Grid
You can use grids on the Trend area to analyze the data quickly and easily.
Item Description
Display Grid Shows or hides the grid.

X-Axis Grid No. Assign the number of grids on X-axis. You can assign from 0 to 99 grids.
Y-Axis Grid No. Assign the number of grids on Y-axis. You can assign from 0 to 99 grids.
Color You can set a grid color. You can choose one from the 98 colors.
10-10
Trend Utilization
(7) Y-Axis Legend
Item Description
Display Min.
Shows or hides the min/max value on the Y-Axis.
Max. Value
(8) X-Axis Legend
Item Description
Display Time Shows or hides the time on the X-Axis.
10-11
10.2.2 Scope Trend
Scope Trend displays the data stored in the device or by the data logging feature. The
Scope Trend draws the graph with the existing data at once as shown below.
(1) Object Style
Item Description
10-12
Trend Utilization
(2) Line Color
Item Description
Line Color Changes the line color of the object. You can select one from 98 colors.
10-13
(3) Pen
In this tab, you can assign the tags to monitor in the Trend object . In case of the Scope
Trend, you can configure up to 8 pens. Each pen can display up to 2048 data points.
Item Description
Draws the Scope Trend based on the Xpanel’s Data Logging model. You can only
Using Data
display 8 pens regardless of the actual number of tags or addresses registered in
Logging
the data logging model.
Tag Name

detailed address.
10-14
Trend Utilization

Tag
in the graph.
Pen Color
colors.
(4) Grid
Item Description

10-15
(5) Y-Axis Legend
Item Description
Display Min/Max
Shows or hides the min/max value of the pen on Y-Axis.
Value
Configures the size of the text displayed on the Y-Axis. You can assign the
Size (Pixels)
value from 0 to 1024.
10-16
Trend Utilization
(6) X-Axis Legend
Item Description
Display the number Shows or hides the number of data on the X-Axis. When you select the
of Data option, the data number from 1 to the maximum will be displayed.
10-17
(7) Scope Option
Item Description
Data Point Size

Configures the size of the data point. You can assign the value from 0 to 1024.
(Pixels)
Draw Border Shows or hides the border of the Trend object.
10-18
Trend Utilization
(8) Scope Tags
Item Description
The assigned digital tag will display the state of data reception when the graph
Control Bit Tag is updated. In case of the ongoing data reception, the assigned tag will be set
(1). When the process is completed, the tag will be cleared (0).
Assign a tag to control the graph update of the Scope Trend. The object will be
Screen Control updated according to the value assigned to the ‘Screen Control Tag’.
Tag 2: Clears the current graph.
3: Clears and redraws the current graph.
Assigns the number of each pen’s data to be drawn on the graph. The
Data Count Tag maximum value of the assigned tag is 2048. If you are using the data logging
option, this option is ignored.
Assign a tag or an address to define the minimum value of the Y-Axis. If the
Min Val minimum value is greater than the maximum value, the graph will not be
updated.
Assign a tag or an address to define the maximum value of the Y-Axis. If the
Max Val maximum value is smaller than the minimum value, the graph will not be
updated.
Assigns the block number to be read when you are using the data logging
Block Number
model. This option is ignored if you are reading the data from PLC.
10-19
10.2.3 SPC Trend
SPC Trend is used to display the data stored in the PLC at once, in a graph. It is similar to
the Scope Trend but the difference is that the SPC Trend can designate the data on the
X-Axis. In other words, each point is assigned with X and Y coordinates. Thus the graph
is not drawn according to the time flow.
(1) Object Style
Item Description
10-20
Trend Utilization
(2) Line Color
Item Description
10-21
(3) Pen
In this tab, you can assign the tags to monitor in the Trend object . In case of the SPC
Item Description
Tag Name

detailed address.
Tag
10-22
Trend Utilization

in the graph.
Pen Color
colors.
(4) Grid
Item Description

10-23
(5) Y-Axis Legend
Item Description
Display Min/Max
Value
Size (Pixels)
10-24
Trend Utilization
(6) X-Axis Legend
Item Description
Display Min/Max
Shows or hides the min/max value on the X-Axis.
Value
10-25
(7) SPC Option
Item Description
Moving point represents the real-time point which is displayed on the graph
Using Moving
according to the data of X and Y-Axis tag. You can check the difference
Point
between the graph and the measured data.
Color You can set a moving point color. You can choose one from the 98 colors.
Configures the size of the moving point. You can assign the value from 0 to
Size (Pixels)
1024.
You can trace the moving point with this option. When the tracing amount
Using Moving reaches the value that you have assigned to the ‘Trace Size’, the trace graph
Point Trace will not be updated. To update the new traces, use control tags to stop and
restart the trace operation.
When you check the option, the path of the moving point will be displayed
as much as the assigned value. You can assign the value from 1 to 800.
Using Fixed Trace

Value
10-26
Trend Utilization
If you deselect the option, you have to use a tag or an address to assign the
value. You can assign the detailed address or browse the tag by pressing the
button.
Update Trace At
When you select the option, the moving point’s path will increase every time
X/Y Axis Data
the corresponding axis data changes.
Changed.
Data Point Size Configures the size of the data point. You can assign the value from 0 to
(Pixels) 1024.
Draw Border Shows or hides the border of the graph.
Draw Data
Select this option to connect the data points with a line.
Connection
(8) SPC Tag
Item Description
Assign a tag to control the graph update of the SPC Trend. The object will be
updated according to the value assigned to the ‘Control’.
1: Overwrites a new graph on the existing graph.
Control
2: Clears the current graph.
3: Clears and redraws the graph.
4: Starts ‘Moving Point Trace’ (Only when the option is selected)
10-27
5: Pauses ‘Moving Point Trace’ (Only when the option is selected)

6: Stops ‘Moving Point Trace’ (Only when the option is selected)
Assigns the number of each pen’s data to be drawn on the graph. The
maximum value of the assigned tag is 2048. This option is referred only when
Data Count
the control tag’s value is 1 or 3. If you are using the PLC address, secure the
word devices as much as the data count.
Control Bit is updated. In case of the ongoing data reception, the assigned tag will be set
Assign a tag or an address to set the X-Axis coordinate. The number of
X-Axis Start
allocated coordinates refers the value of ‘Data Count’. If you are using the PLC
Address
address, secure the bit or word devices as much as the data count
Assign a tag or an address to define the minimum value of the X-Axis. If the
X-Axis
minimum value is greater than the maximum value, the graph will not be
Minimum
updated. This option is referred only when the control tag’s value is 1 or 3.
Assign a tag or an address to define the maximum value of the X-Axis. If the
X-Axis
maximum value is smaller than the minimum value, the graph will not be
Maximum
Assign a tag or an address to define the minimum value of the Y-Axis. If the
Y-Axis
Minimum
Assign a tag or an address to define the maximum value of the Y-Axis. If the
Y-Axis
Maximum
X-Coordinate Assign a tag which corresponds to the moving point’s X-coordinate. The
of Moving moving point’s X-Axis value is calculated according to the current graph’s X-
Point Axis Min/Max value and the corresponding tag value.
Y-Coordinate Assign a tag which corresponds to the moving point’s Y-coordinate. The
of Moving moving point’s Y-Axis value is calculated according to the current graph’s Y-
Point Axis Min/Max value and the corresponding tag value.
When the control tag’s value becomes 1 or 3 and the update starts, the
system concentrates on the data reading. This may cause the delay to the
other operations (opening a page, writing tag value, etc.). It is
recommended to operate the project after the graph update.
10-28
Trend Utilization
10.2.4 ST Trend
ST Trend is used to compare the reference graph and the real-time graph.
10-29
(1) Object Style
Item Description
10-30
Trend Utilization
(2) Line Color
Item Description
10-31
(3) Pen
Assign the tags to draw the reference graph. You must assign the real tags. A series of
addresses according to the data count will be allocated starting from the assigned pen’s
address. Since the reference graph needs X and Y coordinates, a single point requires
two word addresses. Therefore the address will be assigned as shown below.
In this tab, you can assign the tags to monitor in the Trend object . In case of the ST
10-32
Trend Utilization
Item Description

detailed address.
Tag Name
Tag
in the graph.
Pen Color
colors.
10-33
(4) Data Count Tags
The data count tags are used to decide the number of consecutive addresses starting
from the assigned pen. In other words, the number of data count tags must be equal to
the number of the pens. The data count tags’ values must be in even number. If an odd
number is assigned, 1 will be subtracted from the value and applied to the graph.
Item Description
Assign the device address to be referred. Select the data type and I/O device
Addr
then press button to configure the detailed address.
Assign the tag to be referred. You can manually enter the tag name or press
Tag
button to select the tag.
10-34
Trend Utilization
(5) Grid
Item Description

10-35
(6) Y-Axis Legend
Item Description
Display Min/Max
Value
Size (Pixels)
10-36
Trend Utilization
(7) X-Axis Legend
Item Description
Display Time Shows or hides the time on the X-Axis.

Select the time display format. You can select one from the following
Format
options; seconds, HH:MM:SS, HH:MM, HH
10-37
(8) ST Option
Item Description
Trace Point
You can set a trace point color. You can choose one from the 98 colors.
Color
Configures the size of the trace point. You can assign the value from 0 to
Size (Pixels)
1024.
Data Point Size
Configures the size of the data point. You can assign the value from 0 to 1024.
(Pixels)
10-38
Trend Utilization
(9) ST Tag
Item Description
ST-Control Bit is updated. In case of the ongoing data reception, the assigned tag will be set
Assign a tag to control the graph update of the ST Trend. The object will be
updated according to the value assigned to the ‘ST-Control’.
1: Overwrites a new graph on the existing graph.
2: Clears the current graph.
ST-Control
3: Clears and redraws the graph.
4: Starts ‘Trace’ operation (Does not operate if there is no reference graph.)
5: Pauses ‘Trace’ operation (Maintains the accumulated data)
6: Stops ‘Trace’ operation (Does not maintain the accumulated data)
Assign a tag or an address to draw the Trace graph. When the tracing
ST-Trace Point operation starts, up to 2048 tag values will be stored in the buffer and
displayed on the graph.
Assign a tag or an address to define the minimum value of the graph. If the
ST-Minimum
Value
updated. This option is referred only when the graph is updated.
10-39
Assign a tag or an address to define the maximum value of the graph. If the
ST-Maximum
Value
updated. This option is referred only when the graph is updated.
Assign a tag to use as the X-Axis time display.
ST-Trace The value will be applied when the reference graph is updated. Only the real
Display Time part of the value is used. You can also select the ‘Using fixed value’ option to
Tag manually enter the value. If the value is smaller than 0, the graph will not be
drawn.
When the control tag’s value becomes 1 or 3 and the update starts, the
system concentrates on the data reading. This may cause the delay to the
other operations (opening a page, writing tag value, etc.). It is
recommended to operate the project after the graph update.
10-40
Trend Utilization
10.2.5 Log Trend
Log Trend logs data and displays it as a graph. You can display the pen individually. It is
also possible to save the data in a CSV file.
Historical mode is not supported.
(1) Object Style
Item Description
10-41
(2) Line Color
Item Description
Selects the method of drawing a graph at the beginning.
If you select the ‘Fixed Pen’ option, the new data will be updated on the
side of the display base (right or left).
Initial Draw Type
If you select the ‘Moving Pen’ option, the new data will be updated at the
end of the latest pen’s location.
Both options will draw the same graph.
10-42
Trend Utilization
(3) Pen
In this tab, you can assign the tags to monitor in the Trend object. You can assign
maximum 16 tags.
Item Description
Tag Name

detailed address.
Tag
10-43

in the graph.
Pen Color
colors.
(4) Grid
Item Description

10-44
Trend Utilization
(5) Y-Axis Legend
Item Description
Display Min/Max
Value
Size (Pixels)
10-45
(6) X-Axis Legend
Item Description
Display Data Shows or hides the number of data on the X-Axis. Data number 1 and the
Number maximum data number will be displayed on each side of the X-Axis.
10-46
Trend Utilization
(7) Log Option
Item Description
Assign the number of data to be displayed on the object. Each pen’s data will
Buffer be displayed according to the value assigned in this field. You can assign the
Decides the sampling method. If you select the period, the data will be updated
Sampling according to the assigned sampling interval. If you select the trigger, the data
will be updated when the assigned tag value changed from 0 to not-0 value.
Sampling This field will be enabled when you select the ‘Period’ option. The interval unit is
Interval 100mSec and you can assign the value from 1m to 65535.
This field will be enabled when you select the ‘Trigger’ option. You can assign a
Trigger Tag tag or an address which will be the standard of trigger operation. Press
button to configure the detailed address or browse the tag.
Assign a tag to control the Log Trend.
0: Allows data logging and starts drawing the graph.
Screen Control
1: Stops data logging and the graph drawing.
Tag
2: Initializes the data logging and the graph drawing. The data logging and the
graph drawing will be stopped after the initialization.
Data Point Configures the size of the data point. You can assign the value from 0 to 1024.
10-47
Select this option to individualize the graph pen by pen. The topmost graph
displays the data of pen 1.
Using Multi-
Channel
10.2.6 XY Trend
XY Trend logs data and displays it as a graph. Unlike the Log Trend, you can manually
assign the data points’ X-coordinate. Also, XY Trend supports historical mode.
You cannot use the multi-channel option and save the data as CSV file.
10-48
Trend Utilization
(1) Object Style
Item Description
10-49
(2) Line Color
Item Description
10-50
Trend Utilization
(3) Pen
In this tab, you can assign the tags to monitor in the Trend object . In case of the XY
Item Description
Tag Name

detailed address.
Tag
10-51

in the graph.
Pen Color
colors.
(4) Grid
Item Description

10-52
Trend Utilization
(5) Y-Axis Legend
Item Description
Display Min/Max
Value
Size (Pixels)
10-53
(6) X-Axis Legend
Item Description
Display Min/Max
Shows or hides the min/max value on the X-Axis.
Value
10-54
Trend Utilization
(7) XY Option
Item Description
Assign the number of data to be displayed on the object. Each pen’s data
Buffer will be displayed according to the value assigned in this field. You can assign
the value from 2 to 800.
Decides the sampling method. If you select the period, the data will be
updated according to the assigned sampling interval. If you select the
Sampling
trigger, the data will be updated when the assigned tag value changed from
0 to not-0 value.
This field will be enabled when you select the ‘Period’ option. The interval
Sampling Interval
unit is 100mSec and you can assign the value from 1m to 65535.
This field will be enabled when you select the ‘Trigger’ option. You can
Trigger Tag assign a tag or an address which will be the standard of trigger operation.
Press button to configure the detailed address or browse the tag.
Assign a tag to control the Log Trend.
0: Allows data logging and starts drawing the graph.
Screen Control
1: Stops data logging and the graph drawing.
Tag
2: Initializes the data logging and the graph drawing. The data logging and
the graph drawing will be stopped after the initialization.
X Axis Data Tag Assign a tag or an address to log the X-coordinate of the current point.
Configures the size of the data point. You can assign the value from 0 to
Data Point
1024.
10-55
Draw by
Select this option to connect the data points with a line.
Connected Data
Displays the time on the top-middle of the objet. You can select a format
Display Time
from the following options; yy/mm/dd, hh:mm:ss, yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
Draw Border Shows or hides the border of the graph
(8) XY MinMax
Item Description
You can assign the fixed minimum value. You can also assign a tag or an
X Axis Minimum
address to define the minimum value of the X-Axis. If the minimum value is
value
greater than the maximum value, the graph will not be updated.
You can assign the fixed minimum value. You can also assign a tag or an
X Axis Maximum
address to define the maximum value of the X-Axis. If the maximum value is
value
smaller than the minimum value, the graph will not be updated.
10-56
Trend Utilization
10.3.1 Trend Control Buttons
You can manually create the buttons to control the trend objects. Only YT, ST, Scope, XY
Trends support the control buttons.
Control Button Configuration

a) Add an object to the page and double-click it to bring up the configuration window
as shown below.
b) Select ‘Touch’ feature and set the action as ‘Key Input’. Then set the key type which
is supported by the trend object.
c) Press [OK] button to finish the configuration. You can control the trend object with
this button.
10-57
Following is the supported key types of each trend.
(1) YT Trend
Key Type Description

Tab Switches the trend mode.
Right Moves to the previous frame.
Left Moves to the next frame.
Up Zooms in on the time interval.
Down Zooms out from the time interval.
Space Changes the pen which displays the min/max value.
Home Opens the Trend Setup window.
※ These buttons will function exactly same as the default control buttons.
(2) ST Trend

Home Initializes the current graph. (No Zoom In/Out)
(3) Scope Trend

Home Initializes the current graph. (No Zoom In/Out)
10-58
Trend Utilization
(4) XY Trend

Tab Switches the trend mode.
 To control the trend object with the button objects, you must select
the trend to be controlled.
 If there are multiple trend objects, you can only control the trend with
the focus.
10-59
10.3.2 Functions for Trend
5
In this section, you can find subroutines frequently used for Trend object. For more
detailed information, please refer to the next section.
All functions must be used with brackets.
Command Description
Trend Subroutine TrendCsvWr Saves the trend data as CSV file.
TrendCsvWr Saves the trend data as CSV file.
Subroutine TrendCsvWr(“TrendName”, Location)
Saves the assigned TrendName to the assigned location in CSV file format.
You can also assign the Location as shown below.
Description
0: _LOCAL_
1: _SDMEM_
2: _USBMEM_
The file is saved as “Trendname_MMDDHHmmss.CSV”.
Saves the trend object named “Trend” as CSV file in USB memory.
Example
TrendCsvWr(“Trend”,2)
5
10-60
Trend Utilization
10.4 Exercise
Exercise : Displaying the Logged Data with Trend

In this example, you will collect data and monitor the logged data with the Trend object.
(1) Data Logging
a) Select [Tools] – [Data Logging] to configure the data logging model as shown
below.
※ Refer to the ‘Data Logging’ for more information.
10-61
b) If you wish to check the logged data, go to [Draw] – [Data Logging] to configure
the data logging object.
(2) Trend Configuration
a) Select [Draw] – [Trend] to bring up the configuration window as shown below.

Select the trend type as ‘Scope’ and configure the object as shown below.
10-62
Trend Utilization
b) In the [Pen] tab, check at the ‘Using Data Logging’ option and select the data
logging model. The tags will be automatically registered as pens.
c) In the [Scope Tag] tab, assign the tags as shown below. You must assign tags for
the Screen Control Tag, Min/Max Val, Block Number. Since this trend object refers
the data logging model, Data Count Tag is not necessary. Press [OK] to finish the
configuration.
10-63
d) To change the value of the screen control tag, create an object with ‘Entry Data’
feature as shown below. Make another object to change the value of block
number tag.
a) Check the logged data with the data logging object. To display the logged data
with the Trend object, set the block number tag’s value as the desired value. Then
change the screen control tag’s value as 3.
b) The trend object will draw the graph as shown below.
10-64
Trend Utilization
c) Set the screen control tag’s value as 2 to clear the object as shown below.
10-65
11 Alarm Utilization
11.1 Alarm Configuration
Alarm is a function which transfers the abnormal operation situations to the operator
with its description and the time it occurred. The user can configure the processing
method of the alarms occurred during the Xpanel operation. The alarm contents may be
printed out by the printer, and saved in the user’s PC as a CSV file. Also, an action may be
assigned to each alarm. The alarm group and level may be displayed on the Alarm
Summary object for the more concrete display.
11.1.1 Feature
 The contents of alarm may be printed out by the printer or saved as CSV file.
 An action can be assigned to each alarm level.
 An audio file can be played by using the command expression to the alarm action.
 You may use string table to display the contents of alarm.
This manual is written based on the XpanelDesigner V2.52
11-1
Alarm Configuration
11.1.2 Settings
Select [Tools] – [Alarm] or press icon to bring up the configuration window as

shown below.
Item Description
Select a group to add an alarm. The Xpanel Designer provides 10 alarm

Alarm Group groups, which cannot be deleted or added. There is no limit to the alarms
that can be added to each group.
Enter a description for the selected alarm group. You can enter the
Group Desc.
description up to 16 characters.
Select this option to save the alarm history on Xpanel power On/Off. You
Save Alarm
can save up to 200 alarm histories in Main/USB/SD memory.
You can decide whether to use string table for the alarm contents. Using
Using String Table string table may increase the convenience on the displaying alarm
contents.
String Group No. Assign a group number of the string table to be used.
Add Adds an alarm to the selected group.
Edit Edits the selected alarm.
Delete Deletes the selected alarm.
Move Up Moves the selected alarm one step upward.
Move Down Moves the selected alarm one step downward.
Copy Saves the selected alarm’s contents in the clipboard.
11-2
Pastes the alarm contents to the other alarm groups, Microsoft Excel or
Paste
Notepad.
Displays the alarms in the selected group. The alarm number, tag name,
condition, value, alarm Description, alarm on action, action parameter,
Alarm List
alarm off action, alarm acknowledge action, alarm level are displayed in
this section.
11.1.3 Alarm Configuration
In the [Alarm Configuration] window, press [Add] button to bring up the [Alarm]
Item Description
Assign a tag or an address for the alarm. Press button to assign the
Addr / Tag
detailed device address or browse the tags.
Configure the alarm condition and its reference value. There are 3
Tag Operation operators to be utilized as a condition: >, =, < . The tag value compared to
the ‘Ref. Value’ will cause an alarm according to the condition.
Enter the alarm description which will be displayed at alarm On. If ‘Using
Alarm Description String Table’ option is selected in the [Alarm Configuration] window, You
may assign the value in the String Table group.
Action Option On Assign an action when the alarm occurs. You may select ‘Opens Page’ or
Alarm ‘Command Script’.
11-3
Alarm Configuration
Opens
When an alarm occurs, a page added to the ‘Execute’ field
Page
will be opened. It is not necessary to use command such as
PageOpen(). You may manually enter the page name
(with or without the file extension) or press [File] button to
select the page file. Only one page can be registered in this
field.
When an alarm occurs, a command script used in the

Command
‘Execute’ field will be executed. You can assign the priority
Script
of the command (1 (Low) – 10 (High)). Press [Addr] or
[Tag] button to use the address or tag as the command’s
parameter. If you are editing the multiple lines of
command script in Microsoft Excel, an error may be
caused by the line alignment process. It is recommended
to use simple command scripts.
Enter the command to be executed on the Alarm Off. If you are editing
Execute Command the multiple lines of command script in Microsoft Excel, an error may be
by Alarm Off caused by the line alignment process. It is recommended to use simple
command scripts.
Enter the command to be executed on the Alarm Acknowledgment. If
Execute Command
you are editing the multiple lines of command script in Microsoft Excel, an
by Alarm Ack.
error may be caused by the line alignment
You can check the values of the tags registered as an ‘Interest Tag’. This
Interest Tag feature operates with the alarm summary object. You may register
Registration maximum 20 tags. You can add the tag or address by pressing the [Tag] or
[Addr] button.
Moves the selected interest tag one step upward/downward. Or you can
Up/Down/Del
delete the selected interest tag from the list.
11-4
Decides whether to apply the interest tag list to the other alarms in the
current alarm group or not. There are options such as ‘Do Not Apply’,
‘Overwrite’, ‘Add Interest Tag’.
Apply Interest Tag in ‘Do Not Apply’ option only applies the interest tags to the current alarm.
Group ‘Overwrite’ option erases the other alarms’ interest tags and applies the
current alarm’s interest tags in the same alarm group.
‘Add Interest Tag’ option adds the current alarm’s interest tag list to the
other alarms in the same alarm group.
Sets the alarm level of the current alarm. You can set the level from 0 to 7.
Alarm Level Each level can be assigned with different colors for the alarm summary
and the scroll message.
Displays the scroll message when an alarm occurs. Since this feature is
applied to the entire pages in the project, it is not necessary to check the
Apply Scroll
alarm summary for the contents.
Messages
※ Please refer to the “Xpanel Configuration” manual for more
information.
Release Scroll When you select this option, the scroll message will be removed when the
Message at ACK corresponding alarm is acknowledged.
11-5
Alarm Configuration
11.1.4 Exercise
Exercise 1 : Checking the Alarm Contents with Alarm Summary
(1) Alarm Configuration
a) Select [Tools] – [Alarm] to bring up the [Alarm Configuration] window. Add 2

alarms to the alarm group 1. Configure an alarm with the condition of “Greater
than 200”, and configure another alarm with the condition of “Greater than 300”.
Enter the Alarm Description as “Exceeded 200L” and “Exceeded 300L”.
11-6
b) Select [Draw] – [Alarm Summary] and click the page to add the alarm summary
object. Double-click the object to configure the details such as alarm group to be
displayed.
c) Since the operation will be checked by manually changing the tag value, add an
object to the page and use ‘EntryData’ feature as shown below.
11-7
Alarm Configuration
a) Write the project to Xpanel or execute simulator to check the operation. Input the
value “230” to the ‘STORAGE’ tag. An alarm will occur and you can check the
contents of the alarm.
b) Input the value “190” to the tag. The existing alarm will be cleared.
c) Input the value “320” to the tag. Two alarms will occur simultaneously.
11-8
d) Input the value “270” to the tag. Only one alarm (Exceeded 300L) will be cleared.
11-9
Alarm Configuration
Exercise 2 : Playing the Audio File when an Alarm Occurs
 An audio file must exist in the Xpanel or USB/SD memory.

 A command PlayWave() requires AUX socket in the Xpanel device.
 This example is only applicable in the XpanelDesigner V2.50 or above.
a) Select [Tools] – [Alarm] to bring up the [Alarm Configuration] window. Press [Add]
button to bring up the window as shown below. Following figure is a configuration
window used in the Exercise 1.
11-10
b) Set the ‘Action on Alarm’ as ‘Command Script’p and enter the PlayWave()
command in the ‘Execute’ field. Refer to the table below for the detailed
information.
PlayWave Executes the wav file in the assigned path.
Subroutine PlayWave(WavFileLocation, Path, Sync/Async)
Executes the *.wav file from the Path in the WavFileLocation
WavFileLocation can be expressed with the following strings

0: _LOCAL_ (\\Xpanel\)
1: _SDMEM_ (SD Memory Root Path)
Description 2: _USBMEM_ (USB Memory Root Path)

Path must include the file’s name and extension.
Enter 0 at Sync/Async, which indicates the ‘Sync’, to stop the next script’s
execution until the end of the audio file.
Enter 1 to continue the script execution while the audio file is operating.
Execute ‘alarm.wav’ file in the sound folder in the Xpanel. The next
Exercise script will not be executed until the audio file ends.
PlayWave(_LOCAL_, "sound/alarm.wav", 0);
a) Write the project to the Xpanel and execute the project. When the alarm occurs,
you will find that the audio file is executed.
11-11
Alarm Summary
11.2 Alarm Summary
Alarm summary object allows the user to monitor the desired alarms in a single object.
The object displays the detailed information about the alarm, displaying up to 500 alarm
messages.
11.2.1 Settings
Select [Draw] – [Alarm Summary] or press icon then click on the page to bring up
the configuration window as shown below.
11-12
Item Description
Alarm Group Select an alarm group to display on the object.

Configures the color of items displayed on the object. You can configure
the colors of object’s background, alarm Occur, Acknowledgement and
Release. You can also distinguish the alarm levels by color. Press
[BatchEdit] button to configure the colors for each alarm level.
Display Color
Select the type of alarm statuses to display on the object. You can select
‘Occur’, ‘Acked’, ‘Release’ and ‘Display Active Alarm Only’.
Alarm Status If you select ‘Display Active Alarm Only’ option, other options are disabled.
The object will only display the alarms which are currently On. If the alarms
are released, the message will be deleted automatically from the object.
Decide the items to be displayed on the object. You can select ‘Column
Header’, ‘Outlines’, ‘Buttons’, ‘Alarm Time’, ‘Device name’, ‘Value’, ‘Alarm
Display Items
Status’, ‘Alarm Description’, ‘Ack Time’, ‘Clear Time’ and ‘Interest Tag’. Refer
to the table below for more detailed information.
Assign the order of displayed items. Select an item then press
Display Order [Up]/[Down] button to move the items. You can also delete the selected
item by pressing the [Del] button.
You can assign the number of messages to be displayed on the object.
Display Count
You can enter the value from 1 to 500.
Run Specified Action Select this option to execute the command assigned to ‘Execute
On Double Click Command by Alarm Ack.’ by double-clicking the message.
Select this option to add a new message when an alarm is released. When
New Item – Alarm
this option is deselected, the alarm On message will be changed into
Clear
alarm release message.
11-13
Alarm Summary
(1) Display Item
Item Description
Shows or hides the header of each column.
Column Header
Shows or hides the border of the object.
Outlines
Shows or hides the buttons at the bottom of the object.
Stop: Stops the update of Alarm Summary object You can restart the update
by pressing the button again.
Stamp: Adds a message that the user has checked the alarm message.
ACK: Changes the selected alarm to the acknowledged state. If ‘Run Specified
Action On Double Click’ option is selected, the ‘Execute Command by Alarm
Ack.’ will be executed.
Delete: Deletes the selected alarm message from the object. However the
alarm state is still maintained.
Buttons
Delete All: Deletes the entire alarm messages from the object. However the
alarm state is still maintained.
Setup: Brings up the simple alarm configuration window. You can configure
the alarm group, ‘Active Warning’ and ‘Filter’ option.
Config: Brings up the Xpanel Config window.
11-14
Shows or hides the header ‘Alarm Time’. You can assign the width of header,
Alarm Time
from 3 to 50 pixels, and the text. Press [Edit] button to apply the changes.
Shows or hides the header ‘Device Name’. You can assign the width of header,
Device Name
Shows or hides the header ‘Alarm Time’. You can assign the width of header,
Value from 3 to 50 pixels, and the text. You can also configure the decimal points of
the value (0 to 5 decimal points). Press [Edit] button to apply the changes..
Shows or hides the header ‘Alarm Status’. You can assign the width of header,
Alarm Status
from 3 to 50 pixels, and the text. Press [Edit] button to apply the changes..
Shows or hides the header ‘Alarm Description’. You can assign the width of
Alarm
header, from 3 to 50 pixels, and the text. Press [Edit] button to apply the
Description
changes.
Shows or hides the header ‘Ack Time’. You can assign the width of header,
Ack Time
You can enable this option by deselecting the ‘New Item – Alarm Clear’ option.
Clear Time Shows or hides the header ‘Clear Time’. You can assign the width of header,
from 3 to 50 pixels, and the text. Press [Edit] button to apply the changes..
Adds the interest tag to the display. Shows or hides the header ‘Alarm Time’.
You can assign the width of header, from 3 to 50 pixels, and the text. You can
Interest Tag
also configure the decimal points of the value (0 to 5 decimal points). Press
[Add] button to add the tags. You can add up to 14 interest tags.
11-15
Alarm Summary
6
In this section, you can find subroutines frequently used for Alarm. For more detailed
information, please refer to the next section.
Command Description
Subroutine AlarmCsvWr Saves the alarm messages as CSV file.

Subroutine AlarmPrint Prints the alarm messages with printer.
Alarm
Deletes the entire alarm log of the assigned
Subroutine ClearAlarmLog
alarm group.
6
11-16
Functions For Alarm
AlarmCsvWr Saves the alarm messages as CSV file.
Subroutine AlarmCsvWr(AlarmGroup, “CSVFileName”, TimeDisplay, PrintOption, Location)
Saves the messages of AlarmGroup at the assigned Location as CSVFileName.

Enter 0 at Location to indicate the local. Assign 1 for SD/MMC and 2 for USB.
You can also use strings for the Location.
0: _LOCAL_
1: _SDMEM_
2: _USBMEM_
The contents in the CSV file will be displayed with time data according to the
value you assign to the TimeDisplay.
0: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
1: DD/MM/YYY HH:MM:SS
2: MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
Description 3: MM/DD HH:MM:SS

4: DD/MM HH”MM”SS
5: HH:MM:SS
According to the value assigned to the PrintOption, different contents will be
saved. If you wish to select multiple items, distinguish them with vertical bar
( | ).
All Items: _ALMPRT_ALL_ or 511
Time and date: _ALMPRT_TIME_ or 1
Memory Address: _ALMPRT_ADDR_ or 2
Value: _ALMPRT_VALUE_ or 4
Alarm Type: _ALMPRT_TYPE or 8
Alarm Description: _ALMPRT_DESC_ or 16
Saves the all contents of alarm group 1 as "AlmGrp1.CSV" in SD/MMC. The
contents will be displayed with time value in "YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS"

Example
format.
AlarmCsvWr(1, "AlmGrp1", 0, _ALMPRT_ALL_, _SDMEM_);
11-17
Alarm Summary
AlarmPrint Prints the alarm messages with printer.
Subroutine AlarmPrint(AlarmGroup, Messages,TimeDisplay, FontSize, PrintOption)
Prints the content of AlarmGroup as much as the value assigned to Messages

(0~200 messages) with the assigned FontSize (10 or bigger). The time will be
displayed according to the value assigned to the TimeDisplay.
3: MM/DD HH:MM:SS
5: HH:MM:SS
Description
According to the value assigned to the PrintOption, different contents will be
saved. If you wish to select multiple items, distinguish them with vertical bar
( | ).

Prints out the recent 10 messages of alarm group 1.

Example
AlarmPrint(1, 10, 1, 10, _ALMPRT_ALL_);
ClearAlarmLog Deletes the entire alarm log of the assigned alarm group.
Subroutine ClearAlarmLog(AlarmGroup)
Description Deletes the entire alarm log of the assigned AlarmGroup (1~10).
Clears the log of the alarm group 1.

Example
ClearAlarmLog(1)
11-18
11.2.3 Exercise
Exercise : Checking the Alarm Contents with Alarm Summary
a) Select [Tools] – [Alarm] to bring up the [Alarm Configuration] window. Add an

alarms to each alarm group 1 and 2. Configure an alarm with the condition of
“Greater than 200”, and configure another alarm with the condition of “Greater
than 300”. Enter the Alarm Description as “Exceeded 200L” and “Exceeded 300L”.
11-19
Alarm Summary
b) Select [Draw] – [Alarm Summary] and click the page to add two alarm summary
objects. Double-click the object to configure the details such as alarm group to be
displayed.
c) Since the operation will be checked by manually changing the tag value, add an
object to the page and use ‘EntryData’ feature as shown below.
11-20
a) Write the project to Xpanel or execute simulator to check the operation. Input the
value “230” to the ‘STORAGE’ tag. An alarm will only appear on the alarm summary
object which displays the alarm group 1.
b) Input the value “190” to the tag. The existing alarm will be cleared.
11-21
Alarm Summary
c) Input the value “320” to the tag. ‘Exceeded 200L’ and ‘Exceeded 300L’ alarms will
appear on the corresponding alarm summary object.
d) Input the value “270” to the tag. Only the ‘Exceeded 300L’ alarm of alarm group 2
will be cleared.
11-22
12 Writing a Script
12.1 Script
The script of Xpanel uses a programming language that is very similar to C programming
language. In the script, the user can use the variable, call the other programs. Also,
Xpanel Designer provides keywords for flow control such as Switch-Case, For, While, If-
Else, Goto.
Each program is executed in multi-thread environment. Also, all programs are assigned
with their own priority, from level 1 to 10.
12.1.1 Features
 The script is not case-sensitive.

 All tags registered in the Xpanel’s database can be used as variables in the script.
 Two variable types are supported; Real Type and String Type. The variable type is
decided automatically during the program execution. However, you cannot use a
single variable for both real and string data process.
12-1
Script
12.1.2 Settings
Select [Tools] – [Script] or press button to bring up the script editor as shown
below.
Item Description
Adds a new script. [Add Script] window will appear.
Edits the selected script. [Edit Script] window will appear. The window
is same as the [Add Script] window except that the user cannot edit
the script name.
Compiles the selected script. The compile result will appear on the field
marked as [Build].
Compiles the all scripts registered in the project. The compile result will
appear on the field marked as [Build].
Adds a detailed device address to the point where the cursor is
located.
Adds a tag name to the point where the cursor is located.
12-2
Item Description
Script Name Assigns the script name. In case of the [Edit Script] window, this field is disabled.
Selects the running type of the script. When you select the ‘Start Up’, the script
will only be executed once on the project’s startup. When you select the
Running Type
‘Manual’, the script will only be executed once when it is called by the
commands. When you select ‘Period’, the script will executed periodically.
Running Assigns the script execution interval. This option is enabled only when the ‘Period’
Period option is selected. You can assign the interval from 1 to 65535 seconds.
Assigns the priority of the script. The lowest priority is level 1, and the highest
Priority
priority is level 10.
12-3
Script
12.1.3 Program Structure
The script is divided into two parts; Declaration Part and Program Part. The declaration
part is for the declaration of internal variables and input parameters. The program part
includes all program statements except the declaration.
Comment can be entered anywhere in the program. The strings starting with ‘//’, until
the end of the line are treated as comments.
(1) Declaration Part
Item Description
Declares the internal variables in format of VAR variable_name [,

variable_name];.
The initial value of the declared variables are 0. To declare more than
one variables, use comma “ , ” between the variables. You can use
Variable Declaration
several VAR keywords before the program part starts.
The variable name cannot be duplicated with the tag names (Group,
Digital, Analog, String). The duplicated name may cause compile
errors or misoperation.
Declares the input parameters in format of PARAM 1st parameter [, 2nd
parameter …]; .
The input parameter is required when a program is called by the other
program or a command. The declaration order must be identical to
Input Parameter
the order of input parameters. The parameter will be initialized with
Declaration
the values assigned by the caller.
To declare more than one parameters, use comma “ , ” between the
parameters. You can use several PARAM keywords before the
program part starts.
12-4
Program Name: MyPgm

VAR a, b;
VAR c;
PARAM p1, p2;
PARAM p3;
Example
The program MyPgm can be called by the external caller as shown
below.
MyPgm(1,2,3);
In the parameter p1, p2, p3, assigned values (1, 2, 3) will be stored.
The variables a, b, c, will be initialized as 0.
(2) Program part
In the program part, all program statements except the declaration (variables and
parameters) can be used. The example of the most basic statement is the function call,
calculation and storing the result.
Following is a program example with basic statements.
Tag_a = Tag_a + 1;
Tag_b = MyPgm(Tag_a, 2, 3);
Each statement must be marked with “ ; ” at the end. Each function returns a single result
to the caller. The program mentioned above returns the result to the Tab_b.
(3) Constants
When you use constants in the program, you can use the notations as shown below.
Item Description
Octal Constants Uses only from 0 to 7. The octal constant must start with 0. (E.g. 01277)
Decimal
General notation is used. (E.g. 153, 3.14, 2.45E-12)
Constants
Hexadecimal
Starting with ‘0x’, use alphabet or numbers in range of ‘0’-‘F’. (E.g. 0xFFFF)
Constants
Enter the string between the two double-quotation marks (“ ”). (E.g. “String
String Constants
Variable1”)
12-5
Script
You can also utilize the predefined constants as shown below.
Constant Name Value Usage

_PI_ 3.141592… (Value of π)
_LOCAL_ 0 Local Flash Memory
_SDMEM_ 1 SD/MMC Memory
_USBMEM_ 2 USB Memory
_COM232_ 0 Uses COM1 port as RS232C mode.
_COM422_ 1 Uses COM1 port as RS422 mode.
_COMAUX_ 3 Uses COM2 port as RS232C mode.
_BPS300_ 300 bps
_BPS600_ 600bps
_BPS1200_ 1200bps
_BPS2400_ 2400bps
_BPS4800_ 4800bps
_BPS9600_ 9600bps
_BPS19200_ 19200bps
_BPS38400_ 38400bps
_BPS56000_ 56000bps
_BPS57600_ 57600bps
_BPS115200_ 115200bps
_BPS128000_ 128000bps
_BPS256000_ 256000bps
_PARITY_NONE_ NO PARITY BIT
_PARITY_EVEN_ EVEN PARITY
_PARITY_ODD_ ODD PARITY
_PARITY_MARK_ MARK PARITY
_PARITY_SPACE_ SPACE PARITY
_STOPBIT_ONE_ 1 STOP BIT
_STOPBIT_TWO_ 2 STOP BITS
_STOPBIT_ONE5_ 1.5 STOP BIT
12-6
12.1.4 Operator
There are three types of operators that can be used in the programs; Calculation
Operator, Logical/Comparative Operator and Others.
(1) Calculation Operator
In the table below, the calculation result is based on the assumption of variable A is 3
(0000 0000 0000 0011), and the variable B is 4 (0000 0000 0000 0100).
Remainder calculation and all Bitwise calculations will be performed with 32-bit integer
data.
Operator Function Example Description
Each bit of A (0000 0000 0000 0011b) is inverted. The

~ Bitwise invert ~A
result is 1111 1111 1111 1100b.
+ Addition A+B Adds A and B. The result is 7.
- Subtraction A –B Subtracts B from A. The result is -1.
* Multiplication A*B Multiplies A and B. The result is 12.
/ Division A/B Divides A with B. The result is 0.75.
Indicates the remainder from the division of A with B. The

% Remainder A%B
result is 3.
& Bitwise AND A&B Bitwise logical AND calculation of A and B. The result is 0.
Bitwise logical OR calculation of A and B. The result is

| Bitwise OR A|B
0111b (= 7).
Bitwise logical XOR calculation of A and B. The result is

^ Bitwise XOR A^B
0111b (= 7).
Bitwise Shift Shifts the bits of A to the left as much as B. The rightmost
<< A << B
Left part is filled with 0. The result is 0011 0000b (= 48).
Bitwise Shift Shifts the bits of A to the right as much as B. The leftmost
>> A >> B
Right part is filled with 0. The result is 0.
12-7
Script
(2) Logical/Comparative Operator
In the table shown below, the result is a calculation based on the assumption of the
variable A is 1 (True) and the variable B is 0 (False). In the Xpanel, the values other than 0
are all processed as True. Only 0 is recognized as False.
When the calculation result is true, the result is always 1.
&& Logical AND A && B If A and B are true, the result is 1. In other cases, the result is 0.
|| Logical OR A || B If A and B are false, the result is 0. In other cases, the result is 1.
< Less than A<B If A is smaller than B, the result is 1. In other cases, the result is 0.
> Greater than A>B If A is greater than B, the result is 1. In other cases, the result is 0.
Less than or If A is smaller than or equal to B, the result is 1. In other cases, the
<= or =< A <= B
equal to result is 0.
Greater than If A is greater than or equal to B, the result is 1. In other cases, the
>= or => A >= B
or equal to result is 0.
== Equal to A == B If A is equal to B, the result is 1. In other cases, the result is 0.
!= Is not equal to A != B If A is not B, the result is 1. In other cases, the result is 0.
(3) Other Operator
= Store A=B Stores the value B to A and uses it as a result.
The Store (=) operator can be used consecutively.
A = B = C;
In this case, the value of A and B will be set as C. In other words, the value at the
rightmost side of operator will be treated as the result value of “=” operation. The
example mentioned above will be processed internally in the program as shown below.
B←C
A←B
12-8
Because of the characteristics of the “=” operator, a program error may

occur that cannot be detected as shown below. In this case, even the
values of A and B are not equal, the operation result of IF statement can be
True. Also, the operation may cause an unwanted value to be stored in the
A.
//===================
// A Program Error That Cannot Be Detected
//===================
If (A=B) // Misentry of A==B, checking if the value of A and B are same.
{
…
}
12-9
Script
12.1.5 Command and Condition
Under a certain circumstances, it may be necessary to use simple script during the object
configuration. For example, you may enter condition and command to the touch object
as shown below. The conditional and command expressions follows the format of script
programming.
(1) Condition Expression
&& Logical AND A && B If A and B are true, the result is 1. In other cases, the result is 0.
|| Logical OR A || B If A and B are false, the result is 0. In other cases, the result is 1.
< Less than A<B If A is smaller than B, the result is 1. In other cases, the result is 0.
> Greater than A>B If A is greater than B, the result is 1. In other cases, the result is 0.
Less than or If A is smaller than or equal to B, the result is 1. In other cases, the
<= or =< A <= B
equal to result is 0.
Greater than If A is greater than or equal to B, the result is 1. In other cases, the
>= or => A >= B
or equal to result is 0.
== Equal to A == B If A is equal to B, the result is 1. In other cases, the result is 0.
!= Is not equal to A != B If A is not B, the result is 1. In other cases, the result is 0.
12-10
Following is an example of conditional expression.
Example Description
(Tag_A != 1) && If value of Tag_A is not 1 and the Tag_B’s value is 10, returns the result 1. In
(Tab_B == 10) other cases, returns 0.
Sin(Tag_A) == 1 If the sine of Tag_A is 1, returns the result 1. In other cases, returns 0.
Tag_A < 100 If Tag_A is smaller than 100, returns the result 1. In other cases, returns 0.
(Tag_A + Tag_B) < If the sum of Tag_A and Tag_B is smaller than the sum of Tag_A and
(Tag_A + Tag_C) Tag_C, returns the result 1. In other cases, returns 0.
(2) Command Expression
In Xpanel, multiple command expressions can be used. In other words, the command
expression is a special script program. You can also use the functions in the script for
command expression.
The priority of the command expression is different from the scripts. If the operation
condition of the command expression is satisfied, the command takes the highest
priority. It indicates that the other object’s operations are not processed until the current
command operation ends. Especially the function called by the command expression has
the same priority as the command.
For example, when you use RunScript function in the command expression, the called
script will operate in parallel. The command does not wait until the script ends. Instead,
the next command expression will be executed.
Following is an example of command expression.
Example Description
Tag_A = 100;
Sets the value of Tag_A to 100 and opens the page named “NewPage”.
PageOpen(“NewPage”);
Tag_B = Tab_B + 1 Increases the value of Tag_B by 1.
Tag_A = 100; Sets the value of Tag_A and Tag_B to 100 and 1, then execute the
Tag_B = 1; script named MyLoop(). Once the script is executed, the data logging
RunScript MyLoop(); model named “LogModel” will be saved in the SD memory as CSV.
MakeCsv(“LogModel”,1);
12-11
Script
12.1.6 Statements
Following is a table of statements and keywords that can be used in the script.
Type Description
IF-ELSE Statement One of the most frequently used logical decision making statement.
WHILE/DO-WHILE
Statements for the loop process.
Statement
FOR Statement More complex but useful statement for the loop process.
SWITCH-CASE Statement Statement for the different processes according to the several cases.
GOTO Statement A statement that forces the flow of program.
CONTINUE Keyword A keyword used in the loop process.
RETURN Keyword A keyword that designates the value that will be returned to the caller.
RUNSCRIPT Keyword A keyword that calls the external program.
(1) IF-ELSE Statement
IF-ELSE statement is one of the most frequently used logical decision making statement.
The statement can be used in stack as IF-ELSE IF-ELSE IF…. There is no limit in the
statement stack. Also, Else statement can be omitted.
If (A == 1)
{
// A program when A is 1
}
Else
{
// A program when A is not 1
}
12-12
(2) WHILE/DO-WHILE Statement
WHILE/DO-WHILE is a statement for the loop process. The statements below the WHILE
keyword will be repeated while the condition next to the WHILE keyword is True.
A = 0;
While (A<10)
{
// Write the program which will be repeated
// while the WHILE keyword’s condition is True.
// This example will be repeated 10 times.
A = A +1;
}
The subordinate statements may never be executed according to the condition within
the WHILE statement. If you use DO-WHILE statements, you can execute the loop
statement once at least. Then the system will check the condition.
Do {
// Write the loop statement when the condition is True.
// The loop statement will be executed once at least.
} While (A<10); // mark the end of the statement with ‘ ; ’.
(3) FOR Statement
In this statement, all expressions for the initialization, the decision making and the post
loop process is described in a single statement line.
Following is an example of (2) WHILE statement using FOR statement, instead.
For (A=0; A<10; A=A+1)

{
// Write the loop statement.
}
FOR statement is followed by the initialization statement, decision making statement and
the post processing statement.
FOR (Initialization statement; DecisionMaking statement; PostProcessing statement)
12-13
Script
(4) SWITCH-CASE Statement
This statement is used when the different processes are needed within the different
cases. Each case can be distinguished by the unlimited number of the CASE statement.
The number of the case must be constant and terminated with the colon “ : ”. In other
words, you cannot use the tag or expression for the case number. In the SWITCH
statement, only one Default statement can be used.
Default statement does not need a constant. This statement is executed if none of the
cases are to be executed. You can omit the Default statement.
If the flow meets the BREAK keyword during the process, the SWITCH statement will be
terminated. If the flow reaches the different case or default statement without meeting
any BREAK keyword, the corresponding case or default statement will be executed.
Switch (A)
{
Case 1:
// Write the program when A is 1.
Break;
Case 5:
Case 7:
// Write the program when A is 5 or 7.
Break;
Default:
// Write the default program. This section can be omitted.
Break;
}
12-14
(5) GOTO Statement
GOTO statement can change the flow forcibly, This statement uses an index (unique
name starting with “@”) to point out the new location.
The index name must not be duplicated with the variable, tag and program names.
VAR A;
A = 0;
@ComeHere // Assign an index.
If (A < 10)
{
A=A+1
Goto ComeHere; // Move to the assigned index.
}
(6) CONTINUE Keyword
Continue keyword is used in the loop statement. When the system meets the Continue
keyword, the flow moves to the first part of the current loop. This keyword is often used
in the WHILE, DO-WHILE, FOR statements. Especially, when there are multiple decision
making statements (IF-ELSE) in the loop, the keyword is useful.
Following examples have identical operation.
While (A<10)
{
A = A +1;
If (A < 5)
{
// Process when A is less than 5
}
Else
{
// Process when A is greater than or equal to 5
}
}
12-15
Script
While (A<10)
{
A = A +1;
If (A < 5)
{
// Process when A is less than 5
Continue;
}
// Process when A is greater than or equal to 5
}
(7) Return Keyword
Every program returns a result value to the caller. RETURN keyword is used for
designating a return value and termination of the program.
Following example processes three input parameters and returns the sum of them to the
caller.
The name of the program shown below is MyPgm.
PARAM p1, p2, p3;

Return p1+p2+p3;
The program MyPgm will be called in the other program as shown below. Then the
variable ‘RtnValue’ will receive the value ‘6’.
RtnValue = MyPgm(1, 2, 3);
12-16
(8) RUNSCRIPT Keyword
When you call an external program, the caller will be in stand-by mode until the called
program (the external program) ends the operation.
However, if you use RunScript keyword to call an external program, the caller will not
wait the end of the called program. Therefore both caller and called program will be
executed.
If (A == 0)
RunScript NewThread(); // Executes an external program (NewThread)
A = A + 1; // Continues the rest of the program immediately.
12.1.7 Internal Functions
In Xpanel Script, there are three types of functions that can be used; Trigonometric
Functions, Other Mathematic Functions and Special Functions.
The Trigonometric function returns the value such as Sine, Cosine, Tangent of the
assigned real-number parameters.
The Other Mathematic Functions returns the value such as Log, Absolute value, Square
value of the assigned real-number parameters.
The Special Functions controls the Xpanel project’s features or the project itself. There are
functions called ‘Subroutine’ in this category.
※ Please refer to the ‘Script (Appendix)’ for the detailed information.
12-17
Script
12.1.8 Exercise
Exercise : Using Rotation Feature Periodically

You can move the second hand of the clock with the script.
(1) Object Configuration
a) Register an analog tag named ‘ROTATE_SEC’.
12-18
b) Double-click the second hand object to bring up the [Object Configuration]

window. Select the [Rotate] feature and configure the object as shown below.
c) In the [Rotate] tab, you have to assign the ‘Center Point’. To find the coordinate,
place the mouse cursor on the center point. You will find the coordinate at the
right-bottom of the Xpanel Designer.
12-19
Script
(2) Script
a) Select [Tools] – [Script] – [New Script] button to bring up the [Add Script] window.
Set the running type as ‘Period’ then set the period as 1 sec.
b) Write the script as shown below. When the value of the “ROTATE_SEC” reaches or
exceeds 360, the script will store 6 to the tag to continue the rotation. The object
will rotate 6° per second.
12-20
VAR A; //Declare variable A

A=ROTATE_SEC; //Save ROTATE_SEC value to A
IF(A>=360)
{
ROTATE_SEC=6; //ROTATE_SEC becomes 6 when it reaches 360
}
ELSE
{
ROTATE_SEC=A+6; //Object rotates 6 degrees per sec
}
c) Compile the script to finish the programming.
a) Write the project to Xpanel or execute the project with simulator. You will find that
the second hand object rotates each second.
12-21
I/O Device
13 I/O Device
To acquire data from the local devices, Xpanel needs to register the local devices to the
project. “I/O device” function allows the Xpanel to communicate with the local devices
and manage the data with the “Database”.
Xpanel supports approximately 90 communication drivers, categorized by serial

communication (RS232/422/485) and Ethernet communication (UDP/TCP).
13.1 Settings
In this section, you will be guided to configure the common items of the I/O device, Serial
communication and Ethernet communication.
13.1.1 I/O Device Configuration
Select [Tools] – [I/O Devices] or press icon to bring up the following window.
Item Description
Edit Brings up the configuration window of the selected I/O device.

Adds a new I/O device. Press this button to bring up the [I/O Device
New Device
Selection] window.
Delete Deletes the selected I/O device.
13-1
(1) I/O Device Selection
Press [New Device] to bring up the [I/O Device Selection] window.
Item Description
Designate the name of the I/O device. Once you enter the device name
and press [OK], you will not be able to edit the device name.
I/O Device Name
You cannot enter the device name with special characters such as “!”, “@”,
“~”, etc. However, you may use “_” for the device name.
I/O Device Type Select the type of the target device. Select Serial or Ethernet.
13-2
I/O Device
13.1.2 Ethernet Communication Configuration
When you designate the device name and select Ethernet communication device, a
window will be brought up as shown below.
(1) Communication port
Item Description
Device Type Select the target device’s protocol.

Enter the local device’s IP Address. This field is enabled only when the local
IP Address
device is CM- NP/iNP.
Protocol Select the Ethernet protocol to use. You can select UDP/IP or TCP/IP.
Network ID Enter the network ID if required by the device protocol.
Node ID Enter the node ID if required by the device protocol.
Timeout is a feature to set the standard of communication fail and success. If
Time Out the requested frame is not received in the assigned time, it will be processed
as communication failure. This option is not applied if the protocol is TCP/IP.
Retry No. Assign the number of communication retries after the communication failure.
Initialize the Tx
Select this option to initialize the Tx frames that are registered during the
Frame When
timeout period.
Timeout Occurs
Dynamic IP Select this option if you use dynamic IP.
※ Refer to each driver’s manual for detailed configuration method.
13-3
(2) Station
Assign the configuration items of the target device.
Item Description
Edit Brings up the configuration window of the selected station.

Delete Deletes the selected station.
Configures the target device’s communication items.
Designate the station’s name. You cannot enter the special
Station Name
characters.
Select the station type. Different station types are provided
Station Type according to the device type you have selected in the
[Communication Port] tab.
Network ID Enter the network ID if required by the protocol.
Add Station Node ID Enter the node ID if required by the protocol.
Unit ID Enter the unit ID if required by the protocol.
IP Address Enter the target device’s IP address.
Socket Port No. Enter the socket port number of the target device.
16Bit Data Swaps the upper and lower byte of word data (16-bit)
Swap during the communication.
32Bit Data Swaps the upper and lower word of double-word data
Swap (32-bit) during the communication.
13-4
I/O Device
String Data Supported by some of the communication drivers.

Swap Swaps bytes of the string data.
Select this option to pop-up the communication error
message.
Comm. Error
Message Pop
Up
Select this option to use fast mode. This option is enabled

Fast Mode
according to the station type.
Fixed XPANEL
Select this option to fix the socket port number of Xpanel.
Socket Port
Xpanel Socket
Assign the socket port number of Xpanel.
Port No.
13-5
13.1.3 Serial Communication Configuration
When you designate the device name and select Serial communication device, a window
will be brought up as shown below.
(1) Communication Port
Item Description
Device Type Select the protocol of the target device.

Select the COM port to be used at the local device (Xpanel). Each COM
port may support different communication method according to the
Comm. Port
model. You can assign the COM port number up to COM255. Refer to the
table below for more information.
13-6
I/O Device
Assign the baud rate. You can select the rate from 300 to 115,200 bps.
Baud Rate
The rate must be identical to the target device’s configuration.
Parity Determines the usage of parity bit. You can select none, even or odd.
Assign the size of the data bits. This option must be equal to the target
device’s configuration. 5~7 bits provide faster communication speed but
Data Bits
generate the errors if the data contains Korean characters.
If Korean characters are included in the frames, select 8-bit option.
Select bit data to determine the data length by 1-byrte unit. You can select
Stop Bits 1 or 2 bits option. This option must be identical to the setting of the target
device.
Select this option to control the data flow. RTS is a signal of the device that
RTS/CTS can receive the data. CTS is a signal of the device that can send the data.
Select an option according to the target device.
Select the communication type according to the target device. You can
Comm. Type
select RS232, RS422 and RS485.
Assign the number of communication retries after the communication
Retry No.
failure.
If the requested frame is not received in the assigned time, it will be
TimeOut
processed as communication failure.
Local ID Enter the local ID if required by the device protocol.
Network Opt. Assign the network option if required by the device protocol.
Select this option if you are using the modem.
Telephone No. Enter the number of the modem.
Init Command Enter the initialization command if necessary.
Using Dial Up
Assign the number of communication retries after the
Modem Dial Retry No.
dial failure.
If the requested frame is not received in the assigned
Dial Time Out
time, it will be processed as communication failure.
Using Transmission
Assign the time to delay the data transmission from the Xpanel.
Delay
Initialize the Tx
Select this option to initialize the Tx frames that are registered during the
Frame When
timeout period.
Timeout Occurs
※ Refer to the corresponding driver manual for the configuration.
13-7
Following is a communication types supported by each COM ports of Xpanel models.
XT04 XT07 XT08 XT10 XT12 XT15
COM1 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS422/485 RS422/485 RS422/485

COM2 RS422/485 RS422/485 RS422/485 RS232 RS232 RS232
COM3 - - - RS232 RS232 RS232
(2) Station
Enters the configuration of the target device.
Item Description
Edit Brings up the configuration window of the selected station.

Delete Deletes the selected station.
13-8
I/O Device
Enter the configuration of the target I/O device.

Station Name Enter the station’s name. You cannot use special characters.
Select the target device’s type. Different station types will
Station Type be displayed according to the device type you have
assigned in the [Communication Port] tab.
Network ID Enter the network ID if required by the device protocol.
Station No. Enter the station number of the target device.
16Bit Data Swaps the upper and lower byte of word data (16-bit)
Swap during the communication.
32Bit Data Swaps the upper and lower word of double-word data
Swap (32-bit) during the communication.
Add Station String Data Supported by some of the communication drivers.

Swap Swaps bytes of the string data.
Using
Communicates with the checksum of the protocol.
CheckSum
Select this option to pop-up the communication error
message.
Comm. Error
Message Pop
Up
13-9

7
In this section, you can find functions and subroutines frequently used for I/O Device.
For more detailed information, please refer to the next section.
Command Description
Function OpenPort Opens the serial port.

Function ClosePort Closes the serial port.
Function SendByte Sends byte data with the selected port.
Function SendString Sends string data with the selected port.
Communication Function ReceiveByte Receives data with the selected port.
Checks the selected station’s

Function GetCommStatus
communication status.
Controls the selected station’s

Subroutine EnableDriver
communication.
 EnableDriver() command only supports MODBUS RTU.

(XpanelDesigner V2.52)
 GetCommStatus() command can only be used in the XpanelDesigner
V2.52 or above.
7
13-10
I/O Device
PortNo., BaudRate, Parity, Stop Bit use predefined constants. Refer to the table shown
below for the details.

_BPS300_ 300 bps
_BPS600_ 600bps
_BPS1200_ 1200bps
_BPS2400_ 2400bps
_BPS4800_ 4800bps
_BPS9600_ 9600bps
_BPS19200_ 19200bps
_BPS38400_ 38400bps
_BPS56000_ 56000bps
_BPS57600_ 57600bps
_BPS115200_ 115200bps
_BPS128000_ 128000bps
_BPS256000_ 256000bps
13-11
OpenPort Opens the serial port.
Function n=OpenPort(PortNo., BaudRate, Parity, Data Bit, Stop Bit)

PortNo. (use predefined constant, _COMxxx_)
BaudRate (use predefined constant, _BPSxxx_)
Parity (use predefined constant, _PARITY_xxx_)
Data Bit (7 or 8)
Stop Bit (use predefined constant, _STOPBIT_xxx_)
Description This function opens the assigned serial port. You cannot use this function if
the port has already been opened.
Once you opened the COM port with the script, it has to be closed with
ClosePort() function.
When an error occurs during the port opening, the script will return 0. If the
port is successfully opened, the script will return the value other than 0.
Opens COM1 port with following options; RS485, 19200bps, No Parity, Data
Example Bit 8, Stop Bit 1.
OpenPort(_COM485_, _BPS19200_, _PARITY_NONE_, 8, _STOPBIT_ONE_);
ClosePort Closes the serial port.
Function n=ClosePort(PortNo.)
Closes the assigned serial port which is opened by the OpenPort() function.
Description
When an error occurs during the port closing, the script will return 0. If the
port is successfully closed, the script will return the value other than 0.
Closes COM1 port.

Example
ClosePort(_COM485_);
13-12
I/O Device
SendByte Sends byte data with the selected port.
Function n=SendByte(PortNo., Data)

Data (0~255)
This function is used when you wish to transmit a data with the COM port which
is opened by OpenPort() function.
Data must be a byte data in the range of 0(0x00) to 255(0xFF). If the data is
Description
greater than 255(0xFF), only the lower byte will be transmitted.
For example, if you assign Data with 0x1234, only 0x34 will be transmitted.
OpenPort() function must be used before the execution of SendByte() function.
If an error occurs during the data transmission, the script will return 0.
If the data is successfully transmitted, the script will return the value other than 0.
Transmits byte data “2” through COM1 port which uses RS485 communication.
Example
SendByte(_COM485_, 2);
SendString Sends string data with the selected port.
Function SendString(PortNo., Data)

Data (Enter the String Tag or “String”)
This function is used when you wish to transmit a data with the COM port which
is opened by OpenPort() function.
The Data must be assigned with string tag or string data. If you use the string
Description data, it must be used with double quotation marks. (“ “)
OpenPort() function must be used before the execution of SendString()
function.
If the data is successfully transmitted, the script will return the value other than 0.
Transmits byte data “TEXT” through COM1 port which uses RS485
Example communication.
SendString(_COM485_, “TEXT”);
13-13
ReceiveByte Receives data with the selected port.
Function ReceiveByte(PortNo., Data)

Data (0~255)
This function is used when you wish to receive a data with the COM port
which is opened by OpenPort() function.
Description
Once you receive the data successfully, the Data (0~255) will be stored in the
variable. If there is no received data until the timeout, the script will return 256.
OpenPort() function must be used before the execution of ReceiveByte()

function.
Receives byte data through the COM1 port which uses RS485
communication. Saves the received data at the variable ‘RxData’.
VAR RxData;
OpenPort(_COM485_, _BPS19200_, _PARITY_NONE_, 8, _STOPBIT_ONE_);
Example RxData = RecieveByte(_COM485_, 1000);

If(RxData < 256)
{
}
……
GetCommStatus Checks the selected station’s communication status.
Function GetCommStatus(“DeviceName”, “StationName”)
Returns the status of the assigned DeviceName ‘s StationName.. If the

Description communication is normal, the script will return 1. If there is an error at the
communication, the script will return 0.
Checks the communication status of the device “PLC”’s station “STATION”.

Example
CommStatus = GetCommStatus(“PLC”,”STATION);
13-14
I/O Device
EnableDriver Controls the selected station’s communication.
Subroutine EnableDriver(“DeviceName”, “StationName”, Enable/Disable)
Controls the communication of the assigned DeviceName ‘s StationName.

Enter 1 to Enable/Disable to enable the communication. Enter 0 to disable the
Description
communication.
This function only supports MODBUS RTU at Xpanel Designer V2.52.
Enables the station “STATION “ of “MODBUS” device.

Example
EnableDriver(“MODBUS”, “STATION”, 1);
13-15
13.3 Exercise
Exercise : Connecting to CIMON PLC through Ethernet
(1) I/O Device Configuration
a) Select [Tools] – [I/O Devices] and press [New Device] button. Enter the device’s
name and select “Ethernet Communication Device” as shown below.
13-16
I/O Device
b) In the [Communication Port] tab, select the device type. In this example, select
‘CIMON-PLC’. Go to [Station] tab and press the [Add Station] button.
c) In the [Station] window, enter the station name, type, address, etc. Press [OK]
button to finish the configuration.
13-17
a) To receive the data from PLC, register a real tag to the database. Go to database
and create an analog tag as shown below.
b) To express the tag value, select [Draw] – [Dynamic Tag] and click on the page.
Configure the object as shown below and press [OK].
13-18
I/O Device
a) In the CICON software, create the program as shown below and download it to the
PLC. The program saves the random number at D0.
b) Write the program to the Xpanel and execute it. When M00 contact goes ON, you
will find that the value stored in D0 changes.
13-19
14 Data Server
14.1 Xpanel Data Server
Xpanel is capable of transmitting the tag values to CIMON-SCADA through Ethernet. For
this function, Xpanel provides two memory areas: Data Memory and String Memory.
Each memory area is composed of 5,000 buffers, using them to communicate with
CIMON-SCADA.
To use this function, Xpanel must be configured with fixed IP address.
14.1.1 Settings
Select [Tools] – [Data Server] – [Xpanel Data Server] or press button to bring up the
configuration window as shown below.
Item Description
Registers a tag for the data server.

Edits the selected tag.
Deletes the selected tag.
Displays the tags registered in the data memory area. The tags support
floating-point number.
Displays the tags registered in the string memory area. Only string tags can
be registered.
14-1
Xpanel Data Server
(1) Data Memory
Select [Data(D) Memory] in the tree structure and press button to bring up the
Item Description
Designate an address to be used in the CIMON-SCADA. The address will be

DataSever
displayed in format of D + address.
Addr.
E.g.) D0000, D0001 … D4999
Assign an address of the target device to be used as data server tag. You can
Addr select the data type (Bit/Word) and press button to configure the detailed
address.
Assign a digital/analog tag to be used as data server tag. Press button to
Tag
browse the tags or you can manually enter the tag name.
(2) String Memory
Select [String(S) Memory] in the tree structure and press button to bring up the
14-2
Item Description
Designate an address to be used in the CIMON-SCADA. The address will be

DataSever
displayed in format of S + address.
Addr.
E.g.) S0000, S0001 … S4999
Assign an address of the target device to be used as data server tag. You can
Addr only assign string data type and press button to configure the detailed
address.
Assign a string tag to be used as data server tag. Press button to browse
Tag
the tags or you can manually enter the tag name.
If you register a data server tag with device address, a real tag will be created in the
database with the corresponding information. The device name and the station name
will be the group tag, while the device address and the data type are used as tag name.
14-3
Xpanel Data Server
Configuration in CIMON-SCADA
To properly use the Xpanel Data Server function, you must configure the CIMON-
SCADA.
Configuring CIMON-SCADA
a) In CimonD, select [Tools] – [I/O Device]. Press [New Device] to bring up the [I/O
Device Selection] window as shown below. Select ‘CIMON-XPANEL Ethernet’ and
designate a name of the device.
14-4
b) In the next window, press [Add Station] to enter the configuration of the Xpanel.
Press [IP Addr.] to enter the target device’s IP address. Then assign scan time, time
out, etc.
c) Press [Add COM Block] button to assign a data block for the communication.
14-5
Xpanel Data Server
d) Go to [COM Port] tab and enter the local PC’s address.
e) Register a real tag according to the COM block’s data range.
f) Execute CimonX to check the operation.
14-6
14.1.3 Exercise
Exercise : Connecting to CIMON-SCADA with Ethernet
(1) Data Server Configuration
a) Select [Tools ] – [Database] to create the tags for the communication with CIMON-
SCADA. Create analog, digital, string virtual tags.
b) Select [Tools] – [Data Server] – [Xpanel Data Server] and add analog/digital tag to
the [Data(D) Memory]. In [Sting(S) Memory], add string tag.
14-7
Xpanel Data Server
c) To check the tag value in the pages, add dynamic tag objects to the page.
(2) CimonD Configuration
a) Execute CIMON-SCADA and add COM block to the I/O device as shown below.
b) Select [Tools] – [Database] and register real tags with address D0, D1 and S0. Set
D0 as a digital tag, D1 as an analog tag and S0 as a string tag.
14-8
a) Write the project to Xpanel and execute the CimonX. Enter values to the DIG, ANA,
STR tags.
b) You can check the network is operating properly.
14-9
MODBUS Slave
14.2 MODBUS Slave
Xpanel device has an individual memory for the MODBUS Slave operation. If there is a
request from Master, through the memory, the Slave will respond with the frame
containing data in the memory. You can use MODBUS RTU and TCP communication
with this function. This function supports general MODBUS protocol.
The memory for MODBUS consists of Coils (Max. Size: 5,000) and Holding Register
(Max. Size: 10,000). You can register only digital tags to the Coils area. In Holding
Register area, you can register analog and string tags.
14.2.1 Settings
Select [Tools] – [Data Server] – [Modbus Slave] or double-click button

to bring up the window as shown below.
Item Description
Adds tags to the Coils and Holding Register area. You cannot add
the tags in ‘Communication Channel’ folder. If you select an existing
communication channel and press this button, you can only add
string tags.
Edits the selected tag.
Deletes the selected tag.
Adds a communication channel for MODBUS Slave. This button is
enabled only when you select the ‘Communication Channel’ folder.
You can register up to 3 channels.
Edits the selected communication channel.
Deletes the selected communication channel
14-10
Registers the communication channel. The added channels will be

displayed at the bottom of the folder icon.
Shows or adds the tags in the Coils area.
Shows or adds the tags in the Holding Register.
(1) Communication Channel
When you select [Communication Channel] in the tree structure and press button,
configuration window will appear as shown below.
Item Description
Selects the MODBUS Slave type. You can select MODBUS RTU or MODBUS TCP.
Slave Type
When you select MODBUS TCP, you can only configure Unit No. and Socket No.
Unit No. Assigns the Slave’s unit number.
Assigns the Slave’s socket port number. The default socket is 502. It is
Socket No. recommended to change the socket number only in case of the communication
failure.
PORT Assigns COM port to use MODBUS RTU Slave.
Baud Rate Configures baud rate. (300bps ~ 256,000bps)
MODE Selects one from the following communication modes: RS232, RS422, RS485.
Parity Determines whether to use parity bit or not.
Determines the data bit. You can select an option among 5~8bits. If there is a
Data Bits
Korean data, please select 8-bit option.
Stop Bit(s) Determines the number of stop bits between the frames.
RTS/CTS Determines whether to use RTS/CTS or not.
14-11
MODBUS Slave
(2) Coils Area
Select [Coils Area] and press button to bring up the configuration window as
shown below.
Item Description
Assign a MODBUS address for the device address or tag.

Modbus In Coils area, the address starts from 00001. The most significant digit “0”
Address indicates the function code, which does not have a numerical value.
E.g.) 00001, 00002 … 05000
Assigns a device address for the current MODBUS Slave address. You can only
Address
register bit data. Press button to configure the detailed device address.
Assigns a digital tag for the current MODBUS Slave address. You can only add
TagName the digital tag. Press button to browse the tag or you can manually enter
the tag name.
(3) Holding Register Area
Select [Holding Register Area] and press button to bring up the configuration
Item Description
Assign a MODBUS address for the device address or tag.

Modbus In Holding Register area, the address starts from 40001. The most significant
Address digit “4” indicates the function code, which does not have a numerical value.
E.g.) 40001, 40002 … 410000
Assigns a device address for the current MODBUS Slave address. You can
Address register word and string data. Press button to configure the detailed device
address.
14-12
Assigns a digital tag for the current MODBUS Slave address. You can add the
TagName analog and string tag. Press button to browse the tag or you can manually
enter the tag name.
If the tag or device address which is assigned to Holding Register has

longer data type than a word data, (e.g. UINT32, INT32, Float, etc.) or is a
string data, corresponding word addresses will be allocated.
E.g.) UINT32 data is assigned to Holding Register address 1
= Holding Register address 1~2 are assigned for the UINT32 data.
If you assigned device address for the MODBUS Slave address, a real tag will be created
with the corresponding information, in the database. Device name and station name will
be the group tag and the tag will be registered in the group tag.
14-13
MODBUS Slave
Xpanel MODBUS Channel Config.
When MODBUS RTU feature is used in the project, you can check and set the related
communication settings in the Xpanel device.
In the [Xpanel Config] window, select [Modbus] to bring up the window as shown
below.
In case of the MODBUS TCP, the window will appear with all fields that are disabled. The
Xpanel device will communicate with the Ethernet IP which is configured in the Ethernet
Loader or Comm. Config.
14-14
Configuration in CICON
After configuring the MODBUS Slave in Xpanel Designer, you can connect the CIMON-
PLC to Xpanel with the configuration in CICON software. Following is an example of
PLCS configuration for the communication.
CICON Configuration
a) Create a project that uses PLCS CPU. Press [File] – [New Program] and select
MODBUS/TCP Master. If you are using serial communication, select MOBUS/RTU
Master.
14-15
MODBUS Slave
b) Press [New] to configure the target device’s (Slave’s) settings such as IP address, Port
Number, Timeout and Status Code Device. Press [OK} to finish the configuration.
c) Press [Add] button to add the communication block as shown below.
14-16
d) After adding a communication block, select [Tool] – [PLC Parameter] – [Modbus] to

set the device addresses for the communication. Then go to [Ethernet] tab to enter
the configuration of the PLC. If you are using serial communication, go to [Channel
1] or [Channel 2] tab.
14-17
MODBUS Slave
14.2.3 Exercise
Exercise : Connecting to PLCS with Ethernet
(1) MODBUS Slave Configuration
a) Select [Tools] – [Data-Server] – [Modbus Slave] to add the communication channel

as shown below.
b) Add digital device address to [Coils Area]. Add analog device address to [Holding
Register Area]. The device addresses are assigned as shown below.
14-18
c) Add dynamic tag objects to the page to display the tag values.
(2) CICON Configuration
a) In CICON software, add a communication program and set parameters as shown

below. For more detailed information, please refer to [Related Features] –
[Configuration in CICON].
b) Add a scan program and configure the program as shown below. The program
saves random number at D0, and 1 at Y00 each time the M949 turns ON.
14-19
MODBUS Slave
a) Write the project to Xpanel and execute it. Download the programs and
parameters to PLCS.
b) Check the values in Xpanel. You can check the Tx/Rx frames by selecting [Frame
Monitor] in Xpanel Config. Window.
c) You can find that the communication is operating normal as shown below.
14-20
15 Data Bridge
XPANEL can act as a bridge and allow exchange of data between other devices. Devices
that are connected to different Serial ports, or Serial and Ethernet ports can exchange
data.

 Please note that excessive use of data bridge function can cause delays
in PLC communication.
15.1 Settings
To bring up the data bridge editor window, double-click ‘Data Bridge’ in the project
workspace. You may also select [Tools] – [Data Bridge] or icon for the same
command.
(1) Add Data Bridge Model
Adds a new data bridge model. Item settings will depends on the model type.
 Common
Item Description
Model Name Enter the model name in the text field. Duplicated name is not allowed.
Select the method to synchronize each device data. You can exchange data
Model Type
based on tag, block, and system memory.
15-1
Data Bridge
 Tag based model
Item Description
Select model type as ‘Tag base’. Source and destination data will be exchanged
Model Type by tag unit. This method is used when the number of data for synchronizing is
(Tag Base) small. You must add source and destination tag (address) after the model
settings.
Select the method to synchronize the data.
Source and destination data are synchronized immediately when
Always
source data is changed.
Sync.
Source and destination data are synchronized when triggering tag
Properties Trigger
is set. You can register the analog or digital tag.
Source and destination data are synchronized at the specified
Periodically
intervals. You can assign intervals from 1 to 10000000 seconds.
Through the data bridge function, data is processed in seconds even the
real data in PLC is processed in milliseconds.
15-2
 Block based model
Item Description
Select model type as ‘Block base’. Source and destination data will be
Model Type
exchanged by Block unit. This method is used when transfer consecutive
(Block Base)
address data to the destination.
Source and destination data are synchronized when triggering
Trigger
tag is set. You can register the analog or digital tag.
Sync. Properties
Periodically intervals. You can assign intervals from 1 to 10000000
seconds.
Enter the consecutive address size (block size) for the block. This address size
Block Size will be based on the data type at the starting block. If the block starts with a
DWord (INT, UINT, Float), the address data size will be counted as DWord.
Source Block
Enter the starting tag or address of the continuous addresses.
Start Addr / Tag
Source
This is used to internally when Xpanel reads the data. You must enter the
Handshake Start
digital tag including same I/O device assignment with source block.
Addr / Tag
Destination Block Enter the destination start tag or address for receiving block data from the
Start Addr / Tag source.
Destination
This is used to internally when Xpanel sends the data. You must enter the
Handshake Start
digital tag including same I/O device assignment with destination block.
Addr / Tag
15-3
Data Bridge
 Data bridge for uploading device data to system memory
Item Description
Model Type
Select model type as ‘Upload data to sys-mem’. This model reads data from
(Upload Data to
source to Xpanel’s system memory and synchronizes it.
Sys-mem)
Source and destination data are synchronized when triggering
Trigger
tag is set. You can register the analog or digital tag.
Sync. Properties
Periodically intervals. You can assign intervals from 1 to 10000000
seconds.
Enter the consecutive address size (block size) for the block. This address size
Block Size will be based on the data type at the starting block. If the block starts with a
DWord (INT, UINT, Float), the address data size will be counted as DWord.
Source Block Start Enter the starting tag or address of the continuous addresses. Source block
Addr / Tag transfers data from source PLC to the destination PLC.
Source
This is used to internally when Xpanel reads the data. You must enter the
Handshake Start
digital tag including same I/O device assignment with source block.
Addr / Tag
Assign the start address of system memory for receiving data. Source data is
Start Address of
transferred to the start address and ends at the location determined by the
System Memory
block size.
15-4
 Data bridge for downloading device data from system memory
Item Description
Model Type
Select model type as ‘Download data from sys-mem’. You may write
(Download Data
system memory data to the destination device.
from Sys-mem)
Source and destination data are synchronized when
Trigger triggering tag is set. You can register the analog or digital
Sync. Properties tag.
Source and destination data are synchronized at the
Periodically specified intervals. You can assign intervals from 1 to
10000000 seconds.
Enter the consecutive address size (block size) for the block. This address
size will be based on the data type at the starting block. If the block starts
Block Size
with a DWord (INT, UINT, Float), the address data size will be counted as
DWord.
Destination Block Enter the start address of destination device. The destination block receives
Start Addr / Tag data from Xpanel’s system memory.
Destination This is used internally when Xpanel writes data to the destination device.
Handshake Start You must enter the digital tag including same I/O device assignment with
Addr / Tag destination block.
Assign the start address of system memory for transferring data. System
Start Address of
memory data is transferred to the destination and ends at the location
System Memory
determined by the block size.
15-5
Data Bridge
(2) Edit Data Bridge Model
Modifies the selected model. Model type cannot be changed.
(3) Delete Data Bridge Model
Deletes the selected model.
(4) Add Data Bridge Tag
When the model type is ‘Tag Base’, you must add source and destination tag (address)
for exchanging data.
Item Description
Original Addr / Tag Enter the tag name or address of source device to receive data.
Target Addr / Tag Enter the tag name or address of destination device to transfer data.
(5) Edit Data Bridge Tag
Modifies the selected original and target tag (address).
(6) Delete Data Bridge Tag
Deletes the original and target tag (address) from the tag based model.
15-6
15.2 Example
Example : Exchanging PLC value by data bridge function

In this section, you will register tag based model and transfer the value in PLC A to the
PLC B. Each PLC is connected by Serial and Ethernet, and both of them are
communicating with the Xpanel.
a) Enter the device name as ‘PLC A’ and ‘PLC B’ in the [Tools]-[I/O Device]. Each will
registered by Serial device and Ethernet Device.
b) Create tags which are indicating points in each PLC. Enter the I/O addresses as
‘D100’ in ‘PLC A’ and ‘D200’ in ‘PLC B’.
15-7
Data Bridge
c) Go to [Tools]-[Data Bridge] and add a data bridge model. Select model type as ‘Tag
Base’ and ‘Sync.’ as ‘Always’. When the value of PLC A changes, the value of PLC B
will be matched with it immediately.
d) Add a tag to synchronize the value. Enter the each tag name as ‘PLCA.D100’ in the
original tag and ‘PLCB.D200’ in the target tag.
15-8
e) Launch the project in the Xpanel. You may see PLC A value is transferred to the PLC
B via data bridge.
15-9
Recipe
16 Recipe
A recipe is a collection of data that can be easily changed with the user’s pre-defined
values. For example, in a vehicle production factory that produces different types of
vehicles, the operator can easily modify the ingredient data values to change between
different option profiles. The recipe settings can be simply created, modified, or deleted
during production. Also, recipe data can be imported and exported during runtime.

 Please check the type of PLC communication driver that supports the
Recipe feature.
16.1 Settings
To bring up the Recipe editor window, double-click ‘Recipe’ in the project workspace.
You may also select [Tools] – [Recipe] or icon for the same command.
16-1
(1) Add Recipe Model
Item Description
Enter the model name in the text field. The duplicated name is not
Model Name
allowed.
Recipes use consecutive addresses for PLCs. Enter the starting address in
Recipe Area Start the ‘Recipe area start position’. Direct address or tag names can be used.
Position The address or tag data must be in Word or DWord (INT, UINT, Float)
format. All address or tag data must be the same type.
‘Data number’ indicates the number of data items used in each group. You
Data Number
can assign from 1 to 10000 for data items.
‘Group number’ indicates the unit for saving setting values. A single group
can include many data items , and each group comprises different
Group Number
settings. When the group is changed, the overall settings will be switched.
You can assign from 1 to 1024 for group numbers.
The Xpanel recipe system takes care of the handshaking process
Handshake automatically. You may assign addresses or tags not using in the PLC for
handshaking. Only real tags can be used in handshake process.
16-2
Recipe
Enter an analog tag or address. This is used to control

Word uploading and downloading. You can assign Word or DWord
data format.
Enter a digital tag or address, This is used to check state of
Bit
downloading and uploading.
Group Enter an analog tag or address. This is used to store the
Number current recipe group number by PLC request.
If you modify values and upload or download group data from a PLC, the
recipe group settings will be changed. Changes will remain in the Xpanel
Automatically File
memory until power is On; they will recovered when power is turned off.
Store On PLC
This indicates that modified setting should be saved to the recipe setting
Managed Upload
file in order to keep changes. If this option is enabled, changes of PLC data
will be saved to the Xpanel memory automatically.
(2) Edit Recipe Model
Modifies the selected recipe model. Alternatively, you can edit the model by double-
clicking the model name.
(3) Delete Recipe Model
Deletes the selected recipe model from the project.
(4) Edit Group Name
Modifies the selected group name. Enter the new group name and press [OK] to change
the text.
16-3
(5) Edit Data Name
Modifies the selected data name. Enter the new data name and press [OK] to change
the text.
(6) Upload Recipe Data from Xpanel
Uploads the recipe model data from Xpanel. You may connect USB or Ethernet to
receive data.
16-4
Recipe

8
In this section, you can find functions and subroutines frequently used for Recipe. Please
refer to the table below for applicable functions/subroutines. For more detailed
information of each function and subroutine, please refer to the next section.
Command Description
Displays the recipe settings window in Xpanel

Subroutine RcpConfig
runtime.
Subroutine RcpFileRead Reads the group data from recipe data file.
Subroutine RcpFileStore Saves the model group data in the recipe file.
Downloads the model group data from

Subroutine RcpMemDown
Xpanel to PLC.
Receives the data from PLC and saves at the

Subroutine RcpMemUp
model group data in Xpanel.
Recipe
Subroutine RcpDownLoad Downloads model group data to the PLC.
Subroutine RcpUpLoad Reads PLC data and save it to the recipe file.
Reads recipe model group data (*.csv file) and

Subroutine RcpCsvRd
saves it in the memory.
Saves model group data in the memory as a

Subroutine RcpCsvWr
csv file format.
Copies one block of system memory to

Subroutine RcpGetSysMem
Xpanel memory.
8
16-5
Copies data in Xpanel memory and pastes to

Subroutine RcpSetSysMem
the system memory.
Returns the recipe group name which has

Function GetRcpDnGroup
downloaded recently.
Subroutine RcpNewGroupName Changes the recipe group name.
Function GetRcpGroupName Returns the recipe group name.
Function GetRcpItemName Returns the name of recipe data.
16-6
Recipe
Functions for Recipe

RcpConfig Displays the recipe settings window in Xpanel runtime.
Subroutine RcpConfig()
Brings up the recipe dialog box which contains functions for controlling the
recipe operation.
Item Description
Model Changes current recipe model.
Group Changes current group to another group.
You may change the data name and setting values by
Description Group List
double-clicking on each item.
Saves modified group data in a recipe file (*.rcx). This
Save
command is the same as RcpFileStore().
Close Quits from the recipe dialog box.
Reads data from the PLC and save it in recipe model group
Upload
data. This command is the same as RcpMemUp().
Sends recipe model group data to the PLC. This command is
Download
the same as RcpMemDownload().
You can browse CSV file to retrieve model group data. This
CSV Read
command is the same as RcpCsvRd().
You can save current model group data as a CSV file. This
CSV Write
command is the same as RcpCsvWr().
If this option has enabled during pressing ‘CSV Read’ button,
Replace
selected group name will be replaced with name of CSV file
Groupname
to read.
Enter the command to display the recipe dialog box.
Example
RcpConfig();
16-7
RcpFileRead Reads the group data from recipe data file.

Subroutine RcpFileRead(“Model Name”, Group Number)
Description Reads the specified group data from the recipe data file.
Enter the command to read first group data of ‘ICECREAM’ model from recipe
Example data file.
RcpFileRead(“ICECREAM”, 1);
RcpFileStore Saves the model group data in the recipe file.
Subroutine RcpFileStore(“Model Name”, Group Number)

Saves the specified group data in the recipe data file. This subroutine is the
Description
same as ‘Save’ button of recipe dialog box.
Enter the command to save first group data of ‘ICECREAM’ model to the recipe
Example data file.
RcpFileStore (“ICECREAM”, 1);
RcpMemDown Downloads the model group data from Xpanel to PLC.
Subroutine RcpMemDown(“Model Name”)

Transfers the model group data from Xpanel to the PLC. The group data must
Description
be stored in the Xpanel before using this subroutine.
Enter the command to download group data of ‘ICECREAM’ from Xpanel to
Example the PLC.
RcpMemDown (“ICECREAM”);
RcpMemUp Receives the data from PLC and saves at the model group data in Xpanel.
Subroutine RcpMemUp(“Model Name”)

Uploads group data from PLC to recipe data file in the Xpanel. This subroutine
Description is used to save data in the Xpanel before using RepMemDown() or
RcpFileStore().
Enter the command to apply PLC data to the group data of ‘ICECREAM’
Example model.
RcpMemUp (“ICECREAM”);
16-8
Recipe
RcpDownLoad Downloads model group data to the PLC.
Subroutine RcpDownLoad(“Model Name”, Group Number)

Reads the specified group data and transfers directly to the PLC. Assign the
Description
group number from 0 to n.
Enter the command to download group data of number 0 to the PLC directly.
Example
RcpDownLoad("ICECREAM", 0);
RcpUpLoad Reads PLC data and save it to the recipe file.
Subroutine RcpUpLoad(“Model Name”, Group Number)

Reads the data from PLC and save it in the recipe data file. Assign the group
Description
number from 0 to n.
Enter the command to apply PLC data to the group data of number 0.
Example
RcpUpLoad("ICECREAM", 0);
If using RcpUpLoad/RcpDownload command consecutively, the latter

command will override the former command. To use these commands
subsequently, set enough interval between operations of two subroutines.
Ex)
RcpDownLoad(“ICECREAM”, 0);
Sleep(1000);
16-9
RcpCsvRd Reads recipe model group data (*.csv file) and saves it in the memory.
Subroutine RcpCsvRd(“Model Name”, “CSV File Name”, CSV file directory)

Replaces group data with specified CSV file data. Assign CSV file directory as
below table.
CSV file directory Description
Description
0 Xpanel internal memory
1 SD/MMC
2 USB
Enter the command to read ‘Recipe.CSV’ file data stored in the USB and save it
Example to the Xpanel recipe file.
RcpCsvRd("ICECREAM", "Recipe", 2);
RcpCsvWr Saves model group data in the memory as a csv file format.
Subroutine RcpCsvWr(“Model Name”, “CSV File Name”, CSV file directory)
Saves current group data as a CSV file format with specified file name. Assign
CSV file directory as below table.
Description
1 SD/MMC
2 USB
Enter the command to save the ‘ICECREAM’ group data as a csv file format.
Example The file name will be designated as ‘Recipe.csv’, and will be saved in the USB.
RcpCsvWr("°ICECREAM", "Recipe", 2);
RcpGetSysMem Copies one block of system memory to Xpanel memory.
Subroutine RcpGetSysMem(“Model Name”, System memory address)

Description Copies one block of system memory to Xpanel memory.
Enter the command to retrieve ‘ICECREAM’ model data from system memory
Example No. 100.
RcpGetSysMem(“ICECREAM”, 100);
16-10
Recipe
RcpSetSysMem Copies data in Xpanel memory and pastes to the system memory.
Subroutine RcpSetSysMem(“Model Name”, System memory address)

Description Copies data in Xpanel memory and pastes to the system memory.
Enter the command to paste “ICECREAM” recipe data to the system memory
Example sequentially from no. 100.
GetRcpDnGroup Returns the recipe group name which has downloaded recently.
Subroutine GetRcpDnGroup(“Model Name”)

Description Returns the recipe group name which has downloaded recently.
Enter the command to store the recent group name of ‘ICECREAM’ model in
Example the ‘GROUP’ tag.
GROUP = GetRcpDnGroup(“ICECREAM”);
RcpNewGroupName Changes the recipe group name.
RcpNewGroupName (“Model Name”, Group number, “New group

Subroutine
name”)
Replaces specified group name with new group name. The group
Description
number starts from 0.
Change the group name in number 3 of ‘ICECREAM’ model as ‘CHOCO’.
Example
RcpNewGroupName (“ICECREAM”, 3, “CHOCO”);
GetRcpGroupName Returns the recipe group name.
Subroutine GetRcpGroupName (“Model name”, Group number)

Description Returns the specified group name. The group number starts from 0.
Gets the group name in number 1 of ‘ICECREAM’ model and store it in
Example the ‘MODEL’ tag.
MODEL = GetRcpGroupName (“ICECREAM”, 1);
GetRcpItemName Returns the name of recipe data.
Subroutine GetRcpGroupName (“Model name”, Data item number)

Description Returns the specified data item name. The item number starts from 0.
Gets the data name in number 1 of ‘ICECREAM’ model and store it in the
Example ‘ITEM’ tag.
ITEM = GetRcpItemName (“ICECREAM”, 1);
16-11
16.3 Exercise
Exercise : Designing a recipe screen

a) Go to database and create tags for recipe operation. Make a group as ‘DATA’ and
generate four analog tags (‘WATER’, ‘ESPRESSO’, ‘SYRUP’, ‘MILK’) for recipe data.
Make a group as ‘HANDSHAKE’ and generate tags for controlling recipe.
16-12
Recipe
b) Go to [Tools]-[Recipe] or icon to open the recipe editor window. Add

‘COFFEE’ model as shown below.
 Model name: COFFEE

 Recipe area start position: RECIPE.DATA.WATER (D100)
 Handshake (Word): RECIPE.HANDSHAKE.WORD (D200)
 Handshake (BIT): RECIPE.HANDSHAKE.BIT (M100)
 Handshake (Group number): RECIPE.HANDSHAKE.GR (D250)
 Number of data: 4
 Number of group: 3
c) After creating the model, specify names for each group and data for making
coffee.
16-13
d) Create a touch object to bring up the recipe dialog box.
Function Touch
Action Command operation
Command RcpConfig()
e) Launch the project in the Xpanel and press the button to open the recipe dialog
box.
 You can change the model and group in each combo box.
 You can retrieve the recipe data values from PLC by ‘Upload’ button.
16-14
Recipe
 You can download recipe data values to the PLC by ‘Download’ button.
 You can modify recipe data values by using keypads.
 You can browse the recipe data in the directory, or save group data as a csv file
format.
16-15
f) Go to CICON software and press [Online] – [Memory Monitor].
g) You can check recipe data downloaded in the D device.
16-16
Schedule
17 Schedule
Schedule allows the user to schedule a program to be run at a specific time. Schedules
can be set for every day, week, month, or year, allowing user an easier management of
the facility, such as writing tag value or command execution. The user can define up to
64 schedules in a project.

17.1 Settings
Press [Tools] – [Schedule] to bring up the schedule list.
Item Description
Adds a new schedule in the ‘Schedule Setting’ window. You can add up to 64
Add Schedule
schedules.
Del Schedule Deletes a selected schedule from the schedule list.
Closes the list after saving schedules in the project. You must apply
Save and Close
configurations by pressing this button.
Close Quits from the ‘Schedule List’ dialog box.
17-1
Item Description
Title Enter the name of schedule in the text field.

Configure the time when the task executes. The task action operates only once
at the assigned time when not using ‘Repeat Settings’ option.
Time Setting
Repeat Task is repeatedly operated annually, monthly, daily, hourly, or
Settings weekly.
Enter the action to execute at the specified time in ‘Time Setting’. You may use
command or write value to the tag.
The field is enabled when selecting the ‘Command’. Enter the
Command operation or command to run at the designated time. You can
Task Setting
set the priority for the task.
The field is enabled when selecting the ‘Write Tag Value’. Each
Write Tag
value is written into the tag at the designated time. You can use
Value
digital or analog tag. Up to 8 tags can be added in the list.
17-2
Schedule

9
In this section, you can find functions and subroutines frequently used for schedule. For
more detailed information, please refer to the next section.
Command Description
Displays the schedule list dialog box in the

Subroutine ScheduleConfig
Xpanel runtime.
Modifies the schedule directly without using

Subroutine SetScheduleSysMem
Schedule schedule setting window.
Function GetScheduleSysMem Obtains the time data of certain schedule.
Subroutine SetScheduleState Changes the active state of certain schedule.
Function GetScheduleState Obtains the active state of certain schedule.
9
17-3
17.2.1 Functions for Schedule
ScheduleConfig Displays the schedule list dialog box in the Xpanel runtime.
Subroutine ScheduleConfig()
Brings up the ‘Schedule list’ dialog box. The schedule data is stored in the
Xpanel system memory. You can change the time setting and active state of
each schedule.
Description
When double-clicking each item, ‘Schedule Config’ dialog box will appear.
You must click ‘Save and Close’ button to apply changes.
The time data can be changed in the ‘Schedule Config’ dialog box.
Brings up the schedule list on the screen.

Example
ScheduleConfig();
17-4
Schedule
SetScheduleSysMem Modifies the schedule directly without using schedule setting window.
SetScheduleSysMem(Schedule Index, Starting Address of SYSTEM

Subroutine
MEMORY)
This subroutine is used to modify the schedule directly without using
‘Schedule config’ dialog box. To use this command, 7 system memory
tags must be registered sequentially. System memory tags must have
consecutive addresses. If the system memory is used for recipe as well,
the addresses must not be overlapped each other.
Enter the time data in each system memory tag as shown below table.
System
Description Range of Input Value
Memory
0 Not repeat
1 Annually
2 Monthly
Description Repeat
0 3 Daily
Settings
4 End of Month
5 Hourly
6 Weekly
1 Year Available from 2011 to 2041
2 Month Available from 1 to12
3 Date Available from 0 to 31
4 Hour Available from 0 to 23
5 Minute Available from 0 to 59
1 Sunday
2 Monday
3 Tuesday
6 Day 4 Wednesday
5 Thursday
6 Friday
7 Saturday
17-5
Enter the command to change the 1st schedule list to match with the time
Example data saved in system memory address 0 to 6.
SetScheduleSysMem(1, 0);
GetScheduleSysMem Obtains the time data of certain schedule.
n = GetScheduleSysMem(Schedule Index, Starting Address of SYSTEM

Function
MEMORY)
Returns the time data of specified schedule index. To use this command,
7 system memory tags must be registered sequentially.
Description
※ Please refer to the description of ‘SetScheduleSysMem’ command for
configuring tag data.
Enter the command to obtain the time data of 1st schedule from system
Example memory address 0 to 6.
TIME = GetScheduleSysMem(1, 0);
SetScheduleState Changes the active state of certain schedule.
Subroutine SetScheduleState(Schedule Index, Active State)

This subroutine is used to change the active state of specified schedule.
Active State Description

Description
0 Disable the specified schedule.
1 Enable the specified schedule.
Activate the 1st schedule.

Example
SetScheduleState(1, 1);
GetScheduleState Obtains the active state of certain schedule.
Subroutine n = GetScheduleState(Schedule Index)

Returns the active state of specified schedule.

Description
Enter the command to obtain the active state of 1st schedule.

Example
STATE = GetScheduleState(1);
17-6
Schedule
17.3 Exercise
Exercise : Setting the function of vending machine with schedule feature

a) Create three digital tags named ‘VENDING’, ‘LIGHT’, and ‘WASHER’.
b) Click [Tools]-[Schedule] to bring up the schedule list dialog box.
17-7
c) Press [Add schedule] button and add each schedule as shown below.
 Name: Vending machine power ON

 Time Setting: Check ‘Repeat settings’ and specify time as 6 : 30, daily.
 Task Setting: Select ‘Command’ and enter the operation as ‘VENDING = 1’.
 Name : Activate washer

 Task Setting: Select ‘Command’ and enter the operation as ‘WASHER = 1’.
17-8
Schedule
 Name: Light ON
 Task Setting: Select ‘Command’ and enter the operation as ‘LIGHT = 1’.
 Name: Vending machine power / light OFF

 Task Setting: Select ‘Write Tag Value’ and add ‘VENDING’ and ‘LIGHT’ in the list.
17-9
Enter the each tag name and value in the text field, and press [Add] to register the
tag.
d) Create a touch object for opening ‘schedule settings’ dialog box.
Function Touch
Action Command
Command ScheduleConfig()
e) Launch the project in the Xpanel. Each function of vending machine activates at the
designated time according to schedule settings. Everyday, the power is turned on at
6 : 30, and the washer operates at 6 : 31. The light may turned on at 18 : 30, and
both power and light are turned off at 23 : 30. You can change the time data of
schedule by pressing touch object.
17-10
Bitmap Edit
18 Utilizing Other Functions
18.1 Bitmap Edit
Bitmap Edit is a feature in which the user can instantly edit the bmp image on the
graphic page. The user can edit the bmp image file directly in the project without
replacing the image.

18.1.1 Settings
The bmp image must exist on the graphic page beforehand. To open the bitmap editor,
select the image first and click [Tools] – [Bitmap Edit].
18-1
Item Description
Undo Cancels the last drawing action in the window.
Draw Draws a line to the bitmap image.
Fill Fills a color the certain area of the bitmap image.
You can select a color from the palette. The selected color will be
Palette
used when you draw a line or fill color.
Zoom in or out the bmp image. The valid magnification is from
Zoom In / Out
100% to 800%.
OK Applies the change to the bmp image and closes the window.
Cancel Does not apply the change to the bmp image and closes the window.
18-2
Bitmap Edit
18.1.2 Exercise
Exercise : Changing the Object with Bitmap Edit

a) Select [Edit] – [Insert Graphic File] to add a bmp image to the graphic page.
b) Click the image object and select [Tools] – [Bitmap Edit]. Then the [Edit Bitmap]
window will appear.
18-3
c) You can edit the image with the tools.
d) Press [OK] button to apply the edited image to the object.
18-4
System Data Area
18.2 System Data Area
The system data area is a feature to assign a function to the device addresses of the
target communication device and set the function to be always ready. You can switch
the pages, bring up the popup page, and change the popup page’s position using a
specific device address.
18.2.1 Settings
Select [Tools] – [System Data Area] to bring up the configuration window as shown
below.
Item Description
Determines whether to use the system data area or not. There must be at
least one I/O Device setting in the corresponding project. If the I/O Device
does not exist in the project, following message will appear.
Use System Data
Area
18-5
Assign the action of the popup page.

When you select [Indirect], you cannot configure the [Popup Page
Number] and [X,Y Position] options in the Popup Page Settings area.
These options will be controlled with the 4th, 5th, 6th device addresses grom
Global Action the start address.
Setting When you select [Direct], you have to manually assign the popup page
number and the X,Y position. You will only control the appearance of the
popup page.
When you select [Unused], you can only configure the [Current Base Page
Number] and [Base Page number to be converted] options.
This option is enabled only when the Global Action Setting is [Direct]. The
Popup Page
popup page will appear when the device address registered to [Control
Number
Popup Page] option becomes 1.
X Position Assigns the X coordinate of the global popup page, by pixel.
Y Position Assigns the Y coordinate of the global popup page, by pixel.
Assign the starting address of the target communication device to be used
for the system data area. Once you assign the starting address,
Start Address
consecutive device addresses will be automatically assigned to each
option. You can only use word-sized device memory.
Current Base page
Prints the latest base page number which is opened in the Xpanel.
Number
Base Page number
Manually enter the base page number for the immediate page converting.
to be converted
When you select this option, the device address assigned to [Base Page
After Converted,
number to be converted] option will be initialized to 0, after the page
Reset Value
switching.
When the Global Action Setting is [Indirect], the corresponding device
address will bring up the popup page in the [Popup Page Number]
option, when the value 1 is input. Input 0 to the device address to close
the popup page.
Control Popup Page
When the Global Action Setting is [Direct], Input 1 to the device address
to bring up the assigned popup page on the assigned X,Y coordinate.
Input 0 to close the popup page.
This option is not used if the Global Action Setting is [Unused].
This option is used only when the Global Action Setting is [Indirect]. Input
Popup Page number
the popup page number to be opened when the device address’s value of
to be converted
[Control Popup Page] is 1.
18-6
System Data Area
This option is used only when the Global Action Setting is [Indirect].
Assign the X,Y coordinate of the popup page’s left-top corner. If the page
Popup Page Position
is already opened, the page will move as much as the assigned value. If
X,Y
the page is not opened, the popup page will be brought up on the
assigned coordinate.
Displays the number of tags (device addresses) to be used in the system
Used Tag Number data area, according to the number of selected items in the [System Data
Area Items].
The device addresses starting from the [Start Address] will automatically be
registered in the Xpanel Designer’s database.
18-7
18.2.2 Exercise
Exercise : Alert Pop Up
a) Select [File] – [New Page] to create a popup page number 1.
18-8
System Data Area
b) Go to [Page Position] tab and change the popup page’s size. The configuration
shown below will change the popup page’s size to a quarter of a screen.
c) Configure the page as shown below. The popup page will appear when an alert is
needed.
18-9
d) Create an base page as shown below. This page will become the starting page of
the project.
(2) I/O Device Configuration
a) To use system data area, the I/O device must be configured beforehand. Select
[Tools] – [I/O Devices] and configure the I/O device as shown below. The Xpanel will
communicate with CIMON-PLCS by Ethernet.
※ Please refer to the “I/O Device” manual for more information.
18-10
System Data Area
(3) System Data Area Configuration
a) Select [Tools] – [System Data Area] to bring up the configuration window as shown
below. Select ‘Use System Data Area’ option and then configure the feature.
The system will use the device address of ‘DEVICE’, from D0 to D2. When you input
1 to D2, the Alert popup page, which is created in (1), will be brought up.
18-11
(4) CICON Configuration
a) Download the scan program to the PLC as shown below.
When the PLC turns into RUN mode, the Y09 will be turned ON. When M01 is ON,
Y09 will be turned OFF.
When Y09 goes OFF, the program will input 1 to D02.
When Y09 goes ON, the program will input 0 to D02.
18-12
System Data Area
a) Write the project to Xpanel and execute it. Switch the PLC mode to RUN.
b) Turn M01 ON and OFF to check the popup page on the screen.
18-13
18.3 Loading CICON Variable Table Info.
When the variable table is generated in the CICON project, you can load its information
to the Xpanel Designer project. Variables used in the CIMON-PLC are converted into tags
in the database by one click.

 You can load the variable table configured in the CICON software 6.00
and below versions.
18.3.1 Way to Edit
(1) Editing the variable table in CICON
Create a PLC project in the CICON software and go to [Tools]-[Variable Window]. The
variable editor will appear. You can input the information for each device address.
Contents are saved by saving PLC project.
※ Please refer to the CICON help for more information about variable editor.
18-14
Loading CICON Variable Info.
(2) Loading the variable table
Press [Tools]-[Loading CICON Variable Table Info.] in the Xpanel Designer, and the file
browser will appear. You can browse variable table file (*.var file format) which is edited
in the CICON software 6.00 and below versions.
Select the variable table file and press [Open] to prompt the ‘I/O device configuration’
dialog box. When the I/O device settings are not saved in the Xpanel Designer, add a
new device by pressing [New Device] button.
Item Description
Edit Modifies the selected I/O device.

New Device Adds a new I/O device. Manufacturer must be selected as ‘CIMON-PLC’.
Delete Deletes the selected I/O device from the project.
Select Applies the contents of variable table to the selected I/O device.
18-15
Following message will appear when you select the station name. You can convert
variables of CICON project into tags of Xpanel Designer.
A group tag is created with I/O device name at the top-level of database. Another group
tag with station name is created under the ‘I/O device name’ group. Each variable is
changed to the tags according to the device information.
The table below explains about contents of conversion.
CICON Xpanel Designer
Variable Name Tag Name

Description Description
Device I/O Address
Bit Digital Tag (Initial value: 0)
Word Analog Tag (Initial value: 0)
18-16
Simulator
19 Xpanel Runtime
19.1 Simulator
The operator can virtually simulate the project by using the simulator. This feature can be
used when there are no physical devices (Xpanel and PLC) and need to test a project. The
simulator includes remote control feature which can change the tag value for a more
realistic simulation.

19.1.1 Run Simulator
To execute the Xpanel simulator, press [Tools]-[Run Simulator]. If you wish to simulate
the current graphic page, click [Tools]-[Run Simulator with Active Page].
Note that you cannot check the communication-related features in the simulator; data
logging, data server, data bridge, recipe, etc.
Project operates virtually in the simulator without PLC communication, and

real tags are converted into the virtual tag during simulator runtime. Please
note that you cannot get real data in the simulator via communication
functions.
Before the simulator is executed, the project is converted into the runtime project file.
The system compiles the project configuration during the conversion.
19-1
If there are any errors in the compiling phase, the conversion will be stopped and a
message will appear informing the wrong configuration. You must properly set the
function again to launch the simulator.
 If the security level is configured in the main page, the simulator will not
executed successfully.
 Please note that you cannot specify popup page and keypad page for
main page.
19.1.2 Simulation Screen
In the simulator runtime, the main screen and remote control function are displayed in
the each side of window. You can use the mouse to interact with the page screen. The
remote control shows tag names and page names which are currently used.
19-2
Simulator
Virtual Control by Remote Control
You may change the value of virtual tags by using remote control feature. The tag name
and its current value are shown in the remote control window.
(1) Changing analog values
To change the value of an analog tag, click the input field next to the tag name and enter
the value.
(2) Changing digital values
The combo box appears when clicking the tag value cell. You may choose TRUE or
FALSE for the digital value.
(3) Changing string values
To change the string value, click the input field next to the tag name and enter the string
data.
19-3
19.2 VNC
XPANEL provides a function for monitoring and controlling the system from anywhere.
With Ethernet connection, you may monitor and control the system with PC or a
smartphone.
 Local Ethernet network
A local Ethernet network uses its own Ethernet network locally without using the
Internet. This allows the PC or smart phone to be connected to the Xpanel through a
wireless router using the same network IP.
 Public IP Ethernet network
If a public IP is assigned to the Xpanel, user can access Xpanel anywhere using the
Internet via Wi-Fi, 3G, or LTE.
Please note that VNC allows only one device to have a remote connection
to the Xpanel at a time.
19.2.1 VNC Network Configuration
To use VNC function, You must start the VNC server in Xpanel before using the VNC
function. You can start or stop server with following steps.
Starting and stopping the VNC server
(1) Starting and stopping the server in Xpanel Designer
a) Go to [Online]-[Setup Link] and select link method for ‘Ethernet’.
19-4
VNC
b) Press Search Xpanel or NP/iNP] and searched Xpanel will appear on the list. Select
the Xpanel which you wish to connect.
c) Select [Online] – [Run Remote Control Server].
d) Following dialog box will appear when you click [Online]-[Run Remote Control
Viewer]. Enter the Xpanel IP to access the VNC server.
Subnet mask and gateway should be configured to match those of PC

and Xpanel.
19-5
e) You can see the Xpanel screen by the VNC viewer.
f) To turn off the connection to the remote control server, press [Online]-[Stop
Remote Control Server].
(2) Starting and stopping the server in Xpanel
a) Click as numbered sequence and Xpanel Config dialog box will appear.
19-6
VNC
b) Press [Exit] button.
c) Press [Configure] button in the ‘Ethernet Loader’ dialog box.
19-7
d) You can start the remote control server by pressing [Run VNC Server] button. If
‘VNC activates as Ethernet loader starts’ option has selected, the server starts
automatically when Xpanel is turned on.
You may stop the remote control server by pressing [Stop VNC Server] button.
(3) Starting and stopping the server by using command
You can run or stop VNC server in the project runtime directly by touch commands as
shown below.
Function Touch
Action Command Expression
Command RunApp("Xpanel/Bin/XVncServer.exe","")
Description Starts the remote control server.
Function Touch
Action Command Expression
Command RunApp("Xpanel/Bin/XVncClose.exe","")
Description Terminates the remote control server.
19-8
VNC
VNC Mobile Application Configuration
Xpanel remote control is possible by smart phone when you use a general-purpose VNC
Viewer application, supports universal remote access interface. Note that display color
may differ in the application which not supports 16-bit color option.
Mobile network configuration
(1) Mobile configuration in Mocha VNC Lite application
a) Search a mobile viewer named ‘Mocha VNC Lite’ and install the application in the
smart phone.
b) Tap ‘Configure’ menu in the start menu of application.
c) Tap ‘New…’ button to establish a new network configuration.
19-9
d) Input parameters for Xpanel IP, port, and password. Enter the hash sign(#) in the
password field, which indicates nonuse of password. Tap [Save] to save the
settings.
e) Go back to the start menu and tap ‘Connect’ button. You can connect to the
Xpanel with configuration.
19-10
VNC
 Assigning static IP address
When you wish to connect Xpanel via 3G/LTE network, you must take a public IP
address. In this statement, you can connect to the VNC server with static IP address or
dynamic IP address. To use VNC function in the mobile phone, a wireless network
configuration is required. Following instruction explains the step for mobile network
through IpTime device.
a) Input ‘192.168.0.1’ and click [Set up] to enter settings window. Set remote Mgmt
port by entering [Advanced Setup]-[Firewall]-[Mgmt Access List].
b) Check [Remote Mgmt port#] button and set the number of management port.
19-11
c) Below is the figure about how to set port forwarding to assign socket port number
in ipTime. Go to [Advanced Setup]-[NAT/Routing]-[Port Forwarding] in settings
window.
d) Assign a static IP address and socket port number using in Xpanel. The socket port
number used in the Xpanel is 5900.
e) Enter the static IP address and port number of Xpanel at the configuration box in
application.
19-12
VNC
 Assigning dynamic IP address
a) Go to [Advanced Setup]-[Utility]-[DDNS] to register the address of domain name.
b) Input the host name to register the DDNS server.
19-13
c) Go to [Advanced Setup]-[NAT/Routing]-[Port Forwarding] in settings window. You

can access Xpanel via port number by entering the domain name.
d) Check the ‘DHCP’ option to set Xpanel for using dynamic IP address.
e) Enter the domain name and port number of Xpanel at the configuration box in
application.
19-14
PC Runtime
19.3 PC Runtime
Before Xpanel Designer V2.52, writing the project to CIMON-XPANEL was the only way
of executing the project. However, Xpanel Designer V2.52 now supports PC Runtime
feature, which enables the users to execute the project in the CIMON-TOUCH PC (CM-
NP/iNP). The PC Runtime is capable of the same operations as CIMON-XPANEL.
To use PC Runtime feature, the device type of the project must be CM-NP/iNP. Also, Key
Lock for PC Runtime must be installed beforehand.
19.3.1 Prerequisites and Execution
(1) Prerequisites
You must use CIMON-TOUCH PC (CM-NP/iNP), installed with Key Lock for PC Runtime.
Since the Key Lock is included when you purchase the CIMON-TOUCH PC, you will only
need to check the Key Lock when the PC Runtime is not executed.
The device model assigned to the project in Xpanel Designer V2.52 must be CM-NP/iNP.
When you create a new project, select ‘CM-NP/iNP (1024x786)’ option in the [Type].
19-15
If you wish to execute the existing project in TOUCH PC (CM-NP/iNP), it may be

necessary to convert the project. In this case, select [Tools] – [Project] – [Convert…]
button and assign the model as CM-NP/iNP. If you need to back up the current project
file, select ‘Back Up’ option then start converting.
(2) Execution
Press icon to execute the PC Runtime. If the model of the project is not CM-NP/iNP,
PC Runtime will not be executed.
If the model of the project is CM-NP/iNP but executed in the general PC, Xpanel
Designer will only create a runtime project. The actual PC Runtime will not be executed.
19-16
PC Runtime
The PC Runtime will only be executed properly when the model of the project is CM-
NP/iNP and the project is executed in the corresponding (CIMON-TOUCH) PC.
19-17
Xpanel Config.
Generally, PC Runtime provides the same control operations as Xpanel device. However,
few features in the [Xpanel Config.] operates differently from the Xpanel.
Item Supported Item Supported

Start Program
O Screen Capture O
Register
System Log O Date/Time O
Comm Monitor O SW Keyboard O
Comm. Config O Printer O
Misc. Config X Modbus O
Data Log Config O Shutdown X
Module Version O Exit O
Touch Calibrate O
19-18
PC Runtime
Following methods are 3 ways to bring up the [Xpanel Config.] window in the PC
Runtime.
(1) Runtime Screen
In the PC Runtime, press the corners of the screen (Left Bottom→Right Bottom→Right
Top) to bring up the [Xpanel Config.] window.
Alternatively, you can bring up the [Xpanel Config.] window by triple-clicking the right
top corner of the PC Runtime screen.
These methods will be disabled when the ‘Disable Online Configuration’ option in the
[Tools] – [CIMON-XPANEL Configuration] is selected.
19-19
(2) OpenConfigWin()
OpenConfigWin Brings up the [Xpanel Config.] window.
Subroutine OpenConfigWin()
Brings up the [Xpanel Config.] window.

Description
This function is not affected by the ‘Disable Online Configuration’ option.

Example
OpenConfigWin();
(3) OpenConfigSub(Feature)
OpenConfigSub Brings up the [Xpanel Config.] window or its sub-feature.
Subroutine OpenConfigSub(Feature)
Brings up the [Xpanel Config.] window or its sub-feature.

This function is not affected by the ‘Disable Online Configuration’ option.
According to the value assigned to Feature, following features will be brought
up.
0: Xpanel Config.
1: System Log
2: Comm Monitor
3: Comm. Config
Description 4: Misc. Config

5: Touch Calibrate
6: Screen Capture
7: Date/Time
8: SW Keyboard
9: Printer
10: Modbus
11: Data Log Config
12: Module Version

Example
OpenConfigSub(0);
19-20
PC Runtime
CIMON-XPANEL Configuration
If the model of the project is CM-NP/iNP, options are added to the [Tools] – [CIMON-
XPANEL Configuration].
(1) StartProgram Setting
You can configure the option in the [Xpanel Config] or the Xpanel Designer. After the
PC reboot, open the project file in the Xpanel Designer. Then the corresponding project
will be executed as PC Runtime.
When you select the option in the Xpanel Designer, the option will be applied
immediately.
19-21
(2) Disable Window Functions (Alt+Tab, Alt+F4 etc)
If you execute PC Runtime with this option enabled, you cannot use Windows hotkeys,
such as Alt+Tab or Alt+F4.
However, it is possible to use Ctrl+Alt+Del regardless of the option’s status.
19-22
PC Runtime
19.3.3 Exercise
Exercise : Executing project with PC Runtime
a) Use basic objects, Library, Date/Time, Switch/Lame objects and configure the page
as shown below.
19-23
b) Assign the control features to each object. In this example, assign ‘Touch’ feature to
the Date/Time object using OpenConfigSub(7) function. This function will bring up
the Date/Time sub-feature of the [Xpanel Config] window.
a) Press button to execute the project. In the configured page, touch the
time/date area on the top. Then the system’s Date/Time configuration window will
appear.
19-24
Xpanel Touch Calibration
19.4 Xpanel Touch Calibration
In case of the mislocation of touch points, you can calibrate the touch panel of Xpanel
device. You can start the calibration from the Xpanel Designer and the Xpanel device.
19.4.1 Xpanel Designer Touch Calibration
a) Select [Online] – [XPANEL Touch Calibration]. Regardless of the current [Setup Link]
option, following window will appear.
- USB
- Ethernet
19-25
b) When you press [OK], following message will pop-up and the Xpanel device will
turn into the calibration screen.
c) Follow the instruction displayed in the screen. After the calibration, reboot the
Xpanel device to save the calibration settings.
19-26
19.4.2 Touch Calibration in Xpanel
You can also start the touch calibration in the Xpanel device. There are three methods to
start the calibration.
(1) Unable to open [Xpanel Config]
If the touch points are excessively mislocated and unable to use mouse, you can press a
random point of the screen to start the touch calibration.
To use this option, the ‘Hold time(sec) for Touch Calibration’ option must be configured
beforehand.
Press the screen as much as the time assigned in the [Confige] window. Then following
screen will appear. Follow the instructions and reboot the Xpanel device after the
calibration.
19-27
(2) Touch Calibration in [Xpanel Config]
You can start touch calibration by pressing [Touch Calibrate] button in the [Xpanel
Config] window. To bring up the [Xpanel Config] window, press the corners of the
Xpanel screen as shown below. (Left bottom→Right bottom→Right top)
Press [Touch Calibrate] to start the calibration. After the calibration, reboot the Xpanel
device to save the calibration settings.
19-28
In case of the models such as XT10/12CB, you can select the calibration mode. There are
4, 9, 16 points mode. For more accurate calibration, select ‘16 Points’ mode.
(3) TouchCalib()
You can use TouchCalib() function to start touch calibration.
TouchCalib Starts touch calibration.
Subroutine TouchCalib()
Starts touch calibration..

Description Operates same as the [Xpanel Config] – [Touch Calibrate] or [Online] –
[Xpanel Touch Calibration].
Starts touch calibration..

Example
TouchCalib();
19-29
19.4.3 Exercise
Calibrating Xpanel through Xpanel Designer

If the current Xpanel device has excessively mislocated touch points, unable to use
mouse, and the ‘Hold Time (sec) for Touch Calibration’ option is disables, you can only
start the touch calibration through Xpanel Designer.
a) Select [Online] – [Xpanel Touch Calibration]. Select the target device in the
following window.
b) When the connection is successful, a message will pop-up as shown below.
19-30
c) On the Xpanel device, calibration window will appear as shown below.
d) Follow the instruction and then reboot the Xpanel to save the calibration setting.
19-31
19.5 Repair Mode
When an error occurs during the project download to Xpanel, you can fix the error by
using the Repair Mode. You can set the Xpanel as Repair Mode through Xpanel
Designer and the Xpanel device.
19.5.1 Operation
a) Select [Online] – [Setup Link] to connect to the target device.
- USB
- Ethernet
19-32
Repair Mode
b) Select [Online] – [Repair Mode]. Then press [Yes] and [OK] to set the device as
repair mode.
If the device is already in repair mode, following message will appear.
c) Reboot the Xpanel. Then the system will not execute the project, but a message will
appear instead.
d) Download the project to the Xpanel. Select [Online] – [Download to Xpanel

(PC→Xpanel)] or press button to start project downloading.
19-33
19.5.2 Repair Mode in Xpanel
You can also set the Xpanel as Repair Mode in the device. In the [Ethernet Loader]
window, press [Confige] to bring up the window as shown below.
Press [Repair] button to set the Repair Mode. In the followed windows, press the [Yes]
buttons to proceed.
19-34
Repair Mode
19.5.3 Exercise
Repairing a project through Xpanel Designer

When an error occurs during the project download to Xpanel, you can use Repair Mode
feature of the Xpanel Designer.
a) Select [Online] – [Repair Mode]. Then press [Yes] and [OK] to set the device as
repair mode.
b) Reboot the Xpanel and check that the device is in Repair mode.
c) Download the project to the Xpanel. Select [Online] – [Download to Xpanel

(PC→Xpanel)] or press button to start project downloading.
19-35
d) You will find that the project is successfully downloaded to Xpanel.
19-36
Print
20 Print
The graphic pages created in the Xpanel Designer can be printed out within the user’s
settings. The user can assign a header or footer to the page so that the source of the
page can be noticeable. Also, the user can preview the printout of the graphic pages.
20.1 Print Setup
You can configure the organization of printout such as the orientation, header, footer,
etc. Select [File] – [Page Setup] to bring up the [Print Setup] window as shown below.
Item Description
Header Assign a header to the printout. Select button to use the options.
Footer Assign a footer to the printout. Select button to use the options.
Select this option to print the graphic page according to the printing paper. When
Fit In Paper the option is deselected, the graphic page is printed according to the graphic page
magnification.
Scale Assign the number of pages to be printed.
Orientation Assign the orientation of the graphic page to be printed. (Landscape or Portrait)
Option Select the color option of the printout.
Margin Assign the margin of the printout.
OK Apply the settings to the print setup.
Cancel Cancels the print setup.
20-1
Initializes the all settings.;Fit In Paper: Selected, Scale: X1, Y1, Orientation:
Default Landscape, Option: Deselected, Margin: Left 25mm, Right 25mm, Top 20mm,
Bottom 20mm
(1) Header and Footer
The options for the header and footer will appear when you press button. You can
arrange the options in the desired order.
Item Description
Page Number Displays the page number. Entered as “%P”.

Date Displays the printed date. Entered as “%D”.
Time Displays the printed time. Entered as “%T”.
Center Centers the header/footer. Entered as “%C”.
Left Aligns the header/footer to the left. Entered as “%L”.
Right Aligns the header/footer to the right. Entered as “%R”.
File Name Displays the printed page’s path and name. Entered as “%F”.
When you configure the header as “Project %P %D %T %F %C”, it will be printed as

shown below.
Project 1 2018/01/01 12:00:00 C:\FilePath\PageName.PGX

…
(2) Scale
You can assign the value to X and Y to determine the number of printing papers to be
used to express a single graphic page. For example, the default setting (X=1, Y=1) uses a
sheet of paper to print the width and the height.
20-2
Print
When the scale is assigned as X = 2, Y = 1, two sheets of paper is used to print the width
and a sheet of paper for the height of the graphic page.
20.2 Preview
Select [File] – [Preview] or icon to configure and preview the result of print setup. In
the [Print Setup] window, press [OK] to start the preview.
Item Description
Name Displays the list of available printers.

Properties Brings up the property window of the selected printer.
Size Select the size of the printing paper.
Source Select the source of the printing paper.
Orientation Assign the orientation of the printout.
Help Brings up the Xpanel Designer Help.
Brings up the Windows Network browser. You can select a printer registered in
Network
the local network.
OK Applies the settings and the preview window will appear.
Cancel Cancels the preview setup and returns to the graphic page.
20-3
Item Description
Print Prints out the graphic page as shown in the preview.

Next/Prev If the graphic page is printed in several pages, you can move to the next or
Page previous preview page.
If the graphic page is printed in several sheets of papers, you can find the detailed
Level 4
display of a specific page.
If the graphic page is printed in several sheets of papers, you can find the overall
Level 5
display of the pages.
Zoom In Click the [Zoom In] button or a point of a page to enlarge the preview.
Zoom Out Click the [Zoom Out] or a point of the enlarged page to reduce the preview.
Close Closes the preview window and returns to the graphic page.
20-4
Print
20.3 Print
You can print out the current graphic page with the printer. Select [File] – [Print] or
icon to bring up the [Print] window.
Item Description
Name Displays the list of available printers.

Properties Brings up the property window of the selected printer.
Print Range Indicates the target pages to be printed. The options except ‘All’ are disabled.
Copies Assigns the number of copies.
Help Brings up the Xpanel Designer Help.
OK Applies the configuration and prints out the graphic page.
Cancel Cancels the print and returns to the graphic page.
20-5

10
In this section, you can find a subroutine frequently used for the printing out. Please
refer to the table below for applicable subroutine.
Command Description
Print Subroutine HardCopy Prints out the runtime screen of Xpanel.
20.4.1 Function for Print

HardCopy Prints out the runtime screen of Xpanel.
Subroutine HardCopy()
Description Prints out the runtime screen of Xpanel.
Prints out the runtime screen of Xpanel.
Example
HardCopy()
10
20-6
Print
20.5 Print in Xpanel
In the Xpanel runtime, you can configure the print setup in Xpanel Config dialog box and
print out the project screen. Xpanel is compatible with PCL printer by USB connection.
Refer to the following steps for print setup.
Print Setup in Xpanel

a) Click as numbered sequence. Xpanel Config dialog box appears.
b) Press ‘Printer’ button.
20-7
c) A print setup dialog box will appear as you press the ‘Printer’ button. Set any of the
preferences described below, and click ‘OK’.
Item Description
Select the printer type. Xpanel supports inkjet and laser printer supporting
Printer
PCL.
Select a port that the printer is connected. If the printer is connected to the
Xpanel via the USB host port, select the ‘LPT1:’. The LPT1 port is
Port automatically detected and displayed when the printer is ready. If the printer
is connected with the network, select the ‘Network’. In this case, the ‘Net
Path’ field will be enabled.
If you wish to connect the printer in network, you must enter the path as
Net Path
following exam; \\PC_name\Printer_name
Paper Size Select the size of the printing paper.
If the option is deselected, the size of the printed image decreases though
Draft Mode
the image is clearly printed out.
Color This option is enabled when you select ‘PCL Inkjet’.
Print Range Indicates the target pages to be printed. The options except ‘All’ are disabled.
Orientation Assign the orientation of the printout.
Margins Assign the margin of the printout.
20-8
Print
d) If the ‘Port’ is chosen as ‘Network’, the Xpanel tries to connect the PC via network
and ‘Logon’ dialog box will appear. Enter the correct user name and password and
press ‘OK’ button.
e) If logon information has entered correctly, the following message will appear. If
‘Yes’ is chosen, the entered password will be stored in the system permanently.
Otherwise, the Xpanel will ask the password whenever you try to use the network
printer.
f) Press ‘System Shutdown’ button in the Xpanel Config dialog box to save the
settings. If the system shutdown was not executed, the settings will be canceled
and the previous data will be restored when the system is restarted.
20-9
Appendix 1 Functions for Script

In this section, you can find functions and subroutines used in the script. Subroutine is a
command expression that operates a certain action without any value returned, unlike
the functions have return value.
In the Xpanel Designer script, you can use the functions and subroutines listed in this
document. When you use the script, please beware of the following cautions.
When you use the functions with the return value, a variable to store the
return value must be declared beforehand.

Function List
The functions are listed in the table as shown below.
Command Description Ref.

Function Sin(number) Computes the Sine value.
Computes the Cosine
Function Cos(number)
value.
Computes the Tangent
Function Tan(number)
value.
Computes the Arc Sine
Function Asin(number)
value.
Trigonometric
Computes the Arc Cosine 1.2
Function Function Acos(number)
value.
Computes the Arc Tangent
Function Atan(number)
value.
Computes the Hyperbolic
Function Sinh(number)
Sine value.
Function Cosh(number)
Cosine value.
1
Script (Appendix)

Function Tanh (number)
Tangent value.
Atan2(number1, Computes the Arc Tangent
Function
number2) value.
2
Function Abs(number) Returns the absolute value.

Returns the ceiling of a
Function Ceil(number)
value.
Function Floor(number) Returns the floor of a value.
Fmod(number1, Returns the floating-point
Function
number2) remainder.
Mathematic
Computes the natural 1.3
Function Function Log (number)
logarithm.
Computes the base-10
Function Log10(number)
logarithm.
Generates the
Function Rand()
pseudorandom number.
Function Sqrt(number) Computes the square root.
3
Script (Appendix)
The special functions listed in the table shown below are categorized, starting from
section 1.4.
AddMessage(Message ID, Added Adds a new message to the

Subroutine
Message) scroll message window.
Adds a new message to the
AddMessageEx(Message ID,
Subroutine scroll message window with a
Added Message,Level)
level.
AlarmCsvWr(AlarmGroup,
Saves the alarm messages as
Subroutine “CSVFileName”, TimeDisplay,
CSV file.
PrintOption, Location)
AlarmPrint(AlarmGroup,
Prints the alarm messages with
Subroutine Messages,TimeDisplay, FontSize,
printer.
PrintOption)
Deletes the entire alarm log of
the assigned alarm group.
Subroutine ClosePort(PortNo) Closes the serial port.
Subroutine FrameOpen(“FrameFile”) Opens the frame file.

Returns the recently selected
Function GetExplorerPath(PathType)
file’s path.
GetCommStatus(“DeviceName”, Checks the selected station’s
Special Function
“StationName”) communication status.
Function Returns the recipe group
Function GetRcpDnGroup(“Model Name”) name which has
downloaded recently.
GetRcpGroupname(“Model Returns the recipe group
Function
Name”, Group Number) name.
GetRcpItemName(“Model Name”, Returns the name of recipe
Function
Data item number) data.
Obtains the active state of
Function GetScheduleState(Schedule Index)
certain schedule.
GetScheduleSysMem(Schedule
Obtains the time data of
Function Index, Starting Address of SYSTEM
certain schedule.
MEMORY)
Returns the current security
Function GetSecurity()
level.(0 – 10)
GetSysMem(System Memory Returns the system memory
Function
Address) value.
Function GetTime(Value Type) Returns the current time value.

Prints out the runtime screen
of Xpanel.
4
Checks if the file or folder exists

Function IsDirectory(“File or Folder Name”)
in the Xpanel.
Turns on or off the LCD
Subroutine LcdBacklight(ON/OFF)
Backlight.
Subroutine LcdBrightDown() Dims the LCD light.
Subroutine LcdBrightUp() Brightens the LCD light.
Subroutine LogOff() Logs out the current user.

Logs on with the user
Subroutine LogOn(“UserID”, “Password”)
information.
Brings up the User Log On
window.
Saves the data block to the
MakeCsv(“LogModelName”,
Subroutine SD/MMC memory in CSV file
BlockNumber)
format.
MakeCsvUsb(“LogModelName”, Saves the data block to the USB
Subroutine
BlockNumber) storage in CSV file format.
MakeLogCsv(“LogModelName”,
Subroutine assigned location in CSV file
BlockNumber, Location)
format.
MakeLogCsvEx(“Header”, Saves the data block in CSV file
Subroutine “LogModelName”, BlockNumber, format and stores the header
Location) name at cell A1.
MakeSysMemCsv(“Header”,
Starting address of System Memory, Saves the system memories in
Subroutine
number of memories, number of CSV file format.
Columns, Location)
NumToStr(TargetValue, Value Type, Converts the numeric value to
Function
Format) the string.
Brings up the Xpanel Config.
Subroutine OpenConfigSub(Function)
window or its sub-features.
window.
OpenPort (PortNo, BaudRate, Parity,
Function Opens the serial port.
Databit, Stopbit)
Subroutine PageOpen(“PageName”) Opens the page.
Subroutine PrePage() Moves to the previous page.

Moves to the previous base
Subroutine PrePageEx()
page.
PlayWave(WavFileLocation, Executes the wav file in the

Subroutine
Path, Sync/Async) assigned path.
Displays the recipe settings
window in Xpanel runtime.
5
Script (Appendix)
Reads recipe model group data

RcpCsvRd(“Model Name”, “CSV File
Subroutine (*.csv file) and saves it in the
Name”, CSV file directory)
memory.
RcpCsvWr(“Model Name”, “CSV File Saves model group data in the
Subroutine
Name”, CSV file directory) memory as a csv file format.
RcpDownload(“Model Name”, Downloads model group data
Subroutine
Group Number) to the PLC.
RcpFileRead(“Model Name”, Group Reads PLC data and save it to
Subroutine
Number) the recipe file.
RcpFileStore(“Model Name”, Group Saves the model group data in
Subroutine
RcpGetSysMem(“Model Name”, Copies one block of system
Subroutine
System Memory Address) memory to Xpanel memory.
Downloads the model group

data from Xpanel to PLC.
Receives the data from PLC and

Subroutine RcpMemUp(“Model Name”) saves at the model group data in
Xpanel.
Copies data in Xpanel memory
RcpSetSysMem(“Model Name”,
Subroutine and pastes to the system
System Memory Address)
memory.
Subroutine RcpStop(“Model Name”) Stops and terminate the Recipe.
RcpUpload(“Model Name”, Group Reads PLC data and save it to
Subroutine
Receives data with the selected
Subroutine ReceiveByte(PortNo, Data)
port.
Removes the scroll message
Subroutine RemoveMessage(MessageID) which is added by
AddMessage() function.
RunApp(“ProgramName”,
Subroutine Executes the external program.
“ProgramParameter”)
Displays the schedule list
Subroutine ScheduleConfig() dialog box in the Xpanel
runtime.
Saves the Xpanel screen in BMP
Subroutine ScrCapture(“SeedName”, Location)
file.
Sends byte data with the
Function SendByte(PortNo, Data)
selected port.
Sends string data with the
Function SendString(PortNo, Data)
selected port.
Subroutine SetDate(Year,Month,Date) Changes the date of Xpanel.
6
SetScheduleState(Schedule Changes the active state of

Subroutine
Index, Active State) certain schedule.
SetScheduleSysMem(Schedule Modifies the schedule
Subroutine Index, Starting Address of directly without using
SYSTEM MEMORY) schedule setting window.
Controls the process time of the
Subroutine SetSpeed(Acc./Dec.)
script module.
SetSysMem(System Memory
Subroutine Sets the system memory value.
Address, Set Value)
Subroutine SetTime(Hour,Minute,Second) Changes the time of Xpanel.
Subroutine Sleep(Delay) Delays the script program.

SoftKeyboard(Show/Hide, X Opens or closes the virtual
Subroutine
Coordinate, Y Coordinate) keyboard.
Controls the Beep output
Subroutine StaticBeepCtrl(ON/OFF)
(On/Off)
StringTable(Group Number, String Gets a string data from the
Function
Number) string table.
StrToNum(Target String, Numeral Converts the string to the
Function
System) numeric value.
SysMemFill(System Memory Fills the block of system memory
Subroutine
Address, Data, Number of data) with the assigned value.
SysMemMove(Current Address, Moves the data block in the
Subroutine
Target Address, Number of Data) system memory.
Generates the time-displaying
Subroutine TimeStr(Acquired Value, “Format”)
string.
Brings up the touch calibration
screen.
TrendCsvWr(“TrendName”,
Subroutine Saves the Trend in CSV format.
Location)
WindowsExplorer(“Path”,
Brings up the Windows Explorer
Subroutine “Extension”, X Coordinate, Y
at the assigned position.
Coordinate)
Subroutine XpanelReset() Restarts the Xpanel Runtime.
7
Script (Appendix)
Trigonometric Function
Type Format Description
Function Sin(number) Computes the Sine value.
Function Cos(number) Computes the Cosine value.
Function Tan(number) Computes the Tangent value.
Function Asin(number) Computes the Arc Sine value.
Function Acos(number) Computes the Arc Cosine value.
Function Atan(number) Computes the Arc Tangent value.
Function Sinh(number) Computes the Hyperbolic Sine value.
Function Cosh(number) Computes the Hyperbolic Cosine value.
Function Tanh (number) Computes the Hyperbolic Tangent value.
Function Atan2(number1, number2) Computes the Arc Tangent value.
Function n=Sin(number)
Description Computes the Sine value.

Returns Sin 60 to the variable VAL.
Example VAR VAL;
VAL=Sin(60);
Function n=Cos(number)
Description Computes the Cosine value.

Returns Cos 60 to the variable VAL.
Example VAR VAL;
VAL=Cos(60);
8
Function n=Tan(number)
Description Computes the Tangent value.
Returns Tan 60 to the variable VAL.

Example VAR VAL;
VAL=Tan(60);
Function n=Asin(number)
Description Computes the Arc Sine value.
Returns Arc Sine 1 to the variable VAL.

Example VAR VAL;
VAL=Asin(1);
Function n=Acos(number)
Description Computes the Arc Cosine value.
Returns Acos 1 to the variable VAL.

Example VAR VAL;
VAL=Acos(1);
Function n=Atan(number)
Description Computes the Arc Tangent value.
Returns Arc Tangent 1 to the variable VAL.

Example VAR VAL;
VAL=Atan(1);
Function n=Sinh(number)
Description Computes the Hyperbolic Sine value.
Returns Hyperbolic Sine 0 to the variable VAL.

Example VAR VAL;
VAL=Sinh(0);
9
Script (Appendix)
Function n=Cosh(number)
Description Computes the Hyperbolic Cosine value.
Returns Hyperbolic Cosine 0 to the variable VAL.

Example VAR VAL;
VAL=Cosh(0);
Function n=Tanh(number)
Description Computes the Hyperbolic Tangent value.
Returns Hyperbolic Tangent 0 to the variable VAL.

Example VAR VAL;
VAL=Tanh(0);
Function n=Atan2(number1, number2)

Computes the Arc Tangent value.
Description Unlike the Atan() function, returns the Arc Tangent of number1/number2.
Returns Arc Tangent (1/2) to the variable VAL.

Example VAR VAL;
VAL=Atan2(1,2);
10
Mathematic Function
Function Abs(number) Returns the absolute value.
Function Ceil(number) Returns the ceiling of a value.
Function Floor(number) Returns the floor of a value.
Fmod(number1,
Function Returns the floating-point remainder.
number2)
Function Log (number) Computes the natural logarithm.
Function Log10(number) Computes the base-10 logarithm.
Function Rand() Generates the pseudorandom number.
Function Sqrt(number) Computes the square root.
Function n=Abs(number)
Description Returns the absolute value.

Returns the absolute value of -992 to the variable VAL.
Example VAR VAL;
VAL=Abs(-992);
Function n=Ceil(number)
Description Returns the ceiling of a value.

Returns the ceiling of 2.1416 to the variable VAL.
Example VAR VAL;
VAL=Ceil(2.1416);
Function n=Floor(number)
Description Returns the floor of a value.

Returns the floor of 2.1416 to the variable VAL.
Example VAR VAL;
VAL=Floor(2.1416);
11
Script (Appendix)
Function n=Fmod(number1, number2)
Description Returns the floating-point remainder.

Returns the floating-point remainder of 2.25/4 to the variable VAL.
Example VAR VAL;
VAL=Fmod(2.25,4);
Function n=Log(number)
Description Computes the natural logarithm.

Returns the natural logarithm of 5.5 to the variable VAL.
Example VAR VAL;
VAL=Log(5.5);
Function n=Log10(number)
Description Computes the base-10 logarithm.

Returns the base-10 logarithm of 5.5 to the variable VAL.
Example VAR VAL;
VAL=Log10(5.5);
Function n=Rand()
Description Generates the pseudorandom number.

Saves the pseudorandom number to the variable VAL.
Example VAR VAL;
VAL=Rand();
Function n=Sqrt(number)
Description Computes the square root.

Returns the square root of 4002 to the variable VAL.
Example VAR VAL;
VAL=Sqrt(4002);
12
Functions for Pages and Project
Subroutine FrameOpen(“FrameFile”) Opens the frame file.
Function GetExplorerPath(“PathType”) Returns the recently selected file’s path.
Function IsDirectory(“File or Folder Name”) Checks if the file or folder exists in the Xpanel.
NumToStr(TargetValue, Value Type,

Function Converts the numeric value to the string.
Format)
Subroutine PageOpen(“PageName”) Opens the page.
Subroutine PrePage() Moves to the previous page.
Subroutine PrePageEx() Moves to the previous base page.
RunApp(“ProgramName”,
Subroutine Executes the external program.
“ProgramParameter”)
Subroutine ScrCapture(“SeedName”, Location) Saves the Xpanel screen in BMP file.
Subroutine SetSpeed(Acc./Dec.) Controls the process time of the script module.
Subroutine Sleep(Delay) Delays the script program.
SoftKeyboard(Show/Hide, X
Subroutine Opens or closes the virtual keyboard.
Coordinate, Y Coordinate)
StrToNum(Target String, Numeral

Function Converts the string to the numeric value.
System)
Subroutine TimeStr(Acquired Value, “Format”) Generates the time-displaying string.
FrameOpen Opens the frame file.
Subroutine FrameOpen(“FrameFile”)
Description Opens the frame file. You can only enter the file name without the extension.
Opens the frame file named “FRAME”.

Example
FrameOpen(“FRAME”);
13
Script (Appendix)
GetExplorerPath Returns the recently selected file’s path.
Function n=GetExplorerPath(PathType)
Returns the recently selected file’s path.
Path Type can be assigned with the values as shown below.
Description 0: Superordinate of the file or folder.
1: Selected file name
2: Whole path including superordinate path and the file name.
If you have selected the “Elder.exe” file in the Xpanel folder then
executed the function as shown below. the entire path
Example information will be returned.
VAR Path;
Path = GetExplorerPath(2);
IsDirectory Checks if the file or folder exists in the Xpanel.
Function n=IsDirectory(“File or Folder Name”)

Checks if the file or folder exists in the Xpanel. The parameter must be entered
with the double quotation marks.
Description If the file or folder exists, the function will return 1. If not, the function will
return 0.
Checks is USB Storage folder exists in Xpanel.

Example VAR FolderCheck;
FolderCheck = IsDirectory(“USB Storage”);
14
NumToStr Converts the numeric value to the string.
Function STR=NumToStr(TargetValue, Value Type, Format)

Recognizes the TargetValue as the data in Value Type. Then the value will be
converted according to the Format.
This function supports Value Type as shown below.
_UINT_ : Unsigned Integer
_INT_ : Signed Integer
_FLOAT_ : Floating-Point
_HEX_ : Hexadecimal
Format must be written in the configuration as shown below.
Description [Width] [.precision]
Width : Assign the number of letters to be returned after the conversion. If you
enter 3, the converted string will be composed of 3 letters. If the original value
is greater than the Width value, the more significant digits will be deleted. In
the opposite case, the spaces will be filled. If the Width contains a leading-zero,
the spaces will be replaced with the zeros.
Precision : Assign the Precision when you convert the floating-point number.
Assign the significant digits for the decimal points to be converted. Precision
must be smaller than the Width.
Stores 123 to Val1, 0123 to Val2, 123.45 to Val3.
VAR Val1,Va2,Val3;
Val1 = NumToStr(123.456, _FLOAT_, “3.0”);
Example
Val2 = NumToStr (123.456, _FLOAT_, “04.0”);
Val3 = NumToStr (123.456, _FLOAT_, “6.2”);
……
PageOpen Opens the page.
Subroutine PageOpen(“PageName”)
Opens the page.
You must enter the file name except the extension.
According to the page type, the pages will be opened with different operation.
If there is no special configuration, the current page (existing page) will be
closed.
Description Popup Page: If you open the Popup Page with this function, the current page
(existing page) will not be closed.
Frame page: The page will be opened at the position where it is assigned in the
frame. If you open the page in the same frame position, the page will be
replaced with the new page.
Opens the page file named “PAGE”.

Example
PageOpen(“PAGE”);
15
Script (Appendix)
PrePage Moves to the previous page.
Subroutine PrePage()
Moves to the previous page. You can move to the recent 20 pages regardless
Description of the page type.
Moves to the previous page.

Example PrePage();
RunApp Moves to the previous base page.
Subroutine PrePageEx()
Moves to the previous base page. This function only recognizes the base
Description pages. If the previous page is Popup Page or Keypad Page, they are ignored
and moves to the former base page.
Moves to the previous base page.

Example PrePageEx();
RunApp Executes the external program.
Subroutine RunApp(“ProgramName”, “ProgramParameter”)

Executes the external program.
ProgramName must include the file location and the extension.
Description ProgramParameter is recognized as string, therefore must be written with the
double quotation mark. You can only execute the Windows program or the
program developed by the user.
Opens DOS and operates the ping test.

Example RunApp(“Ping.EXE”, “-t 100.100.100.1”);
16
ScrCapture Saves the Xpanel screen in BMP file.
Subroutine ScrCapture(“SeedName”, Location)

Saves the current Xpanel screen and saves it in BMP image file. The file name
will be created as shown below.
“SeedName_HHMMSS.BMP”
The image file will be saved in the path according to the value of Location.
When you assign 0 at Location, it means the local. The value 1 means
Description the SD/MMC and the value 2 means the USB.
You can also assign the Location as shown below.
0: _LOCAL_
1: _SDMEM_
2: _USBMEM_
Saves the current Xpanel screen as BMP file in the SD/MMC
memory.
Example
ScrCapture(“Mybmp”, _SDMEM_);
SetSpeed Controls the process time of the script module.
Subroutine SetSpeed(Acc./Dec.)
When you assign a value other than 0 to the Acc./Dec., the later
Description
commands will be processed faster.
The process will be faster after the calling SetSpeed function.
TAG0 = TAG0 + 1;
SetSpeed(1);
Example
TAG1 = TAG1 + 1;
TAG2 = TAG2 + 2;
If you use SetSpeed during the repeated script, it may cause the low
performance of the Xpanel until the script’s end.
The functions called by the RuntScript after the SetSpeed will not be
influenced by the SetSpeed function.
Ex)
SetSpeed(1);
17
Script (Appendix)
RunScript TestScript(); // TestScript is not influenced by SetSpeed
TestScript2(); // TestScript is influenced by SetSpeed
Sleep Delays the script program.
Subroutine Sleep(Delay)
Assign the delay time to Delay in msec.
Description This function will be used in the middle of the script program and pauses the
corresponding script as much as the delay.
Pauses the script for 1 sec (1000msec).

Example
Sleep(1000);
SoftKeyboard Opens or closes the virtual keyboard.
Subroutine SoftKeyboard(Show/Hide, X Coordinate, Y Coordinate)

Assign the position at X Coordinate and Y Coordinate.
Description Assign a value other than 0 to the Show/Hide to open the virtual keyboard.
When you assign 0, the keyboard will be closed.
Opens the virtual keyboard at (10,10) positon of the screen.

Example
SoftKeyboard(1,10,10);
18
StrToNum Converts the string to the numeric value.
Function n=StrToNum(Target String, Numeral System)

Target String must contain the string that can be converted into
numeric value. If the Numeral System is 10, the function can process
the string in the following format.
[sign][digit][.digit][{d|D|e|E}[sign]digit]
Assign (+) or (-) to the Sign. Digit must be assigned with a single or
multiple digit-decimal.
At lease one decimal digit must be assigned before or after the
decimal character(.).
When the numeral system is decimal, you can process the exponent
which is composed of letters (d|D|e|E) and the signed integer.
If the exponent or decimal point appears, the system will assume that
the decimal number follows.
If you cannot convert the Target String, 0 will be returned.
Description
Assign 0 or 2~36 to the Numeral System.

If the Numeral System is 0, it will be processed according to the
following rules.
- The first letter defines the numeral system.
- The first letter is “0” and the following letter is not “x”, “X” :
recognized as octal number. (e.g. 01234)
- The first letter is “0” and the following letter is “x”, “X” : recognized
as hexadecimal number. (e.g. 0x1234)
If the Numeral System is greater than 10, “a” to “z” (or “A” to “Z”) will be
process as the number between 10 to 35.
This function only operates when the assigned value is smaller than
the Numeral System.
Stores the 3.140 to the variable VAL.
Example VAR VAL;
VAL = StrToNum(“3.14e3”,10);
19
Script (Appendix)
TimeStr Generates the time-displaying string.
Function STR=TimeStr(Acquired Value, “Format”)

Assign the value acquired by GetTime(0) function or second-unit counter since
Jan/01/1970 (UTC) to Acquired Value.
“Format” will be composed with the following symbols.
%A : Full name of the day (e.g. Sunday)
%a : Abbreviation of the day (e.g. Sun)
%B : Full name of the month (e.g. January)
%b : Abbreviation of the month (e.g. Jan)
%d : Date (1~31)
Description %H : Hour in 24-hour format (0~23)
%l : Hour in 12-hour format (1~12)
%m : Month (1~12)
%M : Minute (0~59)
%p : Indicator of 12-hour format (AM/PM)
%S : Second (0~59)
%y : 2-digit year (e.g. 00, 99)
%Y : 4-digit year (e.g. 2000, 1999)
Generates the string in Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute:Second

format.
Example
CurTime = GetTime(0);
StrTag = TimeStr(CurTime, “%Y/%m/%d/ %H:%M:%S”);
20
Functions for Xpanel device
Function GetTime(Value Type) Returns the current time value.
Subroutine LcdBacklight(ON/OFF) Turns on or off the LCD Backlight.
Subroutine LcdBrightDown() Dims the LCD light.
Subroutine LcdBrightUp() Brightens the LCD light.
Brings up the Xpanel Config. window or its

sub-features.
Subroutine OpenConfigWin() Brings up the Xpanel Config. window.
PlayWave(WavFileLocation, Path,
Subroutine Executes the wav file in the assigned path.
Sync/Async)
Subroutine SetDate(Year,Month,Date) Changes the date of Xpanel.
Subroutine SetTime(Hour,Minute,Second) Changes the time of Xpanel.
Subroutine StaticBeepCtrl(ON/OFF) Controls the Beep output (On/Off)
Subroutine TouchCalib() Brings up the touch calibration screen.
WindowsExplorer(“Path”, “Extension”, Brings up the Windows Explorer at the

Subroutine
X Coordinate, Y Coordinate) assigned position.
Subroutine XpanelReset() Restarts the Xpanel Runtime.
21
Script (Appendix)
GetTime Returns the current time value.
Function n=GetTime(Value Type)

Assign the type of the data to acquire to Value Type.
0: The number of seconds after 1st Jan 1970 UTC
1: 4-digit Year (e.g. 1970, 1932)
2: Month (1~12)
3: Date (1~31)
Description 4: Hour (0~23)
5: Minute (0~59)
6: Second (0~59)
7: Day of the week (1~7, 1=SUN, 2=MON, … 7=SAT)
8: Today’s minute counter (Since midnight, the minutes passed until present.)
9: Today’s seconds counter (Since midnight, the seconds passed until present.)
Stores the current year to the variable GetYear.

Example VAR GetYear;
GetYear = GetTime(1);
LcdBacklight Turns on or off the LCD Backlight.
Subroutine LcdBacklight(ON/OFF)
Assign the value other than 0 to turn ON the LCD Backlight. To turn
Description
OFF the backlight, assign 0.
Turns off the LCD backlight.
Example
LcdBacklight(0);
LcdBrightDown Dims the LCD light.
Subroutine LcdBrightDown()
Description Dims the LCD light. (1 Step) There are total 32 steps.
Dims the LCD light.
Example
LcdBrightDown();
LcdBrightUp Brightens the LCD light.
Subroutine LcdBrightUp()
Description Brightens the LCD light. (1 Step) There are total 32 steps.
Brightens the LCD light.
Example
LcdBrightUp();
22
OpenConfigSub Brings up the Xpanel Config. window or its sub-features.
Brings up the Xpanel Config. window or its sub-features.
You can assign the values as shown below to the Function.
0: Xpanel Config.
1: System Log
2: Comm Monitor
3: Comm Config
4: Misc Config
Description 5: Touch Calibrate
6: Screen Capture
7: Date/Time
8: SW Keyboard
9: Printer Setup
10: Modbus
11: Datalog
12: Module Version
Example
OpenConfigSub(0);
OpenConfigWin Brings up the Xpanel Config. window.
Description Brings up the Xpanel Config. window.
Brings up the Xpanel Config. window.

Example
OpenConfigWin();
23
Script (Appendix)
PlayWave Executes the wav file in the assigned path.

Subroutine PlayWave(WavFileLocation, Path, Sync/Async)
Executes the *.wav file from the Path in the WavFileLocation
WavFileLocation can be expressed with the following strings
0: _LOCAL_ (\\Xpanel\)
1: _SDMEM_ (SD Memory Root Path)
2: _USBMEM_ (USB Memory Root Path)
Description
Path must include the file’s name and extension.
Enter 0 at Sync/Async, which indicates the ‘Sync’, to stop the next
script’s execution until the end of the audio file.
Enter 1 to continue the script execution while the audio file is
operating.
Execute ‘alarm.wav’ file in the sound folder in the Xpanel. The next
Exercise script will not be executed until the audio file ends.
PlayWave(_LOCAL_, "sound/alarm.wav", 0);
SetDate Changes the date of Xpanel.
Subroutine SetDate(Year,Month,Date)
Changes the date of Xpanel.
Year : Enter 4-digit number.
Description
Month : Enter the value between 1~12.
Date : Enter the value between 1~31 according to the month.
Changes the date of Xpanel to 2018/11/30.
Example
SetDate(2018,11,30);
SetTime Changes the time of Xpanel.
Subroutine SetTime(Hour,Minute,Second)
Changes the time of Xpanel.
Hour : Enter the value between 0~24.
Description
Minute : Enter the value between 0~59.
Second : Enter the value between 0~59.
Changes the time of Xpanel to 18:30:30.
Example
SetTime(18,11,30);
24
StaticBeepCtrl Controls the Beep output (On/Off)
Subroutine StaticBeepCtrl(ON/OFF)
Controls the Beep output (On/Off). Assign 0 to turn off the beep sound.
Description
Other values will turn on the Beep.
Turns on the Beep.
Example
StaticBeepCtrl(1);
StaticBeepCtrl function only operates in the following models.
XT04CA, XT05SB, XT06CB, XT07CA, XT07CB
TouchCalib Brings up the touch calibration screen.
Brings up the touch calibration screen.
Description
After the calibration, you must restart the device.
Brings up the touch calibration screen.
Example
TouchCalib();
WindowsExplorer Brings up the Windows Explorer at the assigned position.
Subroutine WindowsExplorer(“Path”, “Extension”, X Coordinate, Y Coordinate)

Brings up the Windows Explorer at the assigned position.
Displays the all files that corresponds to the “Extension” in the “Path”.
The Windows Explorer will be opened at the X Coordinate, Y Coordinate.
When you enter “” to the “Extension”, the Explorer will display the entire file
Description
in the device.
To open the Explorer at the center of the screen assign -1 to X Coordinate
and Y Coordinate.
If you double-click the folder type, the folder will be opened.
Brings up the Window Explorer which displays the CSV files, at
the center of the screen.
Example
WindowsExplorer(“\Xpanel”, “CSV”, -1, -1);
25
Script (Appendix)
XpanelReset Restarts the Xpanel Runtime.
Subroutine XpanelReset()
Description Restarts the Xpanel Runtime. The Xpanel will be booted after 5 seconds.
Restarts the Xpanel Runtime.

Example
XpanelReset();
Functions for Alarm
AddMessage(Message ID, Added Adds a new message to the scroll message

Subroutine
Message) window.
AddMessageEx(Message ID, Added Adds a new message to the scroll message

Subroutine
Message,Level) window with a level.
AlaramCSVWr(AlarmGroup,
Subroutine “CSVFileName”, TimeDisplay, Saves the alarm messages as CSV file.
PrintOption, Location)
AlarmPrint(AlarmGroup,
Subroutine Messages,TimeDisplay, FontSize, Prints the alarm messages with printer.
PrintOption)
Deletes the entire alarm log of the assigned

alarm group.
Removes the scroll message which is added by

Subroutine RemoveMessage(MessageID)
AddMessage() function.
AddMessage Adds a new message to the scroll message window.
Subroutine AddMessage(Message ID, Added Message)

Adds a new message to the scroll message window.
At MessageID, you can enter the value from 0 to 9999. If you assign the
Description duplicated message ID, the recent message will be ignored.
Added Message can be written in strings with double quotation mark (“ ”) or
assigned with string tag.
Displays the “This message will be displayed at the bottom of the
window” at the scroll message.
Example
AddMessage(1, “This message will be displayed at the bottom of
the window”);
26
AddMessageEx Adds a new message to the scroll message window with a level.
Subroutine AddMessageEx(Message ID, Added Message,Level)

Adds a new message to the scroll message window.
At MessageID, you can enter the value from 0 to 9999. If you assign the
duplicated message ID, the recent message will be ignored.
Description Added Message can be written in strings with double quotation mark (“ ”) or
assigned with string tag.
At 레벨, you can assign the value from 0 to 7. The message will be displayed
with the corresponding level’s color.
Displays the “This message will be displayed at the bottom of the
window” at the scroll message with color of level 3.
Example
AddMessageEx(1, “This message will be displayed at the bottom of
the window”,3);
AlarmCsvWr Saves the alarm messages as CSV file.

AlarmCsvWr(AlarmGroup, “CSVFileName”, TimeDisplay, PrintOption,
Subroutine
Location)
Saves the messages of AlarmGroup at the assigned Location as
CSVFileName.
Enter 0 at Location to indicate the local. Assign 1 for SD/MMC and 2
for USB.
You can also use strings for the Location.
0: _LOCAL_
1: _SDMEM_
2: _USBMEM_
Description
The contents in the CSV file will be displayed with time data
according to the value you assign to the TimeDisplay.
3: MM/DD HH:MM:SS
5: HH:MM:SS
27
Script (Appendix)
According to the value assigned to the PrintOption, different

contents will be saved. If you wish to select multiple items,
distinguish them with vertical bar ( | ).
Saves the all contents of alarm group 1 as "AlmGrp1.CSV" in SD/MMC. The
contents will be displayed with time value in "YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS"

Example format.
AlarmCsvWr(1, "AlmGrp1", 0, _ALMPRT_ALL_, _SDMEM_);
AlarmPrint Prints the alarm messages with printer.

AlarmPrint(AlarmGroup, Messages,TimeDisplay, FontSize,
Subroutine
PrintOption)
Prints the content of AlarmGroup as much as the value assigned to
Messages (0~200 messages) with the assigned FontSize (10 or
bigger). The time will be displayed according to the value assigned
to the TimeDisplay.
3: MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Description
5: HH:MM:SS
According to the value assigned to the PrintOption, different
contents will be saved. If you wish to select multiple items,
distinguish them with vertical bar ( | ).
28

Prints out the recent 10 messages of alarm group 1.
Example
AlarmPrint(1, 10, 1, 10, _ALMPRT_ALL_);
ClearAlarmLog Deletes the entire alarm log of the assigned alarm group.
Description Deletes the entire alarm log of the assigned AlarmGroup (1~10).
Clears the log of the alarm group 1.
Example
ClearAlarmLog(1)
RemoveMessage Removes the scroll message which is added by AddMessage() function.
Subroutine RemoveMessage(MessageID)
Removes the scroll message which is added by AddMessage() function.
Assign the message ID (0~9999) to the MessageID.
Description
When you assign -1, all messages in the scroll message window will be
deleted.
Deletes the entire messages in the scroll message window.
Example
RemoveMessage(-1);
Functions for Recipe
Displays the recipe settings window in

Xpanel runtime.
RcpFileRead(“Model Name”, Reads the group data from recipe data

Subroutine
Group Number) file.
RcpFileStore(“Model Name”, Saves the model group data in the recipe

Subroutine
Group Number) file.
Downloads the model group data from

Xpanel to PLC.
Receives the data from PLC and saves at

the model group data in Xpanel.
29
Script (Appendix)
RcpDownLoad(“Model Name”, Downloads model group data to the

Subroutine
Group Number) PLC.
RcpUpLoad(“Model Name”, Reads PLC data and save it to the recipe

Subroutine
Group Number) file.
RcpCsvRd(“Model Name”, “CSV Reads recipe model group data (*.csv

Subroutine
File Name”, CSV file directory) file) and saves it in the memory.
RcpCsvWr(“Model Name”, “CSV Saves model group data in the memory

Subroutine
File Name”, CSV file directory) as a csv file format.
RcpGetSysMem(“Model Name”, Copies one block of system memory to

Subroutine
System memory address) Xpanel memory.
RcpSetSysMem(“Model Name”, Copies data in Xpanel memory and

Subroutine
System memory address) pastes to the system memory.
Returns the recipe group name which

Function GetRcpDnGroup(“Model Name”)
has downloaded recently.
RcpNewGroupName (“Model
Subroutine Name”, Group number, “New Changes the recipe group name.
group name”)
GetRcpGroupName (“Model
Function Returns the recipe group name.
name”, Group number)
GetRcpGroupName (“Model
Function Returns the name of recipe data.
name”, Data item number)
30
RcpConfig Displays the recipe settings window in Xpanel runtime.

Brings up the recipe dialog box which contains functions for
controlling the recipe operation.
Item Description
Model Changes current recipe model.
Group Changes current group to another group.
You may change the data name and setting values
Group List
Description by double-clicking on each item.
Saves modified group data in a recipe file (*.rcx). This
Save
command is the same as RcpFileStore().
Close Quits from the recipe dialog box.
Reads data from the PLC and save it in recipe model
Upload group data. This command is the same as
RcpMemUp().
Sends recipe model group data to the PLC. This
Download
command is the same as RcpMemDownload().
You can browse CSV file to retrieve model group
CSV Read
data. This command is the same as RcpCsvRd().
You can save current model group data as a CSV file.
CSV Write
This command is the same as RcpCsvWr().
If this option has enabled during pressing ‘CSV Read’
Replace
button, selected group name will be replaced with
Groupname
name of CSV file to read.
Enter the command to display the recipe dialog box.
Example
RcpConfig();
31
Script (Appendix)
RcpFileRead Reads the group data from recipe data file.

Subroutine RcpFileRead(“Model Name”, Group Number)
Description Reads the specified group data from the recipe data file.
Enter the command to read first group data of ‘ICECREAM’ model
Example from recipe data file.
RcpFileRead(“ICECREAM”, 1);
RcpFileStore Saves the model group data in the recipe file.

Subroutine RcpFileStore(“Model Name”, Group Number)
Saves the specified group data in the recipe data file. This subroutine
Description
is the same as ‘Save’ button of recipe dialog box.
Enter the command to save first group data of ‘ICECREAM’ model to
Example the recipe data file.
RcpFileStore (“ICECREAM”, 1);
RcpMemDown Downloads the model group data from Xpanel to PLC.

Transfers the model group data from Xpanel to the PLC. The group
Description
data must be stored in the Xpanel before using this subroutine.
Enter the command to download group data of ‘ICECREAM’ from
Example Xpanel to the PLC.
RcpMemDown (“ICECREAM”);
Receives the data from PLC and saves at the model group data in
RcpMemUp
Xpanel.
Uploads group data from PLC to recipe data file in the Xpanel. This
Description subroutine is used to save data in the Xpanel before using
RepMemDown() or RcpFileStore().
Enter the command to apply PLC data to the group data of
Example ‘ICECREAM’ model.
RcpMemUp (“ICECREAM”);
32
RcpDownLoad Downloads model group data to the PLC.

Subroutine RcpDownLoad(“Model Name”, Group Number)
Reads the specified group data and transfers directly to the PLC.
Description
Assign the group number from 0 to n.
Enter the command to download group data of number 0 to the
Example PLC directly.
RcpDownLoad("ICECREAM", 0);
RcpUpLoad Reads PLC data and save it to the recipe file.

Subroutine RcpUpLoad(“Model Name”, Group Number)
Reads the data from PLC and save it in the recipe data file. Assign the
Description
group number from 0 to n.
Enter the command to apply PLC data to the group data of number
Example 0.
RcpUpLoad("ICECREAM", 0);
If using RcpUpLoad/RcpDownload command consecutively, the latter

command will override the former command. To use these commands
subsequently, set enough interval between operations of two subroutines.
Ex)
Sleep(1000);
Reads recipe model group data (*.csv file) and saves it in the
RcpCsvRd
memory.
Subroutine RcpCsvRd(“Model Name”, “CSV File Name”, CSV file directory)
Replaces group data with specified CSV file data. Assign CSV file
directory as below table.
Description
1 SD/MMC
2 USB
Enter the command to read ‘Recipe.CSV’ file data stored in the USB
Example and save it to the Xpanel recipe file.
RcpCsvRd("ICECREAM", "Recipe", 2);
33
Script (Appendix)
RcpCsvWr Saves model group data in the memory as a csv file format.
Subroutine RcpCsvWr(“Model Name”, “CSV File Name”, CSV file directory)
Saves current group data as a CSV file format with specified file
name. Assign CSV file directory as below table.
Description
1 SD/MMC
2 USB
Enter the command to save the ‘ICECREAM’ group data as a csv file
format. The file name will be designated as ‘Recipe.csv’, and will be
Example
saved in the USB.
RcpCsvWr("°ICECREAM", "Recipe", 2);
RcpGetSysMem Copies one block of system memory to Xpanel memory.

Subroutine RcpGetSysMem(“Model Name”, System memory address)
Description Copies one block of system memory to Xpanel memory.
Enter the command to retrieve ‘ICECREAM’ model data from
Example system memory No. 100.
RcpSetSysMem Copies data in Xpanel memory and pastes to the system memory.
Subroutine RcpSetSysMem(“Model Name”, System memory address)
Description Copies data in Xpanel memory and pastes to the system memory.
Enter the command to paste “ICECREAM” recipe data to the system
Example memory sequentially from no. 100.
GetRcpDnGroup Returns the recipe group name which has downloaded recently.
Subroutine GetRcpDnGroup(“Model Name”)
Description Returns the recipe group name which has downloaded recently.
Enter the command to store the recent group name of
Example ‘ICECREAM’ model in the ‘GROUP’ tag.
GROUP = GetRcpDnGroup(“ICECREAM”);
34
RcpNewGroupName Changes the recipe group name.

RcpNewGroupName (“Model Name”, Group number, “New
Subroutine
group name”)
Replaces specified group name with new group name. The
Description
group number starts from 0.
Change the group name in number 3 of ‘ICECREAM’ model
Example as ‘CHOCO’.
RcpNewGroupName (“ICECREAM”, 3, “CHOCO”);
GetRcpGroupName Returns the recipe group name.

Subroutine GetRcpGroupName (“Model name”, Group number)
Returns the specified group name. The group number starts
Description
from 0.
Gets the group name in number 1 of ‘ICECREAM’ model and
Example store it in the ‘MODEL’ tag.
MODEL = GetRcpGroupName (“ICECREAM”, 1);
GetRcpItemName Returns the name of recipe data.

Subroutine GetRcpGroupName (“Model name”, Data item number)
Returns the specified data item name. The item number starts
Description
from 0.
Gets the data name in number 1 of ‘ICECREAM’ model and
Example store it in the ‘ITEM’ tag.
ITEM = GetRcpItemName (“ICECREAM”, 1);
35
Script (Appendix)
Functions for Schedule
Displays the schedule list dialog box in

the Xpanel runtime.
SetScheduleSysMem(Schedule
Modifies the schedule directly without
Subroutine Index, Starting Address of
using schedule setting window.
SYSTEM MEMORY)
GetScheduleSysMem(Schedule
Obtains the time data of certain
Function Index, Starting Address of
schedule.
SYSTEM MEMORY)
SetScheduleState(Schedule Changes the active state of certain

Subroutine
Index, Active State) schedule.
GetScheduleState(Schedule Obtains the active state of certain

Function
Index) schedule.
ScheduleConfig Displays the schedule list dialog box in the Xpanel runtime.
Brings up the ‘Schedule list’ dialog box. The schedule data is stored
in the Xpanel system memory. You can change the time setting
and active state of each schedule.
Description
When double-clicking each item, ‘Schedule Config’ dialog box will
appear. You must click ‘Save and Close’ button to apply changes.
The time data can be changed in the ‘Schedule Config’ dialog box.
Brings up the schedule list on the screen.
Example
ScheduleConfig();
36
Modifies the schedule directly without using schedule setting

SetScheduleSysMem
window.
SetScheduleSysMem(Schedule Index, Starting Address of
Subroutine
SYSTEM MEMORY)
This subroutine is used to modify the schedule directly
without using ‘Schedule config’ dialog box. To use this
command, 7 system memory tags must be registered
sequentially. System memory tags must have consecutive
addresses. If the system memory is used for recipe as well,
the addresses must not be overlapped each other.
Enter the time data in each system memory tag as shown

below table.
System
Description Range of Input Value
Memory
0 Not repeat
1 Annually
Description 2 Monthly
Repeat
0 3 Daily
Settings
4 End of Month
5 Hourly
6 Weekly
1 Year Available from 2011 to 2041
2 Month Available from 1 to12
3 Date Available from 0 to 31
4 Hour Available from 0 to 23
5 Minute Available from 0 to 59
1 Sunday
2 Monday
3 Tuesday
6 Day 4 Wednesday
5 Thursday
6 Friday
7 Saturday
37
Script (Appendix)
st
Enter the command to change the 1 schedule list to match
Example with the time data saved in system memory address 0 to 6.
SetScheduleSysMem(1, 0);
GetScheduleSysMem Obtains the time data of certain schedule.

n = GetScheduleSysMem(Schedule Index, Starting Address of
Function
SYSTEM MEMORY)
Returns the time data of specified schedule index. To use this
command, 7 system memory tags must be registered
Description sequentially.
※ Please refer to the description of ‘SetScheduleSysMem’
command for configuring tag data.
st
Enter the command to obtain the time data of 1 schedule
Example from system memory address 0 to 6.
TIME = GetScheduleSysMem(1, 0);
SetScheduleState Changes the active state of certain schedule.

Subroutine SetScheduleState(Schedule Index, Active State)
This subroutine is used to change the active state of specified
schedule.
Description Active State Description

st
Activate the 1 schedule.
Example
SetScheduleState(1, 1);
GetScheduleState Obtains the active state of certain schedule.

Subroutine n = GetScheduleState(Schedule Index)
Returns the active state of specified schedule.
Description
st
Enter the command to obtain the active state of 1 schedule.
Example
STATE = GetScheduleState(1);
38
Function for Trend
TrendCsvWr(“TrendName”,
Subroutine Saves the trend data as CSV file.
Location)
TrendCsvWr Saves the trend data as CSV file.

Subroutine 명 TrendCsvWr(“TrendName”, Location)
Saves the assigned TrendName to the assigned location in CSV file
format.
When you assign 0 at Location, it means the local. The value 1
means the SD/MMC and the value 2 means the USB.
Description You can also assign the Location as shown below.

0: _LOCAL_
1: _SDMEM_
2: _USBMEM_
The file is saved as “Trendname_MMDDHHmmss.CSV”.
Saves the trend object named “Trend” as CSV file in USB memory.
Example
TrendCsvWr(“Trend”,2)
39
Script (Appendix)
Functions for Security
Subroutine LogOn(“UserID”, “Password”) Logs on with the user information.
Subroutine LogOff() Logs out the current user.
Subroutine LogOnWin() Brings up the User Log On window.
Function GetSecurity() Returns the current security level.
LogOn Logs on with the user information.

Subroutine LogOn(“UserID”,”Password”)
Logs on with the user ID and password which is registered in the
‘Security’. If the wrong information is used, the message will pop up
as shown below.
Description
Logs on with the user ID “CIMON”, password “0000”.

Example
LogOn(“CIMON”,”0000”)
LogOff Logs out the current user.

Subroutine LogOff()
Description Logs out the current user.
Logs out the current user.

Example
LogOff()
40
LogOnWin Brings up the User Log On window.

Brings up the User Log On window on Xpanel. If there is no
registered user in the project, the window will not appear.
Description
Select a user and enter the password.
If you enter a wrong password, the message will pop up as shown
below.
Brings up the User Log On window.

Example
LogOnWin()
GetSecurity Returns the current security level.

Function n=GetSecurity()
Description Returns the current security level and store the value to the variable.
Stores the current security level to the variable “Slevel”.
Var Slevel;;
Example
……
Slevel = GetSecurity();
41
Script (Appendix)
Functions for System Memory
Function GetSysMem(System Memory Address) Returns the system memory value.
SetSysMem(System Memory Address,

Subroutine Sets the system memory value.
Set Value)
SysMemFill(System Memory Address, Fills the block of system memory with the
Subroutine
Data, Number of data) assigned value.
SysMemMove(Current Address, Target Moves the data block in the system

Subroutine
Address, Number of Data) memory.
GetSysMem Returns the system memory value.

Function n=GetSysMem(System Memory Address)
Description Returns the value assigned to System Memory Address.
Stores the System Memory 100’s value to the variable VAL.
Example VAR VAL;
VAL=GetSysMem(100);
SetSysMem Sets the system memory value.
Subroutine SetSysMem(System Memory Address, Set Value)

Description Sets the value to the assigned System Memory Address.
Sets 1234 to the System Memory 100.

Example
SetSysMem(100, 1234);
SysMemFill Fills the block of system memory with the assigned value.
Subroutine SysMemFill(System Memory Address, Data, Number of data)
Fills the assigned number of memories starting from System Memory Address
Description
, with the Data.
Fills the value 1234 to the 10 memories starting from System
Example Memory 100.
SysMemFill(100, 1234, 10);
42
SysMemMove Moves the data block in the system memory.
Subroutine SysMemMove(Current Address, Target Address, Number of Data)

Moves the block of system memories starting from the Current Address to
Description the Target Address.
If the memories overlap, the overlapped area will maintain the existing data.
Moves the 10 memories starting from the system memory 100 to
Example the 200. (100~109 to 200~209)
SysMemMove(100, 200, 10);
Functions for Data Logging
Creates or stops the data logging

block.

MakeCsv(“LogModelName”,
Subroutine SD/MMC memory in CSV file
BlockNumber)
format.
MakeCsvUsb(“LogModelName”, Saves the data block to the USB
Subroutine
BlockNumber) storage in CSV file format.

MakeLogCsv(“LogModelName”,
Subroutine assigned location in CSV file
BlockNumber, Location)
format.
MakeLogCsvEx(“Header”, Saves the data block in CSV file

Subroutine “LogModelName”, BlockNumber, format and stores the header
Location) name at cell A1.
DataLog Creates or stops the data logging block.

Creates or stops the data logging block.
Description Enter 0 at BlockControl to stop the block. Enter 1 to create a new
block.
Creates a new block for the data logging model “LOG” and start
Example logging.
DataLog(“LOG”,1)
43
Script (Appendix)
MakeCsv Saves the data block to the SD/MMC memory in CSV file format.
Subroutine MakeCsv(“LogModelName”, BlockNumber)
Saves the assigned LogModelName ‘s data block to the SD/MMC
Description memory in CSV file format.
th
Saves the 10 data block in data logging model “LOG” to SD/MMC
Example memory in CSV file format.
MakeCsv(“LOG”,10)
MakeCsvUsb Saves the data block to the USB storage in CSV file format.
Subroutine MakeCsvUsb(“LogModelName”, BlockNumber)
Saves the assigned LogModelName ‘s data block to the USB storage
Description in CSV file format.
th
Saves the 10 data block in data logging model “LOG” to USB in
Example CSV file format.
MakeCsvUsb(“LOG”,10)
MakeLogCsv Saves the data block to the assigned location in CSV file format.
Subroutine MakeLogCsv(“LogModelName”, BlockNumber, Location)
Saves the assigned LogModelName ‘s data block to the assigned
location in CSV file format.
th
Saves the 10 data block in data logging model “LOG” to USB in CSV
Example file format.
MakeLogCsv(“LOG”,10,2)
44
Saves the data block in CSV file format and stores the header name
MakeLogCsvEx
at cell A1.
MakeLogCsvEx(“Header”, “LogModelName”, BlockNumber,
Subroutine
Location)
Saves the assigned LogModelName ‘s data block in CSV file format
and stores the header name at cell A1.
th
Saves the 10 data block in data logging model “LOG” to USB in CSV
file format.
Example
Sets the header name “Header” at cell A1.
MakeLogCsvEx(“Header”,”LOG”,10,2)
Function for String Editor
StringTable (“Group Number”,

Function Gets a string data from string table.
“String number in a group”)
StringTable Gets a string data from string table.

Function n = StringTable (“Group Number”, “String number in a group”)
Returns a string data from specified string group. A string tag must
Description
be used for the string data.
Returns the first string data in group number 1.
Example StrTag = StringTable (1, 1)
45
Script (Appendix)
Functions for Communication
OpenPort(PortNo., BaudRate,
Function Opens the serial port.
Parity, Data Bit, Stop Bit)
Function ClosePort(PortNo) Closes the serial port.
Function SendByte(PortNo., Data) Sends byte data with the selected port.
Sends string data with the selected

port.
Function ReceiveByte(PortNo, Data) Receives data with the selected port.
GetCommStatus(“DeviceName”, Checks the selected station’s

Function
“StationName”) communication status.
EnableDriver(“DeviceName”, Controls the selected station’s

Subroutine
“StationName”, Enable/Disable) communication.
46
 EnableDriver() command only supports MODBUS RTU.

(XpanelDesigner V2.52)
 GetCommStatus() command can only be used in the XpanelDesigner
V2.52 or above.
PortNo., BaudRate, Parity, Stop Bit use predefined constants. Refer to the table shown
below for the details.

_BPS300_ 300 bps
_BPS600_ 600bps
_BPS1200_ 1200bps
_BPS2400_ 2400bps
_BPS4800_ 4800bps
_BPS9600_ 9600bps
_BPS19200_ 19200bps
_BPS38400_ 38400bps
_BPS56000_ 56000bps
_BPS57600_ 57600bps
_BPS115200_ 115200bps
_BPS128000_ 128000bps
_BPS256000_ 256000bps
47
Script (Appendix)
OpenPort Opens the serial port.

Function n=OpenPort(PortNo., BaudRate, Parity, Data Bit, Stop Bit)
BaudRate (use predefined constant, _BPSxxx_)
Parity (use predefined constant, _PARITY_xxx_)
Data Bit (7 or 8)
Stop Bit (use predefined constant, _STOPBIT_xxx_)
This function opens the assigned serial port. You cannot use this
Description
function if the port has already been opened.
Once you opened the COM port with the script, it has to be closed
with ClosePort() function.
When an error occurs during the port opening, the script will return
0. If the port is successfully opened, the script will return the value
other than 0.
Opens COM1 port with following options; RS485, 19200bps, No
Parity, Data Bit 8, Stop Bit 1.
Example
OpenPort(_COM485_, _BPS19200_, _PARITY_NONE_, 8,
_STOPBIT_ONE_);
ClosePort Closes the serial port.

Function n=ClosePort(PortNo.)
Closes the assigned serial port which is opened by the OpenPort()
function.
Description
When an error occurs during the port closing, the script will return 0.
If the port is successfully closed, the script will return the value other
than 0.
Closes COM1 port.
Example
ClosePort(_COM485_);
48
SendByte Sends byte data with the selected port.

Function n=SendByte(PortNo., Data)
Data (0~255)
This function is used when you wish to transmit a data with the COM
port which is opened by OpenPort() function.
Data must be a byte data in the range of 0(0x00) to 255(0xFF). If the
data is greater than 255(0xFF), only the lower byte will be transmitted.
Description For example, if you assign Data with 0x1234, only 0x34 will be
transmitted.
OpenPort() function must be used before the execution of SendByte()
function.
If the data is successfully transmitted, the script will return the value
other than 0.
Transmits byte data “2” through COM1 port which uses RS485
SendByte(_COM485_, 2);
SendString Sends string data with the selected port.

Data (Enter the String Tag or “String”)
This function is used when you wish to transmit a data with the COM
The Data must be assigned with string tag or string data. If you use the
Description string data, it must be used with double quotation marks. (“ “)
OpenPort() function must be used before the execution of
SendString() function.
If the data is successfully transmitted, the script will return the value
other than 0.
Transmits byte data “TEXT” through COM1 port which uses RS485
SendString(_COM485_, “TEXT”);
49
Script (Appendix)
ReceiveByte Receives data with the selected port.

Function ReceiveByte(PortNo., Data)
Data (0~255)
This function is used when you wish to receive a data with the COM
Description Once you receive the data successfully, the Data (0~255) will be
stored in the variable. If there is no received data until the timeout,
the script will return 256.
OpenPort() function must be used before the execution of
ReceiveByte() function.
Receives byte data through the COM1 port which uses RS485
communication. Saves the received data at the variable ‘RxData’.
VAR RxData;
OpenPort(_COM485_, _BPS19200_, _PARITY_NONE_, 8,
_STOPBIT_ONE_);
Example
RxData = RecieveByte(_COM485_, 1000);
If(RxData < 256)
{
}
……
GetCommStatus Checks the selected station’s communication status.

Function GetCommStatus(“DeviceName”, “StationName”)
Returns the status of the assigned DeviceName ‘s StationName.. If
Description the communication is normal, the script will return 1. If there is an
error at the communication, the script will return 0.
Checks the communication status of the device “PLC”’s station
Example “STATION”.
CommStatus = GetCommStatus(“PLC”,”STATION);
50
EnableDriver Controls the selected station’s communication.

Subroutine EnableDriver(“DeviceName”, “StationName”, Enable/Disable)
Controls the communication of the assigned DeviceName ‘s
StationName.
Enter 1 to Enable/Disable to enable the communication. Enter 0 to
Description
disable the communication.
This function only supports MODBUS RTU at Xpanel Designer
V2.52.
Enables the station “STATION “ of “MODBUS” device.
Example
EnableDriver(“MODBUS”, “STATION”, 1);
Function for Print
Subroutine HardCopy() Prints out the runtime screen of Xpanel.
HardCopy Prints out the runtime screen of Xpanel.

Description Prints out the runtime screen of Xpanel.
Prints out the runtime screen of Xpanel.
Example
HardCopy()
51
Appendix 2 How to Use Ethernet Loader

The Ethernet Loader is an embedded program in xpanel to upload or download projects
via Ethenet. This function also allows updating the project with an removable disk.
Xpanel IP Setting
Xpanel IP Setting
a) Select the field to change IP address, subnet mask, or gateway in (1). You can erase
numbers at once by clicking ‘Cl.’ Button. Select the ‘DHCP’ checkbox to assign a
dynamic IP to Xpanel. The input fields will be disabled in this moment.
b) In (2) you can enter numbers and period (‘.’) into the input fields. You can remove
numbers on by on with ‘BS’ button.
c) Apply the IP setting to the Xpanel by pressing (3) ‘Apply this new setting.’ button.
Then the system will be restarted.
1
How to Use Ethernet Loader
Project Update
Project Update by Ethernet Loader
a) Copy the project file into the removable disk by selecting [Online]-[Copy project to
removable memory] in the Xpanel Designer.
※ Please refer to the ‘Online menu’ manual for more information about ‘Copy
project to removable memory’ function.
b) Connect the removable disk that has the updated project to Xpanel.
c) Select (1) ‘Removable Storage → Xpanel’ button in the Ethernet Loader dialog box.
2
d) Select (2) ‘Refresh’ and you will see projects in removable disk that can be uploaded.
e) The name of project stored in the removable disk are listed in the (4).
f) Click a project to update on the list and select (3) ‘Project Update’ button.
g) The content for updating project is displayed in the (5). The message ‘All file update:
OK’ will be displayed when update is finished.
 When you select [Project Update], the project and application

program in the Xpanel will be deleted first.
 [Project Update] button will be deactivated when the procedure
starts and reactivated when update is complete. “All file update:
OK” message will appear when update is completed.
 Do not touch the panel during update as it could cause incorrect.
h) Close the dialog box by clicking ‘X’ button.
i) Remove the removable disk from Xpanel and double-click the ‘Xpanel’ icon to launch
the project.
3
Project Upload
Opening project with removable disk
You can transfer the project from Xpanel to the Xpanel Designer via removable disk.
a) Connect USB or SD card to the Xpanel and select [Removable Storage ← Xpanel] in
Ethernet Loader dialog box.
b) A check mark inside the box will indicate the media type that is connected. A Success
message will appear when you select [Project Upload] and upload is completed.
c) Xpanel project file is copied to Upload folder located in USB or SD card.
4
d) Connect USB or SD card to the PC. Go to [Online] – [Upload from Storage] in Xpanel
Designer.
e) Specify the project path of copied project file. Project file located in Xpanel will
appear on the list.
f) Specify the path and select [OK] to convert, save, and open editable project.
g) A message will appear when conversion is completed. Click [OK] to open the
converted project file.
5
Other Features
Item Description
Watchdog Timer is a function that automatically resets the hardware when

project data has been failed to operate. You can assign from 10 to 65535
Watchdog Time
seconds for watchdog operation. This function operates properly in the
project 2.09 and above versions.
If the touch points are severely mislocated and unable to use mouse, you
Hold time for can press a random point of the screen to start the touch calibration. You
Touch Calibration can assign the holding time from 30 to 32676 seconds.
※ Please refer to the ‘Xpanel repair mode’ manual for more information.
It beeps while
Beep sounds continuously while touching the Xpanel screen.
touching screen
This option is for using remote control server.
※ Please refer to the ‘VNC’ manual for more information.
VNC activates as The remote control server starts automatically
VNC Option
Ethernet loader starts when the checkbox has selected.
Run VNC Server Starts the remote control server.
Stop VNC Server Terminates the remote control server..
When an error occurs during downloading the project to Xpanel, you can
REPAIR Mode fix the error through repair mode.
※ Please refer to the ‘Xpanel repair mode’ manual for more information.
Saves the settings in ‘Configure’ dialog box and goes back to the Ethernet
Save and Quit
loader.
Quit Closes the ‘Configure’ dialog box without saving the settings.
6
Appendix 3 Xpanel Troubleshooting

This section describes errors that may happen during Xpanel runtime and actions to be
taken.
Booting Problem
There are cases where Xpanel cannot boot up normally after power is on. Verify the
power capacity or damage to the external power supply. Check if the power cable is
securely connected. If there is no problem with the power supply, please refer to the
following troubleshooting procedures below.
(1) Freezes in Windows CE loading screen.
 The Windows OS file could be damaged.
Restart the product. If the same problem occurs, please contact vendor or CIMON service
center.
(2) The screen stops loading as shown in the image below.
 A project file could be damaged or lost.
Download the same project from Xpanel Designer to Xpanel.
※ Please refer to the ‘Online menu’ manual to get information about ways to download
project.
1
Xpanel Troubleshooting
(3) It does not convert from Windows CE main screen to project screen automatically.
 Xpanel Designer’s application program could be damaged or lost.
Upgrade Xpanel application program
If you know the version of application program or project, download the same version of
Xpanel Deisner in the CIMON website (www.cimon.com). Upgrade application program
as below.
When there is no project backup file, upgrade the application program

after uploading the project When there is no project backup file, upgrade
the application program after uploading the project.
2
If you don’t know the version of application program or project, upload the project and
install recent version of Xpanel Designer in the CIMON website (www.cimon.com).
Upgrade application program as below.
※ Please refer to ‘Online menu’ manual to get information about uploading or
downloading a project from Xpanel Designer.
The project will not operate correctly if the version of the Xpanel Designer
that was used to create the project is different from the version of the
Xpanel Designer that is running the project. Update or downgrade the
software until both versions are identical.
a) Go to [Online] – [Upgrade Xpanel Application Program] and specify the connection

method.
b) Confirm the upgrade version.
c) A dialog box appears when application program upgrade is completed.
3
d) Upload the project or project backup file from Xpanel Designer and download it to
Xpanel.
e) Check if the project screen appears properly by double-clicking [Xpanel] icon.
Touch Problem
First, check if the protective film is removed. Protective film is only there for temporary
protection of product. It must be removed before operating the product. If there seems
to be a problem even when the protective film is removed, please refer to the following
steps.
(1) Intended and actual touch points are different.
The device might require additional calibration. Calibration methods are described below.
 Calibrating Xpanel using long-touch
The way can be only used when preset below is applied.
Xpanel Calibration using long-touch

a) Select [Configure] in the Ethernet loader dialog box.
4
b) Check the box [Hold time for Touch Calibration] and set touch time in range of 30
seconds to 32767 seconds. Select [Save and Quit].
c) When the location is not recognized, give a long-touch to Xpanel screen during
preset time (default value is 30 seconds).
5
d) Click the center of cross mark according to introduction.
e) Confirm the touch statement after calibration is completed.
6
 Setting in the Xpanel config dialog box
When the problem occurred in emergency situation that you cannot use calibration
setting for long-touch, you may connect a mouse to the USB host of Xpanel and perform
calibration easily.
Xpanel Calibration using mouse

a) You can connect a mouse to the USB host port of Xpanel. Click as numbered
sequence shown below to bring up Xpanel Config dialog box.
b) Select [Touch Calibration].
7
c) Click the center of cross mark according to introduction.
d) Confirm the touch statement after calibration is completed.
(2) There is no response after screen is touched.
When the same situation occurs even when you have restarted Xpanel, contact vendor
or CIMON service center for product inspection.
8
Communication Problem
Since Xpanel operates with multiple external devices, there is a greater chance of
exposure to external noise. Especially when used together with other companies’
products, there could be communication problems due to different settings or
specifications.
The following are basic descriptions of and solutions to communication problems.

Contact CIMON service center or other companies’ service center to acquire detailed
troubleshooting information.
(1) Serial communication is not available.
 Cable could be damaged or with a wrong standard.
Check the connection status of cable or exchange the cable.
 Settings for communication could be the cause.
Run the Xpanel Designer and go to [Tools] – [I/O Device] or double-click device
information. Confirm that communication setting is the same as PLC.
9
Make sure to configure the station number of CICON and Xpanel Designer to be
identical.
In the case when the communication setting is different between Xpanel

and PLC, communication is not possible. Check if communication settings
are identical.
(2) Ethernet communication is not available.
 The Ethernet IP address could be configured incorrectly. Please refer to the

communication setting.
 The Ethernet cable could be damaged or unsuitable. Replace the cable.
 The Ethernet port on Xpanel, PC or connected device could be damaged. Please
verify the condition of the port.
 The firewall of the other device could a cause of communication problem. Modify
the firewall setting after consulting with the network security manager.
10

CIMON-Xpanel User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CIMON-Xpanel User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CIMON-Xpanel User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1 Xpanel Installation..............................................................................................................

Installation of Xpanel Designer

Follow the steps below to download the Xpanel Designer.

a) Go to Cimon website (www.cimon.com).

b) Go to [Customer Service] – [Download Center] on the top menu of the website.

d) Click the download file at the bottom of the page.

e) Execute the installer file on the directory.

 Xpanel Designer 2.50 and below versions are installed in ‘C:\CIMON\Xpanel’ by

k) Press [Finish] button to end the Xpanel Designer installation.

l) Launch the Xpanel Designer to check if the installation is successfully done.

This section describes the procedure of uninstalling Xpanel Designer.

Uninstalling Xpanel Designer

2.1 Xpanel Designer Startup

2.1.1 Xpanel Designer Startup

2.1.2 Xpanel Designer Shortcut

Shortcut for executing Xpanel Designer as administrator

a) Go to Xpanel Designer installed path. The default path is

2.1.3 Xpanel Designer Autorun

Registering Xpanel Designer as a starting program

(1) OS version below Windows 8 (Windows XP, Windows 7, etc.)

a) Right-click on the “XpanelDesigner.exe” icon. Click [Send to] – [Desktop (Create

b) Open the [Startup] window.

c) Move shortcut icon of Xpanel Designer into the [Startup] folder.

(2) Windows 8 and above (Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10)

a) Right-click on the “XpanelDesigner.exe” icon. Click {Send to] – [Desktop (create

b) Open the [Control Panel] and go to [Administrative Tools] – [Task Scheduler].

h) Finish the configuration by pressing the [Finish] button on the window.

2.1.4 Xpanel Designer Project Execution

Opening project in Xpanel Designer

c) The desired project will be opened in Xpanel Designer.

2.2 Xpanel Designer Termination

This section will discuss various methods of terminating Xpanel Designer.

Xpanel Designer Termination

Yes Saves the changes and closes Xpanel Designer.

No Does not save the changes and closes Xpanel Designer.

Cancel Cancels the termination of Xpanel Designer.

2.3 Xpanel Designer Startup Screen

2.3.1 Xpanel Designer Startup Page Interface

button will fix the panel to the screen.

2.3.2 Xpanel Designer Menu

※ Refer to each item’s manual for more information.

File Opens or closes files in Xpanel Designer.

(1) Page Edit Menu

File [Close], [Close All Page], [Recent Page] are added.

(2) Project Management Menu

Help [About Project Manager] is added.

(3) Database Menu

Edit [New Tag], [Edit Tag] are added.

(4) Script Menu

(5) Data Logging Menu

Help [About Data Logging] is added.

(6) String Editor Menu

(7) Data Server (Modbus Slave) Menu

(8) Recipe Menu

(9) Data Bridge Menu

2.3.3 Standard Tool

The standard toolbar contains frequently-used commands in Xpanel Designer. Go to

New Page Creates a new graphic page for the project.

Open Opens an existing graphic page.

Save Saves the currently designing graphic page.